JP7414315B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine represented by a pinball game machine (pachinko machine), a reel game machine (slot machine), an enclosed game machine, or a medalless slot machine.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, a slot machine, for example, has been known as one type of gaming machine. Some of these slot machines are equipped with a control means for setting an advantageous state advantageous to the player (for example, see Patent Document 1).

JP2016-73461A

However, in conventional game machines, there is room for improvement in the control means.

An object of the present invention is to provide a game machine having special features in its control means.

In order to solve the above problems, the game machine according to the present invention includes:
an error detection means capable of detecting an error;
a first notification means capable of performing error notification;
a second notification means capable of executing error notification;
A game machine comprising a predetermined operation means capable of canceling the error notification,
The error detection means includes:
There is a first error detection means capable of detecting the first error, and a second error detection means capable of detecting the second error,
The first notification means is
When the second error is detected by the second error detection means in a state where the first error is detected by the first error detection means (hereinafter referred to as the "first case"), A first error notification to notify that the first error has been detected can be executed, and a second error notification can be executed to notify that the second error has been detected,
In the first case, in a state where the first error notification and the second error notification are being executed, removing the cause of the first error and the cause of the second error. When the canceling operation is performed once after removing the error notification, the first error notification is terminated while the second error notification is continued;
When the first error is detected by the first error detection means in a state where the second error is detected by the second error detection means (hereinafter referred to as "second case"), The first error notification can be executed and the second error notification can be executed,
In the second case, in a state where the first error notification and the second error notification are being executed, removing the cause of the first error and the cause of the second error. means for continuing the second error notification while terminating the first error notification when the cancellation operation is performed once after the removal of the error notification;
The second notification means is
In the first case, the first error notification is executed while the second error notification is not executed;
In the second case, means for executing the first error notification while not executing the second error notification,
The second notification means has a smaller display area than the first notification means,
It is characterized by

According to the game machine according to the present invention, it is possible to provide a game machine having a unique control means.

1 is an external perspective view of the slot machine 100 seen from the front side (player side). FIG. FIG. 2 is a front view showing the slot machine 100 with the front door 102 open. FIG. 3 shows a circuit block diagram of a control section. (a) It is a diagram showing the arrangement of symbols on each reel (left reel 110, middle reel 111, right reel 112) developed in a two-dimensional manner. (b) It is a diagram showing the types of winning combinations (including activation combinations), the symbol combinations corresponding to each winning combination, and the activation or payout of each winning combination. 5 is a flowchart showing the flow of main control unit main processing. 5 is a flowchart showing the flow of initial setting processing. 7 is a flowchart showing the flow of setting change processing. 5 is a flowchart showing the flow of main control unit timer interrupt processing. 7 is a flowchart showing the flow of device monitoring processing. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of setting value confirmation processing. 7 is a flowchart showing the flow of other device monitoring processing. (A) A diagram showing the flow of a setting change mode in chronological order. (B) A diagram showing the flow of the setting confirmation mode in chronological order. (A) It is a diagram showing the flow of display example 1 of the management screen in chronological order. (B) A diagram showing the flow of display example 2 of the management screen in chronological order. (A) A diagram showing the flow of display example 3 of the management screen in chronological order. (B) A diagram showing the flow of display example 4 of the management screen in chronological order. (A) It is a diagram showing the flow of display example 1 of error notification in chronological order. (B) A diagram showing the flow of display example 2 of error notification in chronological order. (A) A diagram showing the flow of display example 1 of the management screen and error notification in chronological order. (B) It is a diagram showing the flow of display example 2 of the management screen and error notification in chronological order. (A) A diagram showing the flow of displaying setting history in chronological order. (B) A diagram showing the flow of error history display in chronological order. (A) It is a diagram showing the flow of volume adjustment in chronological order when the management screen is not displayed. (B) It is a diagram showing the flow of volume adjustment in chronological order when the management screen is displayed. This is a simple game flow showing an AT type game state. (a) It is a diagram showing an example of transition of performance states in an advantageous section. (b) A diagram showing an example of a CZ determination table used for CZ lottery in the normal stage. (c) It is a figure showing an example of the CZ judgment table used for CZ lottery in stock time. It is a diagram showing an example of performance in stock time in chronological order. It is a diagram showing an example of production in a normal stage in chronological order. 1 is an external perspective view of the slot machine 100 seen from the front side (player side). FIG. 3 is a diagram showing an example of a winning line of the slot machine 100. FIG. FIG. 3 shows a circuit block diagram of a control section. It is a diagram showing the arrangement of symbols on each reel (left reel 110, middle reel 111, right reel 112) developed in a plan view. It is a diagram showing types of winning combinations, names of condition devices, symbol combinations corresponding to each winning combination, number of payouts, and notes. (a) It is a diagram showing the symbol combinations, payout numbers, and notes corresponding to the small winning combination 3 (press order bell) and the small winning combination 5 (1-card winning). (b) It is a diagram showing the relationship between the pressing order of the stop buttons 137 to 139 in a game in which the small winning combination 3 (pressing order bell) is internally won and the AT game. (c) It is a diagram showing the relationship between the pressing order of the stop buttons 137 to 139 in a game in which the small winning combination 5 (one-card winning combination) is internally won and the setting suggestion performance A. (a) It is a time chart showing an example of the game period of the high probability mode and the low probability mode of setting suggestion performance A. (b) It is a figure showing an example of a setting suggestion performance A selection table used for setting suggestion performance A lottery. (a) It is a time chart showing an example of the game period of the high probability mode and the low probability mode of setting suggestion performance B. (b) It is a figure showing an example of a setting suggestion performance B selection table used for setting suggestion performance B lottery. 5 is a flowchart showing the flow of main control unit main processing. 5 is a flowchart showing the flow of main control unit timer interrupt processing. (a) is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400; (b) is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing of the first sub-control unit 400; (c) is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing of the first sub-control unit 400; (a) It is a flowchart of the main processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500. (b) is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing of the second sub-control unit 500; (c) A flowchart of timer interrupt processing by the second sub-control unit 500. (d) It is a flowchart of image control processing of the second sub-control unit 500. It is a figure showing example 1 of a setting suggestion performance A in chronological order. It is a figure showing example 2 of a setting suggestion performance A in chronological order. It is a diagram showing a presentation example of setting suggestion presentation B in chronological order. 1 is an external perspective view of the slot machine 100 seen from the front side (player side). FIG. FIG. 2 is a front view showing the slot machine 100 with the front door 102 open. It is a circuit block diagram of a control part. 5 is a flowchart showing the flow of main control unit main processing. 42 is a flowchart showing the flow of initial setting processing (step S101) in the main control unit main processing of FIG. 41. FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing the flow of setting change processing (step S206) in the initial setting processing of FIG. 42. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing the flow of main control unit timer interrupt processing. 45 is a flowchart showing the flow of device monitoring processing (step S408) in the main control unit timer interrupt processing of FIG. 44. FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing the flow of setting value confirmation processing (step S501) in the device monitoring processing of FIG. 45. FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing the flow of other device monitoring processing (step S504) in the device monitoring processing of FIG. 45. FIG. (a) is a flowchart of the main processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400, (b) is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt process of the first sub-control unit 400, and (c) is a flowchart of the main processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. 5 is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing by the first sub-control unit 400. FIG. (a) is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500, (b) is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt process of the second sub-control unit 500, and (c) is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500. 3 is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing of the second sub-control unit 500, and (d) is a flowchart of image control processing of the second sub-control unit 500. FIG. (A) is a diagram illustrating an example of operation when a setting change is executed, and (B) is a diagram illustrating an example of operation when setting value confirmation is executed. (A) is a diagram showing an example of the operation when the front door 102 is closed while the setting change is being executed, and (B) is a diagram showing an example of the operation when the front door 102 is closed while the setting value confirmation is being executed. . FIG. 6 is a diagram illustrating an example of the operation when the setting key SW is in the ON state. FIG. 6 is a diagram illustrating an example of error notification and error cancellation operations. (A) is a diagram showing an example of the operation of error notification and error cancellation during setting change, and (B) is a diagram showing an example of the operation of error notification and error cancellation during setting value confirmation. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing a timing chart regarding error detection. It is a figure which shows the modification of error notification and error cancellation. It is a figure which shows the modification when the front door 102 is closed during execution of setting value confirmation. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating an example of a shutter confirmation operation. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating an example of a speaker confirmation operation. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating an example of a shutter confirmation operation.

<<Embodiment 1>>
DESCRIPTION OF THE PREFERRED EMBODIMENTS A gaming machine (slot machine) according to a first embodiment of the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings.

<Overall configuration>
First, the overall configuration of the slot machine 100 will be explained using FIG. 1. FIG. 1 is an external perspective view of the slot machine 100 viewed from the front side (player side).

A slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 corresponds to an example of a gaming machine of the present invention, and includes a main body 101 and a front door 1 that is attached to the front of the main body 101 and can be opened and closed with respect to the main body 101.
02 (door body). Note that the front door 102 (door body) will be described later using FIG. 2.

Three reels (left reel 110, middle reel 111, and right reel 112) each having a plurality of types of symbols arranged on the outer circumferential surface are stored in the center of the main body 101 (not shown), and are rotated inside the slot machine 100. It is configured so that it can be done. These reels 110 to 112 are rotationally driven by a driving device such as a stepping motor.

In this embodiment, a suitable number of each pattern is printed on a band-like member at equal intervals, and this band-like member is attached to a predetermined circular cylindrical frame material to form each reel 110 to 112 (see FIG. 4).
a)). From the player's perspective, the symbols on the reels 110 to 112 are the same as each reel 110 to 1.
Approximately three symbols are displayed vertically from a symbol display window 113 provided in front of the symbol 12, making a total of nine symbols visible.

By rotating each reel 110 to 112, the combination of symbols visible to the player changes. In other words, each reel 110 to 112 functions as a display device that variably displays combinations of a plurality of types of symbols. In addition to the reel, an electronic image display device such as a liquid crystal display device can also be used as such a display device. Furthermore, in this embodiment,
Although three reels are provided inside the center of the slot machine 100, the number of reels and the installation positions of the reels are not limited to this.

A backlight (not shown) is arranged on the back of each reel 110 to 112 to illuminate each symbol displayed in the symbol display window 113. It is desirable that the backlight be shielded for each pattern so that each pattern can be illuminated evenly. In addition,
Inside the slot machine 100, near each reel 110 to 112, an optical sensor (also referred to as an index sensor, not shown) consisting of a light emitting part and a light receiving part is provided, and the light emitting part of this optical sensor A light-shielding piece of a certain length provided on the reel is configured to pass between the light-receiving section and the light-receiving section. The position of the symbol on the reel in the rotational direction is determined based on the detection result of this sensor, and the reels 110 to 112 are stopped so that the desired symbol is displayed on the winning line.

For example, the notification lamp 123 may indicate a specific prize winning combination (specifically,
This is a lamp that informs the player that he or she has internally won a special prize or is playing a bonus game (special game state). The game medal insertion possible lamp 124 is a lamp for informing the player that game medals can be inserted. The replay lamp 122 informs the player that the current game can be replayed (no need to insert medals) when the player wins a replay combination that is one of the winning combinations in the previous game. This is a warning lamp. The reel panel lamp 128 is a lamp for performance.

The bet buttons 130 to 132 are buttons for inserting a predetermined number of medals (referred to as credits) electronically stored in the slot machine 100. In this embodiment, one coin is inserted each time the bet button 130 is pressed, up to a maximum of three coins, two coins are inserted when the bet button 131 is pressed, and three coins are inserted when the bet button 132 is pressed. It has become so. Hereinafter, the bet button 132 will also be referred to as the MAX bet button. Note that the game medal insertion lamp 129 lights up a number of lamps according to the number of inserted medals,
When a prescribed number of medals are inserted, a game start lamp 121 lights up to notify that a game start operation is possible.

The medal slot 141 is an slot for the player to insert medals at the time of starting a game. That is, medals can be inserted electronically using the bet buttons 130 to 132, or actual medals can be inserted (insertion operation) from the medal slot 141, and the term "insertion" includes both. be. On the left side of the medal slot 141, there is a cross key 193a (second operating means, upper button) that is an operating means for selecting menus, adjusting the volume, etc. on the management screen SD, volume value display VD, etc., which will be described later. , a lower button, a right button, and a left button) and an OK button 193b (hereinafter, these may be collectively referred to as the "cross button 193").

The stored medal number display 125 is a display device for displaying the number of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100. The game information display 126 displays various internal information (for example,
This is a display device for numerically displaying the number of medals paid out during the bonus game. The payout number display 127 is a display for displaying the number of medals that will be paid out to the player as a result of winning some winning combination, and is also used as an instruction monitor for performing a press order effect. In this example, the number of stored coins display 125, the game information display 126, and the number of paid coins display 127 are 7.
It consists of a segment (SEG) display.

A start lever 135 (operating means) is a lever-type switch for starting the rotation of the reels 110 to 112. That is, when you insert the desired number of medals into the medal slot 141 or operate the bet buttons 130 to 132 and operate the start lever 135,
The reels 110 to 112 will start rotating. The operation on the start lever 135 is called a game start operation.

The stop button unit 136 includes stop buttons (stop buttons) 137 to 139.
is provided. The stop buttons 137 to 139 are button-shaped switches for individually stopping the reels 110 to 112 that have started rotating by operating the start lever 135, and are associated with each reel 110 to 112. Note that a light emitting body may be provided inside each of the stop buttons 137 to 139, and when the stop buttons 137 to 139 can be operated, the light emitting body can be turned on to notify the player.

Hereinafter, the operations on the stop buttons 137 to 139 are referred to as stop operations, the first stop operation is the first stop operation (hereinafter also referred to as "first stop" or "first stop"), and the next stop operation is the second stop operation. operation (hereinafter also referred to as "second stop" or "second stop"), and the final stop operation is called the third stop operation (hereinafter also referred to as "second stop" or "second stop").
Hereinafter, it will also be referred to as "3rd stop" or "3rd stop." ).

Further, the reels that are stopped in response to these stop operations are referred to as a first stop reel, a second stop reel, and a third stop reel in this order. Further, the order in which the stop buttons 137 to 139 are operated to stop all of the rotating reels 110 to 112 is referred to as an operation order (or press order).

The operation order (pressing order) of the stop buttons 137 to 139 is when the left stop button 137 is represented by "left or R", the middle stop button 138 is represented by "middle or C", and the right stop button 139 is represented by "right or R". , (1) Left → middle → right operation order (left middle right or LCR), (2)
Left → right → center operation order (center left or right or LRC), (3) middle → left → right operation order (center left or CLR), (4) middle → right → left operation order (center right left or CRL) , (5) Right → left → center operation order (right left center or RLC), (6) right → center → left operation order (right center left or RCL)
).

The medal return button 133 is a button that is pressed to remove the inserted medals when the medals are jammed. The settlement button 134 is a button for settling medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100 and bet medals, and discharging them from the medal payout port 155. The door key hole 140 is a hole into which a key for unlocking the front door 102 of the slot machine 100 is inserted.

A title panel 162 is provided at the bottom of the stop button unit 136 for displaying the model name and pasting various certificate stamps. At the bottom of the title panel 162, a medal payout opening 155 and a medal receiving tray 161 are provided. The sound hole 181 is a hole for outputting sound from a speaker provided inside the slot machine 100 to the outside. Side lamps 144 provided on the left and right sides of the front door 102 are decorative lamps to enliven the game.
A presentation device 160 is disposed at the top of the front door 102, and a sound hole 143 is provided at the top of the presentation device 160.

This performance device 160 includes a shutter (shielding device) 163 consisting of two right shutters 163a and a left shutter 163b that can be opened and closed in the horizontal direction, and a liquid crystal display device 157 (display means) disposed on the back side of the shutter 163. (hereinafter also referred to as an "effect image display device"), and when the right shutter 163a and the left shutter 163b are opened horizontally outward in front of the liquid crystal display device 157, the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 157 is displayed in front of the slot machine 100. (on the player's side).

Note that the display means does not have to be a liquid crystal display device, but may be any display device that can display various effect images and various game information, such as a multi-segment display (7-segment display), a dot matrix display, an organic EL display, etc. display, plasma display,
It may be a reel (drum) or a display device consisting of a projector and a screen.
Further, the display screen has a rectangular shape, and the entire display screen is configured to be visible to the player. In the case of this embodiment, the display screen is rectangular, but may be square. Furthermore, a decoration (not shown) may be provided around the periphery of the display screen so that a part of the periphery of the display screen is hidden by the decoration, making the display screen appear oddly shaped. Although the display screen is a flat surface in this embodiment, it may be a curved surface.

<Internal structure>
Next, the internal structure of the slot machine 100 will be explained using FIG. 2. FIG. 2 is a front view of the slot machine 100 with the front door 102 open.

The main body 101 includes a top plate 261, a left side plate 260, a right side plate 260, and a bottom plate 26.
4 and a back plate 242, and is a box with an opening at the front. Inside the main body 101, a main control board storage case 210 that stores a main control board inside is arranged at a position that does not overlap with the ventilation hole 249 provided at the top of the back plate 242. Below,
Three reels 110 to 112 are arranged. On the side of the main control board storage case 210 and the reels 110 to 112, that is, on the left side plate 260, a sub control board storage case 220 that stores a sub control board therein is disposed. Also, the side plate 260 on the right side when facing
An external centralized terminal board 248 is attached to the main control board and outputs information about the slot machine 100 to an external device.

Further, inside the main body 101, there is provided a setting key switch (first operating means; hereinafter also referred to as "setting key SW"; not shown) that can be turned on and off by rotational operation. This setting key SW is an operation means for starting setting changes and confirmation of setting values (in this example, settings 1 to 6), which will be described later. Further, inside the main body 101, a reset switch (hereinafter also referred to as a "reset SW") is provided that can be pressed to perform an operation for changing settings (setting value changing operation). This reset SW is an operating means that also functions as an error release switch that can perform operations to eliminate various errors (error elimination operations), which will be described later.

These setting key SW and reset SW are operating means provided at a position that can be operated only when the front door 102 (door body) is in the open state, and when the front door 102 (door body) is in the closed state. is difficult or impossible to operate. In other words, it is an operating means that can only be operated by the manager (clerk, etc.) of the game parlor, and cannot be operated by the player.

Also, inside the main body 101, there is a setting value display device 101a (Fig. 12) that can display setting values.
) is provided. In this example, the set value display device 101a is configured with a 7-segment display. Details will be described later, but when a setting change operation is performed, the setting value display device 1
At 01a, the set value (any of settings 1 to 6) is displayed, and when the set value is confirmed by operating the start lever 135, the set value becomes hidden. On the other hand, when the setting confirmation operation is performed, a numerical value indicating the current setting value is displayed on the setting value display device 101a.

A medal dispensing device 180 (device for dispensing medals accumulated in a bucket) is provided on the bottom plate 264.
A power supply device 252 having a power supply board is disposed above the medal payout device 180, that is, below the reels 110 to 112, and a power switch 2 is provided in front of the power supply device 252.
44 are installed. The power supply device 252 converts AC power supplied from the outside to the slot machine 100 into DC power, converts it to a predetermined voltage, and supplies the power to the main control unit 300 and sub-control units 400 and 5, which will be described later.
It is supplied to each control unit such as 00 and each device. Furthermore, it is equipped with a power storage circuit (e.g., a capacitor) for supplying power to predetermined components (e.g., RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, etc.) for a predetermined period (e.g., 10 days) even after external power is cut off. There is.

A medal auxiliary storage 240 is provided on the right side of the medal payout device 180, and an overflow terminal is provided behind this storage (not shown). The power supply device 252 is provided with a power cord connection portion to which a power cord 264 is connected, and the power cord 264 connected here extends to the outside through a power cord hole 262 formed in the back plate 242 of the main body 101. There is.

The front door 102 is hinged to the left side plate 260 of the main body 101 via a hinge device 276, and is a door body that can be opened and closed with respect to the main body 101.

In this example, the front door 102, which is locked in the closed state, can be opened by inserting a key owned by the manager of the game parlor into the door key hole 140 (see FIG. 1). Therefore, the administrator can unlock the front door 102 (change it from the closed state to the open state), but anyone other than the administrator (for example, a player) cannot unlock the front door 102. .

The right side plate 260 of the main body 101 is provided with an optical sensor (detection means; hereinafter also referred to as "opening/closing sensor"; not shown) consisting of a light emitter and a light receiver. A light shielding piece of a certain length provided on the front door 102 is configured to pass between the front door 102 and the light receiving section.

The main control unit 300 monitors the states of various sensors 318 including this opening/closing sensor in main control timer interrupt processing to be described later. The front door 102 is in a closed state, and the front door 102 is closed.
When the light shielding piece moves to a position where it blocks light from the light emitting part of the opening/closing sensor of the main body 101, the opening/closing sensor sends a signal (for example, a low level signal) indicating that it is in the closing detection state to the main controller 301. output towards.

On the other hand, when the front door 102 is in the open state and the light shielding piece of the front door 102 moves to a position where it does not block the light from the light emitting part of the opening/closing sensor of the main body 101, the opening/closing sensor indicates that it is in the open detection state. A signal (for example, a high level signal) is output to the main control section 300.

That is, the opening/closing sensor is a detection means capable of detecting the opening/closing state of the front door (door body) 102, and when the front door 102 is in the closed state, the detection state becomes the closed detection state and the front door 102 is in the open state. In this case, the detection state becomes the open detection state.

Note that the "detection means" according to the present invention is not limited to an optical sensor, and may be, for example, a magnetic sensor, a proximity switch, a micro switch, a Hall element, or the like. Furthermore, the detection state is not limited to one in which the open detection state and the closed detection state always switch as the door body opens and closes, and the detection state can change to the closed detection state even if the door body is in the open state. Alternatively, even if the door body is in the closed state, the detection state may be in the open detection state.

Here, the opening/closing sensor according to this example is configured to operate the front door (door body) 10 by performing a predetermined operation.
Even if 2 is in the open state, the detection state is configured to be the closed detection state. Specifically, when the front door 102 is in the open state, a light shielding piece of a certain length is inserted between the light emitting part and the light receiving part of the opening/closing sensor of the main body 101 and fixed with tape etc. By blocking the light from the light emitting part of the opening/closing sensor 101, even if the front door 102 is in the open state, the detection state of the opening/closing sensor can be forced into the closed detection state.

Note that the "predetermined operation" according to the present invention is not limited to this example; for example, a DIP switch that turns the open/close sensor into a closed detection state may be provided and the DIP switch may be operated as the predetermined operation. . Further, when the detection means is constituted by a magnetic sensor, the detection state of the opening/closing sensor may be changed to the closed detection state by bringing a magnet close to the opening/closing sensor.

At the top of the symbol display window 113, a production device 160, a production control board (not shown) for controlling the production device 160, and a speaker 272 are provided. At the bottom of the symbol display window 113, there is a medal selector 170 for sorting the inserted medals.
A passage 266 and the like are provided through which medals with incorrect 0s pass when dropping them into the medal receiving tray 161. Furthermore, a speaker 277 is provided at a position corresponding to the sound hole 181.

<Control unit>
Next, the circuit configuration of the control section of the slot machine 100 will be described in detail using FIG. 3. Note that this figure shows a circuit block diagram of the control section.

The control unit of the slot machine 100 can be roughly divided into a main control unit 300 that controls the progress of the game.
and a first sub-control unit 400 that controls the main effects in response to a command signal (hereinafter simply referred to as a “command”) sent by the main control unit 300; The second sub-control unit 500 controls various devices based on commands.

<Main control section>
First, the main control section 300 of the slot machine 100 will be explained. The main control unit 300 is
It is equipped with a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300, and this basic circuit 302 stores a CPU 304, control program data, lottery data used for internal lottery of winning combinations, reel stop positions, etc. ROM 306 and R for temporarily storing data.
It is equipped with an AM 308, an I/O 310 for controlling input/output of various devices, a counter timer 312 for measuring time, number of times, etc., and a WDT (watchdog timer) 314. Note that other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and RAM 308.
This point also applies to the first sub-control section 400 and the second sub-control section 500, which will be described later.

The CPU 304 of this basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 315b as a system clock. Furthermore, when the power is turned on, the CPU 304 transmits the frequency division data stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 306 to the counter timer 312, and the counter timer 312 sets the interrupt time based on the received frequency division data. An interrupt request is sent to the CPU 304 at each interrupt time. CPU304
uses this interrupt request as a trigger to monitor each sensor and send drive pulses. for example,
When the clock signal output by the crystal oscillator 315b is set to 8 MHz, the frequency division value of the counter timer 312 is set to 1/256, and the frequency division data of the ROM 306 is set to 47, the reference time of the interrupt is 256 x 47 ÷ 8 MHz = 1 .504ms.

Each time the main control unit 300 receives a clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 315a,
A random value generation circuit 316 (this circuit is assumed to have two random value generation circuits built-in) that derives a numerical value in the range of 5535 and outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. A start signal output circuit 338 is provided, and the CPU 304 uses this start signal output circuit 3.
When a start signal is input from 38, game control is started (main processing of the main control section to be described later is started).

Random value generation circuit 316 generates random values used in basic circuit 302. The generation of random numbers in the random number generation circuit 316 can be roughly divided into two modes: counter mode and random number mode.
There are different methods. In the counter mode, a numerical value that is counted up (down) at a predetermined time interval is obtained and the numerical value is derived as a random value. There are two additional methods for random number mode. The first method in the random number mode is to use a random value seed to perform an operation according to a predetermined function (for example, a modulus function), and derive the result of this operation as a random number value. The second method is to read a numerical value from a random number table in which numerical values in the range of 0 to 65535 are randomly arranged, and derive the read numerical value as a random numerical value. The random value generation circuit 316 uses white noise superimposed on signals input from various sensors 318 to the sensor circuit 320 to obtain irregular values. The random number generation circuit 316 uses the obtained value as the initial value of a counter that counts up (down) in counter mode, as a seed for a random number, or when determining the reading start position of the random number table. use

The main control unit 300 is also equipped with a sensor circuit 320, and the CPU 304 controls various sensors 318 (bet button 130 sensor, bet button 131 sensor, bet button 132 sensor, medal input slot 141) at each interrupt time. medal acceptance sensor, start lever 135 sensor, stop button 137 sensor, stop button 13
8 sensors, stop button 139 sensors, payment button 134 sensors, medal payout device 18
Medal payout sensor for medals paid out from 0, optical sensor for reel 110, reel 1
11 optical sensor, reel 112 optical sensor, opening/closing sensor, etc.).

Note that when the sensor circuit 320 detects the H level of the start lever sensor, it outputs a signal indicating this detection to the random value generation circuit 316. The random number generation circuit 316 that receives this signal latches the value at that timing and stores it in a register that stores the random number used for the lottery.

Two medal reception sensors are installed in the internal passage of the medal slot 141, and detect whether or not a medal has passed. Two start lever 135 sensors are installed inside the start lever 135 and detect a start operation by a player. stop button 137 sensor,
A stop button 138 sensor and a stop button 139 are installed on each of the stop buttons 137 to 139, and detect the operation of the stop button by the player.

Bet button 130 sensor, bet button 131 sensor, and bet button 132
The sensor is installed in each of the medal insertion buttons 130 to 132, and the RAM 30
8 detects an insertion operation when electronically stored medals are inserted into a game as medals. The payment button 134 sensor is provided on the payment button 134. When the settlement button 134 is pressed once, the electronically stored medals are settled. The medal payout sensor is a sensor for detecting medals paid out by the medal payout device 180. Note that each of the above sensors may be a non-contact type sensor or a contact type sensor.

The optical sensor of reel 110, the optical sensor of reel 111, and the optical sensor of reel 112 are installed at predetermined positions on the mounting base of each reel 110 to 112, and a light shielding piece provided on the reel frame passes through them. Every time you do it, it becomes L level. When the CPU 304 detects this signal, it determines that the reel has rotated once, and resets the rotational position information of the reel to zero.

As described above, the opening/closing sensor is a sensor capable of detecting the opening/closing state of the front door (door body) 102. When the front door 102 is in the closed state, the opening/closing sensor outputs a signal (for example, a low level signal) to the CPU 304 indicating that the front door 102 is in the closed state. On the other hand, when the front door 102 is in the open state, the opening/closing sensor outputs a signal (for example, a high level signal) to the CPU 304 indicating that the front door 102 is in the open state.

The main control unit 300 includes a drive circuit 322 that drives the stepping motors provided in the reel devices 110 to 112, a drive circuit 324 that drives the solenoids provided in the medal selector 170 that selects the inserted medals, and a drive circuit 324 that drives the solenoids provided in the medal payout device 180. A drive circuit 326 that drives the motor, various lamps 336 (winning line display lamp 120, notification lamp 123, game medal insertion possible lamp 124, replay lamp 122, game medal insertion lamp 129, game start lamp 121, storage number display device 125, game information display 126, payout number display 127
).

Further, an information output circuit 334 (external centralized terminal board 248) is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control section 300 is connected to an external hall computer (not shown) etc. via this information output circuit 334. Gaming information (for example, gaming status) of the slot machine 100 is output to the information input circuit 652 provided.

The main control unit 300 also includes a voltage monitoring circuit 330 that monitors the voltage value of the power supply supplied to the main control unit 300 from a power management unit (not shown). If the value is less than a predetermined value (9V in this embodiment), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has decreased is output to the basic circuit 302.

Further, the main control section 300 is provided with an output interface for transmitting commands to the first sub-control section 400, and enables communication with the first sub-control section 400. Note that information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 300
Although the configuration is such that signals such as commands can be transmitted to the sub-control unit 400, the first sub-control unit 4
The configuration is such that signals such as commands cannot be transmitted to the main control unit 300 from 00 onwards.

<Sub-control unit>
Next, the first sub-control unit 400 of the slot machine 100 will be explained. First sub-control unit 4
00 receives the control command sent by the main control unit 300 via the input interface,
It is equipped with a basic circuit 402 that controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 based on this control command, and this basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404 and an RA for temporarily storing data.
It is equipped with an M408, an I/O 410 for controlling input/output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time, number of times, etc. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 is
It operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period outputted from a crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. The ROM 406 stores control programs and data for controlling the entire first sub-control unit 400, data for controlling backlight lighting patterns, various displays, and the like.

The CPU 404 transmits frequency division data stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 406 to the counter timer 412 via the data bus at a predetermined timing. The counter timer 412 determines the interrupt time based on the received frequency division data, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 404 at each interrupt time. The CPU 404 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

Further, the first sub-control unit 400 is provided with a sound source IC 418, and speakers 272 and 277 are provided with the sound source IC 418 via an output interface. The sound source IC418 is CP
Controls the audio output from the amplifier and speakers 272 and 277 in accordance with commands from U404. An S-ROM (sound ROM) in which audio data is stored is connected to the sound source IC 418, and the audio data acquired from this ROM is amplified by an amplifier and sent to the speaker 27.
Output from 2,277.

Further, the first sub-control unit 400 is provided with a drive circuit 422, and various lamps 420 (upper lamp, lower lamp, side lamp 14) are connected to the drive circuit 422 via an input/output interface.
4, title panel 162 lamp, etc.) are connected.

The first sub-control unit 400 is also provided with a drive circuit 424 that drives the motor of the shutter 163, and the drive circuit 424 is provided with the shutter 163 via an output interface. This drive circuit 424 outputs a drive signal to a stepping motor (not shown) provided in the shutter 163 in response to a command from the CPU 404.

Further, the first sub-control unit 400 is provided with a sensor circuit 426, and the sensor circuit 426 includes a shutter sensor 4 that can detect the position of the shutter 163 via an input interface.
28 and a performance button sensor 430 that can detect the pressing operation of the performance button 156 are connected. The CPU 404 monitors the states of the shutter sensor 428 and the effect button sensor 430 at each interrupt time.

Further, the CPU 404 transmits and receives signals to and from the second sub-control unit 500 via the output interface. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a presentation device 160 that includes display control of the liquid crystal display device 157.
performs various controls. Note that the second sub-control unit 500 is, for example, a control unit that controls the display of the liquid crystal display device 157, a control unit that controls various production drive devices (for example, a control unit that controls motor drive of the shutter 163). It may be configured with a plurality of control units, such as.

The second sub-control unit 500 includes a basic circuit 502 that receives the control command transmitted by the first sub-control unit 400 via an input interface and controls the entire second sub-control unit 500 based on this control command. This basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, and an I/O 510 for controlling input/output of various devices.
and a counter timer 512 for measuring time, number of times, etc. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock. The ROM 506 stores a control program and data for controlling the entire second sub-control unit 500, data for image display, and the like.

The CPU 504 transmits frequency division data stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 506 to the counter timer 512 via the data bus at a predetermined timing. The counter timer 512 determines the interrupt time based on the received frequency division data, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 504 at each interrupt time. The CPU 504 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

Further, the second sub-control unit 500 is provided with a VDP 516 (video display processor), and a ROM 506 and a VRAM 518 are connected to the VDP 516 via a bus. The VDP 516 reads image data etc. stored in the ROM 506 based on a signal from the CPU 504, generates a display image using the work area of the VRAM 518, and displays the image on the effect image display device 157.

<Design arrangement>
The symbol arrangement on each of the reels 110 to 112 described above will be explained using FIG. 4(a). In addition, the figure shows each reel (left reel 110, middle reel 111, right reel 112).
FIG. 2 is a plan view showing the arrangement of patterns applied to the image.

Each reel 110 to 112 has a plurality of types (eight types in this embodiment) shown on the right side of the figure.
A predetermined number of symbols (in this embodiment, 21 symbols with numbers 0 to 20) are arranged.
Further, the numbers 0 to 20 shown at the left end of the figure are numbers indicating the arrangement positions of the symbols on each reel 110 to 112. For example, in this embodiment, the number 1 piece on the left reel 110 has a “Replay” symbol, the number 0 piece on the middle reel 111 has a “Bell” symbol, and the number 2 piece on the right reel 112 has a “Bell” symbol. "Watermelon" designs are placed on each page.

<Type of winning role>
Next, the types of winning combinations of the slot machine 100 will be explained using FIG. 4(b).
The figure shows the types of winning combinations (including activation combinations), the symbol combinations corresponding to each winning combination, and the activation or payout of each winning combination.

Among the winning combinations in this embodiment, the big bonus (BB1, BB2) and regular bonus (RB) are used as winning combinations that transition to a bonus game, and the replay is a replay without inserting new medals. In this embodiment, the winning roles include the big bonus, regular bonus, and replay, which are the active roles. included. In addition, "winning" in this embodiment includes the case where a symbol combination of an active role that does not involve a payout of medals (does not involve a payout of medals) is displayed on the active line, such as a big bonus, a regular Includes bonuses and replay wins.

The winning combinations of the slot machine 100 include a big bonus (BB1, BB2), a regular bonus (RB), a small combination (cherry, watermelon, bell), and a replay combination (replay). It goes without saying that the types of winning combinations are not limited to these, and can be arbitrarily adopted.

"Big Bonus (BB1, BB2)" (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "BB")
is a special winning combination (operating winning combination) that starts a big bonus game (BB game) which is a special game upon winning. The corresponding symbol combinations are "White 7-White 7-White 7" for BB1 and "Blue 7" for BB2.
-Blue 7-Blue 7''. Furthermore, flag carryover is performed for BB1 and BB2. That is, when BB1 and BB2 are internally elected, a flag indicating this is set (the RAM of the main control unit 300
308), but even if you do not win BB1 or BB2 in that game, the flag indicating internal winning will remain raised until you win, and even after the next game, you will not be able to win BB1 or BB2. The symbol combination "White 7-White 7-White 7" corresponding to BB1 and the symbol combination "Blue 7-Blue 7-Blue 7" corresponding to BB2 are in a state of being won internally.

"Regular Bonus (RB)" is a regular bonus game (RB game) depending on winnings.
is the special role (activation role) that starts. The corresponding symbol combination is “Bonus-Bonus-
It's a bonus. Note that flag carryover is also carried out for RB in the same way as for BB described above. However, (details will be described later), in the big bonus game (BB game), the starting condition is not that the regular bonus game (RB game) is internally won or that the symbol combination is displayed on the winning line. In addition, the regular bonus game is set to start automatically after the start of the big bonus game, and when one regular bonus game is finished, the next regular bonus game is started immediately. You can also use it as

"Small winning combination (Cherry, Watermelon, Bell)" (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "Cherry", "Watermelon", "Bell") is a winning combination in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out upon winning. The symbol combinations are "cherry-ANY-ANY" for cherry, "watermelon-watermelon-watermelon" for watermelon, and "bell-bell-bell" for bell. Further, the corresponding payout number is as shown in the figure. In addition, in the case of "Cherry-ANY-ANY", the symbol on the left reel 110 is "
The symbols on the middle reel 111 and the right reel 112 may be any symbol.

A "replay" is a winning combination (activation combination) that allows you to play the next game without inserting medals (game media) by winning a prize, and no medals are paid out. Note that the corresponding symbol combination is "Replay-Replay-Replay".

<Types of RT-type gaming states>
Next, the types and transitions of RT-based gaming states in the slot machine 100 will be explained.

<Low replay probability state (RT1)>
The low replay probability state (RT1) is a default RT-based gaming state (hereinafter also referred to as "normal gaming state") that is initially set immediately after the power of the slot machine 100 is turned on.
This is a gaming state that is relatively disadvantageous for the player compared to other gaming states.

In this example, in this replay low probability state (RT1), replay combination 2 (promotion replay 1)
Or, if you win the re-gaming combination 3 (promotion replay 2), the re-gaming high probability state (R
Move on to T2). In addition, in this re-gaming low probability state (RT1), if a special winning combination is won internally, the state shifts to a special winning winning state (RT3) which will be described later.

<High replay probability state (RT2)>
The re-gaming high probability state is a gaming state in which the internal winning probability of re-gaming is higher than the re-gaming low probability state (RT1).

In this example, in this replay high probability state (RT2), if the special winning combination is won internally,
The state shifts to a special role internal winning state (RT3) which will be described later.

<Special role internal election status (RT3)>
The special prize internal winning state (RT3) is a state in which the internal winning flag corresponding to the special prize is set on, and when the player performs a stop operation at a predetermined timing, the special prize corresponding to this flag is won. This is a gaming state in which a corresponding symbol combination can be displayed.

In this example, when a special prize is won in this special prize internal winning state (RT3), the state shifts to a special game state (RT4) to be described later.

<Special gaming state (RT4)>
The special gaming state (RT4) is the most advantageous gaming state for the player among all the gaming states.
In this example, in the special gaming state (RT4), when a specified number of coins (for example, 200 coins) are paid out, the state shifts to the low re-gaming probability state (RT1).

In this example, the conditions for ending the special gaming state (RT4) are not particularly limited, and may include, for example, when a predetermined role is won internally, when a predetermined number of prizes (e.g., 8) are won, or when a predetermined prize is won. This may be the case where the game has been played a number of times (for example, six times).

<Main control unit main processing>
First, the main control unit main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described using FIG. Note that this figure is a flowchart showing the flow of main processing by the main control section.

As described above, when the power is turned on, the main control unit 300 receives a start signal (reset signal).
A start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 338 is provided to output the . The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 to which this activation signal has been input is reset-started by a reset interrupt and executes main control section main processing according to a control program stored in advance in the ROM 306.

When the power is turned on, first, various initial setting processes are performed in step S101. Although details will be described later, in this initial setting process, processes related to initial settings, setting changes, return processing, etc. are performed.

In step S102, a medal insertion/start operation reception process is executed. Here, it is checked whether or not medals have been inserted, and preparations are made to send an insert command indicating that medals have been inserted to the first sub-control unit 400. In addition, if you win a re-playing role in the previous game,
The process of inserting the same number of medals as the number of medals inserted in the previous game is performed, and a replay state is entered by replay, so the player does not need to insert medals. Further, it is checked whether the start lever 135 has been operated or not, and if the start lever 135 has been operated, the process advances to step S103.

In step S103, a winning line determination process is performed to determine the number of inserted medals and to determine a valid winning line.

In step S104, a random number acquisition process is performed to acquire the random number generated by the random number generation circuit 316, and in the next step S105, a winning combination internal lottery process is performed. In this winning combination internal lottery process, the winning combination lottery table stored in the ROM 306 is read out according to the current gaming state, and an internal lottery is performed using this and the acquired random numbers, and the results of this internal lottery are Preparations are made for transmitting the internal lottery command shown to the first sub-control unit 400. As a result of the internal lottery, if any winning combination (including the activation combination) is internally won, the flag for that winning combination is turned on.

In step S106, a reel stop data selection process is performed to select reel stop data based on the internal lottery result of the winning combination internal lottery process. Note that this reel stop data is stored in the ROM 306 of the main control section 300. Further, in step S106, a reel stop data command containing information regarding the selected reel stop data is sent to the first sub-control unit 400.
Prepare to send to. In step S107, reel rotation start processing is executed, and rotation of all reels 110 to 112 is started.

In step S108, reel stop control processing is performed. In the reel stop control process, stop buttons 137 to 139 can be accepted, and when any stop button is pressed, a stop table of reel stop data is created in order to stop the reel corresponding to the pressed stop button. Refer to the reel 110~ according to the number of drawn frames set in the stop table.
112 is stopped. When all the reels 110 to 112 have stopped, the process advances to step S109.

In addition, in this step S108, for each stop operation, a stop button reception command related to the stop buttons 137 to 139 that have been operated to stop (more specifically, for the first stop operation,
Stop button reception 1 command, 2nd stop operation, stop button reception 2 command, 3rd command
For a stop operation, preparations are made to send a stop button reception 3 command) to the first sub-control unit 400, and for stopping each reel, a reel stop command regarding the reel stop position (for details, the first For the stop reel, use the reel stop 1 command, and for the second stop operation,
For the reel stop 2 command and the third stop operation, preparations are made to send a reel stop 3 command to the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S109, a winning determination process is performed to determine a winning prize. In this prize determination process,
When a symbol combination corresponding to some winning combination is displayed on the activated winning line 114, it is determined that the winning combination has been won. For example, if "Bell-Bell-Bell" are aligned on the activated winning line, it is determined that a small winning combination (Bell) has been won. Further, in this step S109, preparations are made for transmitting a winning determination command indicating the winning determination result to the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S110, medal payout processing is performed. In the medal payout process, if a winning combination has been won, the number of medals corresponding to the winning combination will be paid out according to the number of winning lines.

In step S111, a game state control process is performed. In this game state control process, processing related to the transition of each RT system game state is performed, and when the start condition or end condition is satisfied,
Shift the gaming state. Also, preparations are made for transmitting a gaming status command including information indicating the current RT-based gaming status.

With the above, one game ends. Thereafter, the game progresses by returning to step S102 and repeating the above-described process. The various commands prepared in each of the above steps are transmitted in the command setting transmission process (step S206) of the main control unit timer interrupt process, which will be described later.

<Initial setting process>
Next, using FIG. 6, the initial setting process (step S101) in the main control unit main process described using FIG. 5 will be described. Note that this figure is a flowchart showing the flow of initial setting processing.

In step S201, initial settings at startup are performed. In this initial setting at startup, the CPU is 30
Setting the stack initial value to the stack pointer (SP) in step 4 (temporary setting), setting interrupt prohibition,
It performs initial settings for the I/O 310, initial settings for various variables stored in the RAM 308, permission to operate the WDT 314, and settings for initial values.

In step S202, it is determined whether or not there is an abnormality in the RAM 308. If there is an abnormality, the process proceeds to step S207 to execute initialization processing, and if there is no abnormality, step S20
Proceed to step 3.

In step S203, it is determined whether the front door 102 is in an open state (door open),
If the door is being opened, proceed to step S204; if the door is not being opened, proceed to step S205.
Proceed to and execute the recovery process. Further, in step S204, whether the setting key SW is ON or OFF is determined.
If it is ON, the process advances to step S206 to execute a setting change process and turn it OFF.
In this case, the process advances to step S205 and a return process is executed.

In the return process of step S205, the process of returning the slot machine 100 to the state before the power outage (for example, in the power outage process of step S411 of the main control unit timer interrupt process, the RA
After restoring the restoration data saved in M308, etc.), the initial setting process ends.

In step S206, after performing a setting change process, the process advances to step S207. Although details will be described later, in this setting change process, processing related to setting changes, etc. are performed.

In step S207, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization process, after initializing the data in the RAM 308 (RAM clear), etc., the initialization process ends.

<Settings change process>
Next, the setting change process (step S206) in the initial setting process described using FIG. 6 will be described using FIG. 7. Note that this figure is a flowchart showing the flow of setting change processing.

In step S301, processing to initialize data in the RAM 308 (RAM clear) is performed, and in the next step S302, preparations are made for transmitting a setting change start command indicating to start changing settings to the first sub-control unit 400. I do. When the first sub-control unit 400 receives this setting change start command from the main control unit 300, it executes processing to start displaying the management screen.

In step S303, the interrupt status is set to changing settings. As a result, in various game processing in step S404 of the main control unit timer interrupt processing to be described later, processing corresponding to the setting change is executed.

In step S304, the current setting value is displayed using the setting value display device 101a. For example, if the current setting value is setting 6, the number 6 indicating setting 6 is displayed. Step S30
In step S307, it is determined whether or not the reset SW has been operated, and if there has been an operation, the current setting value is changed, and if there has been no operation, the process continues until the operation of the start lever 135 is accepted in step S307. The process of step S305 is repeatedly executed.

More specifically, in the processing of steps S305 to S307, each time an operation of the reset SW is detected, the currently set values 1 to 6 are incremented by 1, and the set values are updated by 1.
The set value is changed by repeatedly returning it to 1 when it exceeds the value. If it is determined in step S307 that the start lever 135 has been operated, the operation to change the set value using the reset SW is ended, and the process proceeds to step S308.

In step S308, the setting value displayed on the setting value display device 101a is stored in the RAM 308 as a new setting value (setting value is confirmed), and in the next step S309, the display on the setting value display device 101a is erased. and hide the setting value.

In this example, the set value is determined when the operation of the start lever 135 is accepted.
The setting value may be determined only when the switch 2 is in the open state. In this case, if the front door 102 is in the closed state, the set value cannot be determined, but the management screen may continue to be displayed.

In step S310, it is determined whether the setting key SW is OFF or ON, and if it is ON, the process of step S310 is repeatedly executed, and if it is OFF, the process proceeds to step S311 to end the setting change. In step S311, preparations are made for transmitting a setting change end command to the first sub-control unit 400 indicating that the setting change is to be ended. When the first sub-control unit 400 receives this setting change termination command from the main control unit 300, it executes a process of terminating the display of the management screen.

<Main control unit timer interrupt processing>
Next, the main control section timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control section 300 will be described using FIG. Note that this figure is a flowchart showing the flow of main control section timer interrupt processing.

The main control unit 300 includes a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined period (approximately once every 2 ms in this embodiment). Start processing at a predetermined cycle.

In step S401, timer interrupt start processing is performed. In this timer interrupt start processing, C
Processing such as temporarily saving the values of each register of the PU 304 to the stack area is performed. In step S402, the count value of the WDT 314 is set to the initial setting value (32.8 ms in this embodiment).
) to prevent WDT interrupts from occurring (to prevent processing abnormalities from being detected).
14 is restarted periodically (in this embodiment, once every approximately 2 ms, which is the cycle of the main control section timer interrupt).

In step S403, input port status update processing is performed. In this input port status update process, the detection signals of the sensor circuits 320 of the various sensors 318 are input through the input ports of the I/O 310, the presence or absence of the detection signals is monitored, and the RAM 308 is partitioned for each type of sensor 318. The signal state is stored in the provided signal state storage area. In step S404, various game processes are executed, and processes according to the interrupt status are executed. In step S405, timer update processing is performed. More specifically, various timers are updated in respective time units.

In step S406, command setting transmission processing is performed, and various commands that have been prepared for transmission are transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. In the first sub-control unit 400, depending on the command type included in the received output schedule information, it becomes possible to determine performance control according to changes in game control in the main control unit 300, and also to determine the performance control according to the change in game control in the main control unit 300. Based on the information of the command data, it becomes possible to determine the content of production control.

In step S407, external output signal setting processing is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is outputted to the information input circuit 652 separate from the slot machine 100 via the information output circuit 334.

In step S408, device monitoring processing is performed. Although details will be described later, this device monitoring process includes a setting value confirmation process, a door opening monitoring process, a payment process, and the like.

In step S409, it is monitored whether the low voltage signal is on. If the low voltage signal is on (when power cutoff is detected), the process advances to step S411, and if the low voltage signal is off (when power cutoff is not detected), the process advances to step S410.

In step S410, various processes are performed to terminate the timer interrupt termination process. In this timer interrupt termination process, a process is performed in which the values of each register temporarily saved in step S401 are set in each original register, and the process returns to the main control unit main process. On the other hand, in step S411, specific variables and stack pointers for returning to the state at power outage upon power restoration are saved in a predetermined area of the RAM 308 as restoration data, and power outage processing such as initialization of input/output ports is performed. and returns to main control unit main processing.

<Device monitoring process>
Next, the device monitoring process (step S408) in the main control unit timer interrupt process described using FIG. 8 will be described using FIG. 9. Note that this figure is a flowchart showing the flow of device monitoring processing.

In step S501, the process proceeds to step S502 after performing a setting value confirmation process. Although details will be described later, in this setting value confirmation process, processing related to setting confirmation is performed. Step S502
Now, door open monitoring processing is performed.

In the door opening monitoring process, the main control unit 300 monitors the state of the opening/closing sensor, and when detecting a signal indicating the closure detection state, stores closure detection information indicating that the closure of the front door 102 has been detected in the RAM 308. At the same time, preparations are made for transmitting a door closing detection command indicating that closing of the front door 102 has been detected to the first sub-control unit 400. First sub-control unit 40
0 is closure detection information indicating that closure of the front door 102 is detected when this door closure detection command is received from the main control unit 300 (in this example, information indicating "closed" and date and time of closure)
are stored in the RAM 408 in chronological order as historical information.

On the other hand, in the door opening monitoring process, the main control unit 300 monitors the state of the opening/closing sensor, and when it detects a signal indicating that it is in the opening detection state, it sends opening detection information indicating that the opening of the front door 102 has been detected. In addition to storing it in the RAM 308, preparations are made for transmitting a door open detection command indicating that opening of the front door 102 has been detected to the first sub-control unit 400. When the first sub-control unit 400 receives this door open detection command from the main control unit 300, the first sub-control unit 400 detects the front door 10
Opening detection information indicating that the opening of No. 2 has been detected (in this example, information indicating "opening" and the date and time of opening) is stored in the RAM 408 in chronological order as history information, and a door opening notification is performed.

The door open notification will be described later, but in this example, when the front door 102 is in the open state, the light emitters (various lamps 420, etc.) emit light in an open light mode, and the sound output means (speaker 2
72, 277) outputs an opening sound (for example, a voice saying "The door is opening"). In addition,
The form of the door open notification is not particularly limited, and for example, a character string "The door is open" may be displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157.

In step S503, after performing payment processing, the process advances to step S504. In this payment processing, the main control unit 300 controls the payment button 134 during the validity period of the payment button 134 (for example, the period from when the game becomes possible to start until the operation of the start lever 135 is accepted).
34 sensor, and when a signal indicating that the settlement button 134 has been operated is detected, a process is performed to settle the electronically stored medals, and an indication that the process to settle the medals has been executed. Preparations are made to send the settlement command to the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S504, after performing other device monitoring processing, the device monitoring processing ends. Although details will be described later, other device monitoring processes include error notification start processing, error notification end processing, and the like.

<Setting value confirmation process>
Next, using FIG. 10, the setting value confirmation process (step S501) in the device monitoring process described using FIG. 9 will be described. Note that this figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the setting value confirmation process.

In step S601, it is determined whether or not the setting value is being confirmed. If the setting value is being confirmed, the process advances to step S606, and if the setting value is not being confirmed, the process advances to step S602. In step S602, it is determined whether or not it is the set value confirmation valid period. If it is the set value confirmation valid period, the process proceeds to step S603, and if it is not the set value confirmation valid period, the setting value confirmation process is ended.

Here, the set value confirmation valid period is not the MAX bet state (the state where the number of medals that can start one game (3 in this example) is bet, or the replay state due to replay), but the open/close state. This is a period in which the sensor is not in a closure detection state, any of the reels 110 to 112 are not rotating, and no error notification is being issued.

Note that the conditions regarding the set value confirmation valid period are not all of the above conditions, and may be any one of the above conditions or any plurality of the above conditions.

In step S603, it is determined whether the setting key SW is ON or OFF, and if it is OFF,
The setting value confirmation process ends, and if the setting value is ON, the process advances to step S604. Step S604
Now, the current setting value is displayed using the setting value display device 101a. For example, if the current setting value is setting 6, the number 6 indicating setting 6 is displayed. In the next step S605, preparations are made for transmitting a setting confirmation start command indicating to start setting confirmation to the first sub-control unit 400. When the first sub-control unit 400 receives this setting confirmation start command from the main control unit 300, it executes processing to start displaying the management screen.

In step S606 during setting confirmation, it is determined whether the setting key SW is OFF or ON, and if it is ON, the setting value confirmation process is ended to continue setting confirmation, and if it is OFF, the process returns to step S607. move on. In step S607, the display on the setting value display device 101a is erased to hide the setting values, and in the next step S608, a setting confirmation end command indicating that setting confirmation is to be ended is sent to the first sub-control unit 400. Make preparations for When the first sub-control unit 400 receives this setting confirmation end command from the main control unit 300, it executes processing to end the display of the management screen.

<Other device monitoring processing>
Next, other device monitoring processing (step S504) in the device monitoring processing described using FIG. 9 will be described using FIG. 11. Note that this figure is a flowchart showing the flow of other device monitoring processing.

In step S701, it is determined whether the device is in each error detection state, and if it is not in each error detection state, the other device monitoring processing is ended, and if it is in each error detection state, the process advances to step S702.

Here, errors that may occur in the slot machine 100 according to the present embodiment include:
Door open error (door open error), hopper empty error, medal insertion error 1 (
Medal selector error), medal insertion error 2 to 4, medal payout error 1 to 3, overflow error, RAM failure, prize winning error, etc.

The door open error (door open error) is an error that notifies the opening of the door of the game machine, and occurs when the front door 102 is opened (an error detection state occurs), and is resolved when the front door 102 is closed. (No error detected).

As described above, in the door opening monitoring process, the main control unit 300 monitors the state of the opening/closing sensor, and upon detecting a signal indicating the closing detection state, sends a door closing detection command to the first sub-control unit 400. However, the first sub-control unit 400 stores the closure detection information (in this example, information indicating "closed" and the date and time of closure) in the RAM 408 in chronological order as historical information, while also storing the closure detection information (in this example, information indicating "closed" and the date and time of closure) in the open detection state. When a signal indicating "open" is detected, a door open detection command is sent to the first sub-control unit 400, and the first sub-control unit 400 sends the door open detection information (in this example, information indicating "open" and the date and time of opening). are stored in the RAM 408 in chronological order as historical information, and a door opening notification is performed.

The hopper empty error is a payout error related to the payout of medals, and occurs when the number of medals stored in the hopper housed inside the main body 101 becomes less than the specified number (an error detection state occurs). The problem can be resolved by replenishing the hopper with the above medals (the error will not be detected).

Medal insertion error 1 (medal selector error) occurs when the inserted medals remain in the medal selector, etc. (an error detection state occurs), and after removing the cause of the error, the error release switch (in this example, reset SW ) is resolved (no error detected). Medal insertion abnormality 2 occurs when the number of inserted medals is equal to or greater than the specified number (an error detection state occurs), and is resolved by changing the set value or clearing the RAM (an error non-detection state occurs).

Medal insertion error 3 occurs when either insertion sensor 1 or insertion sensor 2 is turned on (an error detection state occurs) other than during the medal insertion process, and medal insertion error 4 occurs when the inserted medal is not inserted. Occurs when it does not pass through sensor 1 and input sensor 2 normally (
After the cause of the error is removed, the error is canceled (the error is not detected) when the error release switch (reset SW in this example) is operated.

Medal payout abnormality 1 occurs when no medals are paid out for a certain period of time when the medal payout device is activated (an error detection state occurs), and medal payout abnormality 2 occurs when medals are accumulated when the medal payout device is activated. (It becomes an error detection state), and the medal payout abnormality 3 occurs when either the payout sensor 1 or the payout sensor 2 is turned on other than during the medal payout process (
After the cause of the error is removed, if the operation of the error release switch (in this example, the reset SW) is accepted, the error will be resolved (the error will become non-detected).
.

An overflow error occurs when the overflow terminal of the medal auxiliary storage is turned on (an error detection state), and after removing the cause of the error, turn the error release switch (
In this example, the error is resolved (the error is not detected) when the reset SW) operation is accepted. A RAM defect occurs when an abnormality is detected by checking the RAM (it becomes an error detection state), and it is resolved when the operation of the error release switch (in this example, the reset SW) is accepted (it becomes an error non-detection state). Become). A winning abnormality occurs when, after the reels 110 to 112 have stopped, a winning symbol different from the winning symbol determined by the internal lottery is won (an error detection state occurs), and the error release switch (in this example, the reset SW) is operated. If it is accepted, it will be resolved (no error detected).

Note that the game machine according to the present invention is not limited to slot machines, but can also be applied to pachinko machines. Errors that can occur in pachinko machines include, for example, lower tray full error, dispensing device error, overdispensing error, incorrect dispensing error, main control communication error, magnetic abnormality error, magnetic field abnormality error, frame opening error, and RAM clear error. , impact sensor error, etc. These errors are also resolved when the error release switch is operated after the cause of the error is removed.

In step S702, it is determined whether or not it is an error notification period. If it is not an error notification period, the process proceeds to other device monitoring processing. If it is an error notification period, the process proceeds to step S703.

Here, the error notification period is a period during which settings are not being changed and any of the reels 110 to 112 is not rotating.

In step S703, it is determined whether each error is being reported. If not, the process advances to step S704; if each error is being reported, the process advances to step S705. In step S704, error notification start processing is executed.

In this error notification start process, the main control unit 300 displays an error code on the payout number display 127, and sends an error command corresponding to the detected error to the first sub-control unit 400.
Prepare for sending to. The first sub-control unit 400 transfers this error command to the main control unit 3.
When received from 00, a process to start error notification is executed.

Error notification will be described later, but in this example, when a selector error occurs,
In the display area of the display means (liquid crystal display device 157), the text strings "Selector error has occurred!!" and the text "Please call the game store clerk." are displayed, and the light emitting bodies (various lamps 420, etc.) are displayed. emits light in an error light emission mode, and outputs an error sound (sound such as "An error has occurred. Please call a game store clerk") from the sound output means (speakers 272, 277). Note that the mode of error notification is not particularly limited, and for example, the movable means (reel 110
-112) may be used to notify the error.

In step S705, it is determined whether the front door 102 is in an open state (door open),
If the door is being opened, other device monitoring processing is ended, and if the door is not being opened, the process advances to step S706. In step S706, it is determined whether the error notification termination condition is satisfied, and if the error notification termination condition is not satisfied, other device monitoring processing is terminated, and if the error notification termination condition is satisfied, the other device monitoring processing is terminated. , the process advances to step S707.

Here, the error notification termination condition is a condition that is satisfied when an error is not detected and an operation for canceling the error (in this example, an operation for turning on the reset SW) is received.

In step S707, error notification termination processing is executed. In this error notification termination process, the main control unit 300 erases the error code displayed on the payout number display 127 and sends an error resolution command corresponding to the resolved error to the first sub-control unit 400. Make preparations. When the first sub-control unit 400 receives this error resolution command from the main control unit 300, the first sub-control unit 400 executes a process of terminating the error notification being executed.

In step S708, it is determined whether the setting key SW is ON or OFF, and if it is OFF,
In order to continue displaying the management screen, close other device monitoring processes and, if turned on,
The process advances to step S709. In step S709, the main control unit 300 sends a preparation screen display command to the first sub-control unit 400, which instructs to start displaying the preparation screen (for example, see FIG. 16A (4)). Make preparations. When the first sub-control unit 400 receives this preparation screen display command from the main control unit 300, the first sub-control unit 400 displays the preparation screen until the management screen can be displayed, or is capable of displaying the management screen. However, the process of displaying the preparation screen for a predetermined period of time is executed.

<Administration screen>
Next, the management screen will be explained using FIGS. 12 to 18.

Here, the management screen is a screen used by an administrator such as a clerk at a game parlor to make various settings regarding the slot machine 100. Although the display contents of the administrator screen are not particularly limited, in this example, the administrator screen SD shown in FIG. 12(A) (2) etc. can be displayed.

The administrator screen SD of this example includes a title display of "System Settings" indicating that the screen is for an administrator, and multiple types of menu displays. The menu display in this example includes power saving settings, time settings, error history settings, and setting history.
The cross key 193a (up key, down key, right key, left key) and OK button 1 explained using
By operating 93b, it is possible to arbitrarily select any item on the menu display.

For example, when the power saving setting item is selected on the administrator screen SD, it is possible to set the power saving mode (for example, setting the volume of the speakers 272 and 277, and simple settings such as the brightness of the LEDs and various lamps). When the time setting item is selected, the date and time can be set.

In addition, when the error history item is selected on the administrator screen SD, the history of errors that occurred in the past in the relevant gaming machine, the opening/closing history of the front door 102, the history of power on/recovery from power outage, etc. When the setting history item is selected, it is possible to display the history of past setting changes and setting confirmations. In addition, the front door 102 in the error history
The opening/closing history and setting history will be described later.

Note that the items that can be selected on the administrator screen SD are not limited to this example, and include, for example, the maximum volume that can only be set by the administrator of the game parlor, and the items that can be selected in the event of an error (for example, opening the front door 102). It may be possible to set the error sound etc. to be output, and it may also be possible to set the amount of light of LEDs and various lamps.

Next, prior to explaining the management screen SD, terms used in the subsequent drawings will be explained using FIG. 12(A).

“Power status” indicates the status of the power supply externally supplied to the slot machine 100,
“Power OFF” is a state in which power is not supplied to the slot machine 100, and “power ON” is a state in which power is supplied to the slot machine 100.

"Reel operating state" indicates the operating state of the reels 110 to 112, "stopped" is a state in which all the reels 110 to 112 are stopped, and "in operation" is a state in which the reels 110 to 112 are stopped.
2 is in a state where at least one of them is rotating, which is synonymous with "rotating".

“Gate body closed state/gate body open state” indicates the state of the front door 102, “gate body closed state” is a state where the front door 102 is closed, and “gate body open state” is a state where the front door 102 is closed. The door 102 is in an open state. In addition, "closed detection state/open detection state" indicates the state of the open/close sensor, and "closed detection state" is a state in which it is detected that the front door 102 is closed, or a state in which the front door 102 is open. This state is a state in which the detection state of the open/close sensor is forcibly set to a closed detection state by a predetermined operation, and the "open detection state" is a state in which it is detected that the front door 102 is in an open state. It is.

"Non-inserted state/inserted state" indicates whether medals are inserted or not, and "non-inserted state"
is a state in which no medals have been inserted, and the "inserted state" is a state in which medals have been inserted, or a replay state due to replay winnings. In addition, "error detection state" indicates whether an error is detected, "error non-detection state" is a state in which no error is detected, and "error detection state" is a state in which a certain error is detected. It is in a state of being

"Setting key SW" indicates the state of the setting key SW, "ON" means that the setting key SW is on, and "OFF" means that the setting key SW is off. "Reset SW" is
Indicates the state of the reset SW, "ON" means the reset SW is ON, "OFF"
, the reset SW is in the OFF state.

"Start lever" indicates the state of the start lever 135, "ON" means that the start lever 135 is on, and "OFF" means that the start lever 135 is off. "Stop button" indicates the state of the stop buttons 137 to 139, and indicates "non-operation".
"stop operation" is a state in which the stop buttons 137 to 139 are not operated, and "stop operation" is a state in which the stop buttons 137 to 139 are operated. "Cross button" indicates the state of the cross button 193, "non-operation" is a state in which the cross button 193 is not operated, and "specific operation" is a state in which the cross button 193 is operated.

"Light-emitting body" indicates the operating state of the light-emitting means (in this example, various lamps 420 (upper lamp, lower lamp, side lamp 144, title panel 162 lamp, etc.));
This is a state in which the light emitting means is off, and the "open light emitting mode" is a state in which the light emitting means emits light in an open light emitting mode indicating that the front door 102 is in an open state, and the "stop light emitting mode" is a state in which the light emitting means emits light in a stopped light emitting mode indicating that the reels 110 to 112 are stopped.

"Output sound" indicates the operating state of the sound output means (in this example, speakers 272, 277),
"No output" is a state in which no sound is output from the sound output means, and "setting change sound" is a state in which a setting change sound indicating that settings are being changed is output from the sound output means. "Opening sound" is a state in which the sound output means outputs an opening sound indicating that the front door 102 is in an open state, and "stopped BGM" is a state in which the sound output means outputs an opening sound indicating that the front door 102 is in an open state. 112 is in a state where it is outputting stop BGM indicating that it is stopped. Further, “display example” indicates an example of display content displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157.

<Settings change mode>
Next, the setting change mode will be explained using FIG. 12(A). FIG. 12A is a diagram showing the flow of the setting change mode in chronological order.

<Setting change mode/Turn on setting key SW with power OFF>
The state shown in FIG. 12A (1) is when the setting key SW is turned OFF by the manager of the game parlor when the power supply is OFF, the front door 102 is in the open state, and the opening/closing sensor is in the open detection state.
An operation (a certain operation) to turn the setting key SW on is performed, and the setting key SW is turned on.

In this state, since the power supply state is OFF, the light emitters (various lamps 420, etc.) are turned off, the sound output means (speakers 272, 277) do not output sound, and the display means (
The liquid crystal display device 157) is not displaying anything.

<Settings change mode/Starting settings change mode, displaying the management screen>
The state shown in FIG. 12(A)(2) is the setting key SW explained using FIG. 12(A)(1).
In this state, the power switch is operated by the manager of the game parlor while the power switch is on, and the power state changes from power off to power on.

The slot machine 100 is configured so that when the power is turned on while the setting key SW is turned from OFF to ON, the slot machine 100 enters a state in which setting values can be changed (setting change mode). In this state, the setting value is changed to a state (setting change mode) in which the setting value can be changed, and a setting change sound is output from the sound output means (speakers 272, 277).

Furthermore, in the state shown in FIG. 12(A)(2), since the front door 102 is open,
A light emitting body (such as various lamps 420) emits light in an open light emission mode.

Further, in the slot machine 100, when the front door 102 (door body) is in the open state and the detection state of the opening/closing sensor (detection means) is in the open detection state, an operation (certain operation) of turning the setting key SW from OFF to ON is performed. When this is performed, the display of the management screen (management display) can be started.

More specifically, the main control unit 300 performs step S of the initial setting process described using FIG.
In steps 203 to S204, when it is determined that the front door 102 is in the open state and the setting key SW is ON, the setting change process explained using FIG. 7 is started.
Since it is in the open state and the setting key SW is ON, the setting change process is started.

Subsequently, in step S302 of this setting change process, the main control unit 300 transmits a setting change start command indicating to start changing settings to the first sub-control unit 400, and the first sub-control unit 400 When a setting change start command is received from the main control unit 300, a process to start displaying the management screen is executed. Thereby, as shown in FIG. 12(A)(2), the management screen SD is displayed in the display area of the display means (liquid crystal display device 157).

Next, in step S304 of the setting change process, the main control unit 300 displays the current setting value using the setting value display device 101a, but in this example, since the current setting value is setting 6, As shown in FIG. 12(A)(2), in the setting value display device 101a, the setting 6
The number 6 is displayed.

<Setting change mode/change of setting values>
The state shown in FIG. 12A (3) is a state in which the reset SW is operated once by the administrator of the game parlor in the setting change mode.

In steps S305 to S307 of the setting change process, the main control unit 300 resets the reset S
Each time an operation of W is detected, the currently set setting values 1 to 6 are updated by 1, and when the setting value exceeds 6, it is returned to 1, which is repeated. However, in this example, since one operation of the reset SW is detected, the number 1 indicating setting 1 is displayed on the setting value display device 101a as shown in FIG. 12(A) (3). indicate.

<Setting change mode/confirmation of setting values>
The state shown in FIG. 12(A) (4) is a state in which the start lever 135 is operated by the manager of the game parlor in the setting change mode.

The main control unit 300 controls the start lever 135 in step S307 of the setting change process.
If it is determined that the above operation has been performed, in the following steps S308 to S309, the setting value displayed on the setting value display device 101a is stored (determined) as a new setting value, and the setting value displayed on the setting value display device 101a is In this example, since the operation of the start lever 135 is detected, the display on the set value display device 101a is erased, as shown in FIG. 12(A) (4). do.

<Setting change mode/Exiting setting change mode>
The state shown in FIG. 12A (5) is a state in which the setting key SW is turned OFF as a result of the operation of turning the setting key SW from ON to OFF by the administrator of the gaming parlor in the setting change mode.

In step S310 of the setting change process, the main control unit 300 turns off the setting key SW.
If it is determined that
When the first sub-control unit 400 receives this setting change end command from the main control unit 300, the first sub-control unit 400 executes a process of terminating the display of the management screen.

As a result, as shown in FIG. 12A (5), the management screen SD displayed in the display area of the display means (liquid crystal display device 157) is erased, and the normal performance is started. In addition, in this example, since reels 110 to 112 are stopped, reels 110 to 1
12 is stopped.

<Settings confirmation mode>
Next, the setting confirmation mode will be explained using FIG. 12(B). FIG. 12(B) is a diagram showing the flow of the setting confirmation mode in chronological order.

<Setting confirmation mode/Front door: Door body closed state>
The state shown in FIG. 12B (1) is a state in which the power supply is ON, the front door 102 is in the closed state, and the opening/closing sensor is in the closed detection state, and the stopped effect is being executed.

In the same state, since the reels 110 to 112 are stopped, the light emitters (various lamps 42
0, etc.) in a stopped light emitting mode, and the sound output means (speakers 272, 277) outputs the stopped B
GM is output, and a stop effect is displayed in the display area of the display means (liquid crystal display device 157).

<Setting confirmation mode/Front door: Door body closed state → Door body open state)>
The state shown in FIG. 12(B)(2) is the state in which the front door 102 is opened and the front door 102 changes from the door closed state to the door closed state described using FIG. 12(B)(1). It is in an open state.

In the same state, since the front door 102 is in the open state, the light emitting body (various lamps 42
0, etc.) in an open light emission mode, and an open sound is output from the sound output means (speakers 272, 277), while the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157 continues to perform a stop effect.

<Settings confirmation mode/Power ON, front door (door open) and setting key SW ON>
The state shown in FIG. 12 (B) (3) is the state shown in FIG. The user performs an operation (a certain operation) to turn the setting key SW from OFF to ON, and the setting key SW is in an ON state.

When the slot machine 100 is powered on, turn the setting key SW from OFF to ON.
The configuration is such that when an operation is performed, the setting changes to a state in which the settings can be confirmed (settings confirmation mode). Transition.

Further, in the slot machine 100, when the front door 102 (door body) is in the open state and the detection state of the opening/closing sensor (detection means) is in the open detection state (first state), the setting key SW is turned OFF.
When an operation (certain operation) is performed to turn it on, display of the management screen SD (management display) can be started.

More specifically, in steps S602 to S603 of the setting value confirmation process explained using FIG. The state where the number of medals (in this example, 3 medals) has been bet, or the replay state due to replay), the open/close sensor is not in the closed detection state, and the reel 110
112 is not rotating or notifying an error), and if it is determined that the setting key SW is ON, in the following step S604, the setting value display device 101
Display the current setting value using a.

In this example, the setting value confirmation valid period is valid, the setting key SW is ON, and the current setting value is setting 6, so the number 6 indicating setting 6 is displayed on the setting value display device 101a. do.

Subsequently, in step S605 of the setting value confirmation process, the main control unit 300 transmits a setting confirmation start command indicating to start setting confirmation to the first sub-control unit 400, and the first sub-control unit 400 When a setting confirmation start command is received from the main control unit 300, a process to start displaying the management screen is executed. Thereby, as shown in FIG. 12(B)(3), the management screen SD is displayed in the display area of the display means (liquid crystal display device 157).

<Settings confirmation mode/Exiting settings confirmation mode>
The state shown in FIG. 12B (4) is a state in which the setting key SW is turned OFF as a result of the operation of turning the setting key SW from ON to OFF by the administrator of the game parlor in the setting confirmation mode.

In step S606 of the setting value confirmation process, the main control unit 300 determines that the setting key SW is OFF.
If it is determined to be F, a setting confirmation end command indicating to end the setting confirmation is sent to the first sub-control unit 400, and the first sub-control unit 400 transmits this setting confirmation end command to the main control unit. When received from 300, processing for terminating the display of the management screen is executed.

As a result, as shown in FIG. 12(B)(4), the management screen SD displayed in the display area of the display means (liquid crystal display device 157) is erased, and the normal performance is started. In addition, in this example, since reels 110 to 112 are stopped, reels 110 to 1
12 is stopped.

<Display example 1 of management screen>
Next, display example 1 of the management screen will be described using FIG. 13(A). Figure 13(A)
1 is a diagram showing the flow of display example 1 of the management screen in chronological order.

The states shown in FIG. 13(A)(1) to FIG. 13(A)(3) are the same as those shown in FIG. 12(B)(1) to FIG.
) This is the same state as the setting confirmation mode explained using (3), and when the power is on, the front door 102 is in the open state, and the opening/closing sensor is in the open detection state, the setting key SW is pressed by the game parlor manager. An operation (certain operation) to turn on from OFF has been performed, and the display of the management screen SD has started.

In order to avoid redundant explanation, a detailed explanation of the same state will be omitted, but FIG. 13 (
In the states shown in A)(1) to (A)(2) in the figure, the front door 102 is in an open state, so the stop effect is executed in the display area of the display means (liquid crystal display device 157). In addition to (or instead of), an open notification indicating that the door is open (e.g., an image containing the string "The door is open") may be displayed (other implementations may be used). example).

<Display example 1 of management screen/Opening/closing sensor: Open detection state → Closed detection state>
The state shown in FIG. 13A (4) is a state in which the detection state of the opening/closing sensor is forced into the closed detection state by a predetermined operation in the setting confirmation mode.

In the slot machine 100, even if the detection state of the open/close sensor (detection means) changes from the open detection state to the closed detection state while the management screen SD (management display) is displayed, the management screen SD (management display) is displayed. It is configured to continue displaying the screen SD (management display).

More specifically, when the setting value is being confirmed and the setting key SW is ON in steps S601 and S606 of the setting value confirmation process described using FIG.
The setting value confirmation process is ended and the setting confirmation mode is continued, but in this example, since the setting value is being confirmed and the setting key SW is ON, as shown in FIG. 13(A) (4), Management screen S
Continue displaying D.

In the state shown in FIG. 13A (4), the front door 102 is open, but since the detection state of the opening/closing sensor is the closed detection state, the light emitters (various The sound output means (speakers 272, 277) that turned off the lights (lamp 420, etc.) and output the opening sound
Set the output sound to non-output.

<Display example 1 of management screen/Exiting setting confirmation mode>
The state shown in FIG. 13A (5) is a state in which the setting key SW is turned OFF as a result of the operation of turning the setting key SW from ON to OFF by the administrator of the gaming parlor in the setting confirmation mode.

If the main control unit 300 determines that the setting key SW is OFF in step S606 of the setting value confirmation process described using FIG. When the first sub-control unit 400 receives this setting confirmation end command from the main control unit 300, the first sub-control unit 400 executes a process of terminating the display of the management screen.

As a result, as shown in FIG. 13(A)(5), the management screen SD displayed in the display area of the display means (liquid crystal display device 157) is erased, and the normal performance is started. In addition, in this example, since reels 110 to 112 are stopped, reels 110 to 1
12 is stopped.

<Display example 1 of the management screen/Turn on the setting key SW with the open/close sensor (closed detection state)>
The state shown in FIG. 13(A)(6) is that when the front door 102 is in the open state and the opening/closing sensor is in the closed detection state, an operation to turn the setting key SW from OFF to ON (a certain operation) ) has been performed and the setting key SW is turned on.

In the slot machine 100, when the front door 102 (door body) is in the open state and the detection state of the opening/closing sensor (detection means) is in the closed detection state, the operation of turning the setting key SW from OFF to ON (
The display of the management screen SD (management display) cannot be started even if a certain operation is performed.

More specifically, in steps S602 to S603 of the setting value confirmation process explained using FIG. The state where the number of medals (in this example, 3 medals) has been bet, or the replay state due to replay), the open/close sensor is not in the closed detection state, and the reel 110
112 is not rotating or notifying an error), and if it is determined that the setting key SW is ON, in the following step S604, the setting value display device 101
Display the current setting value using a.

In this example, since the open/close sensor is in the closed detection state and the set value confirmation valid period is not over, the set value confirmation process is ended and the subsequent process of step S604 is not executed, so the set value is displayed on the set value display device 101a. will not be displayed. Furthermore, since the process in step S605 is not executed, a setting confirmation start command indicating that setting confirmation is to be started is sent to the first sub-control unit 4.
00, the display means (liquid crystal display device 15
In the display area 7), the display of the management screen SD is not started, and the stopped effect is continued.

As explained above, the game machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 1 shown in FIG.
00, Pachinko machine) includes a display means (e.g., liquid crystal display device 157 shown in FIG. 1), a door body (e.g., front door 102 shown in FIG. 1) that is provided at the front of the gaming machine and can be opened and closed, and the A detection means capable of detecting the open/closed state of the door body (for example, the open/close sensor shown in FIG. 1), and a first operation means (for example, , setting key SW), a plurality of reels (for example, reels 110 to 112 shown in FIG. 1) that are rotatably driven and decorated with a plurality of types of symbols, and a plurality of reels provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels; A plurality of stop buttons (for example, stop buttons 137 to 137) for individually stopping the rotation of the reels
139), wherein the detection means is means capable of changing the detection state to a closed detection state when the door body is in the closed state, and the detection means is a means that can change the detection state to a closed detection state when the door body is in the closed state. When the body is in an open state, the detection state can become an open detection state, and a predetermined operation regarding the detection means (for example, between the light emitting part and the light receiving part of the opening/closing sensor of the main body 101, By performing an operation of inserting a light shielding piece of a certain length and fixing it with tape or the like, the detection state of the detection means becomes the closed detection state even if the door body is in the open state. It is configured,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a management display for an administrator, and the door body is in the open state and the detection state of the detection means is the open detection state (hereinafter referred to as the "first state"). That's what it means.
) is configured to be able to start displaying the management display when the certain operation is performed, and when the certain operation is performed in the first state in which the reels are rotating. Even if the operation is performed, the management display is configured not to start being displayed, and in the first state, the state where the reels are rotating, and the state where the certain operation is performed, When the plurality of reels are stopped in a first stop mode (for example, a symbol combination corresponding to a small winning combination (bell)) by a stop button, the display of the management display is started; Even if the certain operation is performed when the door body is in the open state and the detection state of the detection means is in the closed detection state, display of the management display cannot be started,
In the state where the management display is displayed, even if the detection state of the detection means changes from the open detection state to the closed detection state, the display of the management display (for example, FIG. 1
This gaming machine is characterized by continuing the management screen SD) shown in 3(A)(4).

According to the game machine according to the present embodiment, if a certain operation is performed on the first operation means during a game (for example, while the reels are rotating or when medals are being bet), a fraudulent act is committed. Therefore, security can be improved by configuring so that the management display is not displayed while the reels are rotating even when the door body is in an open state. In addition, security can be improved by preventing the management display from being checked even if, for example, a fraudster performs a predetermined operation and opens the door with the detection state of the detection means set to the closed detection state. can be achieved. Furthermore, by continuing to display the management display even if the door open sensor is in the closed detection state after the management display has been displayed, it is possible to provide a game machine that is easy to use for the game store staff. It becomes possible.

Note that in the first state, the state in which the reels are rotating, and the state in which a certain operation is being performed, the plurality of reels are moved to a second stop state (for example, a replay winning combination) by the stop button. (symbol combination corresponding to replay)), the display of the management display may not be started.

With this configuration, even if the reels are in a stopped state, if they stop in the second stop mode (replay stop mode) (because it becomes a max bet state), it will be determined that gaming is in progress and the management display will be displayed. Security can be improved by preventing the display from starting.

Moreover, the first operating means may be a means provided at a position that can be operated only when the door body is in the open state.

With such a configuration, only the administrator of the gaming parlor can operate the first operating means, and therefore, fraudulent acts and the like can be reliably prevented.

<Display example 2 of management screen>
Next, display example 2 of the management screen will be described using FIG. 13(B). Figure 13(B)
2 is a diagram showing the flow of display example 2 of the management screen in chronological order.

The states shown in FIG. 13(B)(1) to FIG. 13(B)(3) are the same as those shown in FIG. 12(B)(1) to FIG.
) This is the same state as the setting confirmation mode explained using (3), and when the power is on, the front door 102 is in the open state, and the opening/closing sensor is in the open detection state, the setting key SW is pressed by the game parlor manager. An operation (certain operation) to turn on from OFF has been performed, and the display of the management screen SD has started. In order to avoid redundant explanation, detailed explanation of the same state will be omitted.

<Display example 2 of management screen/Power status: Power ON → Power OFF>
The state shown in FIG. 13 (B) (4) is when the power state shown in FIG. This is the state where the power has changed from ON to OFF.

In this state, since the power supply state is OFF, the light emitters (various lamps 420, etc.) are turned off, the sound output means (speakers 272, 277) do not output sound, and the display means (
The liquid crystal display device 157) is not displaying anything.

<Display example 2 of management screen/Setting key SW: ON → OFF>
The state shown in FIG. 13(B)(5) is different from the power state shown in FIG. 13(B)(4) when the power is OFF,
When the setting key SW is ON, the setting key SW is changed from ON to OFF by the game parlor manager.
This is a state in which the setting key SW is turned OFF after an operation to turn it OFF has been performed.

In the same state, the power supply state is OFF, so the light emitting bodies (various lamps 420, etc.) are turned off, the sound output means (speakers 272, 277) do not output sound, and the display means (liquid crystal display 157) ) are hidden.

<Display example 2 of management screen/Power status: Power OFF → Power ON>
The state shown in FIG. 13 (B) (6) is when the power state shown in FIG. OF
This is the state where the power has changed from F to ON.

In the slot machine 100, with the management screen SD (management display) displayed, after turning off the power, turn the setting key SW from ON to OFF (cancel a certain operation),
When the power is turned on, the display of the management display is started even without performing the certain operation.

More specifically, in step S205 of the main control unit initialization process described using FIG. In a state where no command is being sent, determine whether the setting key SW is ON or OFF, and if it is OFF, send a setting confirmation start command to the first sub-control unit 400 indicating that setting confirmation is to be started. do.

When the first sub-control unit 400 receives this setting confirmation start command from the main control unit 300, it executes processing to start displaying the management screen. Thereby, as shown in FIG. 13(B)(6), the management screen SD is displayed in the display area of the display means (liquid crystal display device 157).

As explained above, the game machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 1 shown in FIG.
00, Pachinko machine) includes a display means (e.g., liquid crystal display device 157 shown in FIG. 1), a door body (e.g., front door 102 shown in FIG. 1) that is provided at the front of the gaming machine and can be opened and closed, and the A detection means capable of detecting the open/closed state of the door body (for example, the open/close sensor shown in FIG. 1), and a first operation means (for example, , setting key SW), a plurality of reels (for example, reels 110 to 112 shown in FIG. 1) that are rotatably driven and decorated with a plurality of types of symbols, and a plurality of reels provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels; A plurality of stop buttons (for example, stop buttons 137 to 137) for individually stopping the rotation of the reels
139), wherein the detection means is means capable of changing the detection state to a closed detection state when the door body is in the closed state, and the detection means is a means that can change the detection state to a closed detection state when the door body is in the closed state. means capable of changing the detection state to an open detection state when the body is in an open state, the display means being a means capable of displaying a management display for an administrator, and the detection state of the detection means is configured to be able to start displaying the management display when the certain operation is performed in the open detection state (hereinafter referred to as the "first state"); In the first state, when the reels are rotating, the display of the management display is not started even if the certain operation is performed, and in the first state, the reels are rotating. state, and in a state where the certain operation is being performed, when the plurality of reels are stopped in the first stopping mode (for example, a symbol combination corresponding to a small winning combination (bell)) by the stop button, the above-mentioned The management display is configured to start displaying the administrative display (for example, FIG. 13(B) (3).
) is displayed, if you cancel the certain operation and turn on the power after turning off the power, the management screen (SD) shown in ) will be displayed without performing the certain operation. For example, the gaming machine is characterized in that it starts displaying the management screen SD shown in FIG. 13(B)(6).

According to the game machine according to the present embodiment, if a certain operation is performed on the first operation means during a game (for example, while the reels are rotating or when medals are being bet), a fraudulent act is committed. Therefore, security can be improved by configuring so that the management display is not displayed while the reels are rotating even when the door body is in an open state. In addition, if the management display has not been correctly terminated, even if the power is turned on, the management display is displayed, thereby making it possible to provide a game machine that is easy to use for game store staff.

Note that in the first state, the state in which the reels are rotating, and the state in which a certain operation is being performed, the plurality of reels are moved to a second stop state (for example, a replay winning combination) by the stop button. (symbol combination corresponding to replay)), the display of the management display may not be started.

With this configuration, even if the reels are in a stopped state, if they stop in the second stop mode (replay stop mode) (because it becomes a max bet state), it will be determined that gaming is in progress and the management display will be displayed. Security can be improved by preventing the display from starting.

Moreover, the first operating means may be a means provided at a position that can be operated only when the door body is in the open state.

With such a configuration, only the administrator of the gaming parlor can operate the first operating means, and therefore, fraudulent acts and the like can be reliably prevented.

<Display example 3 of management screen>
Next, display example 3 of the management screen will be described using FIG. 14(A). Figure 14(A)
2 is a diagram showing the flow of display example 3 of the management screen in chronological order.

<Display example 3 of management screen/Reel operating status: In operation>
The state shown in FIG. 14A (1) is a state in which the front door 102 is in the closed state, the opening/closing sensor is in the closed detection state, and the reel is in operation (at least one of the reels 110 to 112 is rotating). state).

In the same state, since the reel operation state is in operation, the light emitting body (various lamps 420, etc.)
emits light in a light-emitting manner during the game, outputs BGM during the game from the sound output means (speakers 272, 277), and displays the effect during the game in the display area of the display means (liquid crystal display device 157).

<Display example 3 of management screen/Front door: Door body closed state → Door body open state>
The state shown in FIG. 14(A)(2) is the state in which the front door 102 is opened and the front door 102 changes from the door closed state to the door closed state described using FIG. 14(A)(1). It is in an open state.

In the same state, since the front door 102 is in the open state, the light emitting body (various lamps 42
0, etc.) in an open light emission mode, and an open sound is output from the sound output means (speakers 272, 277), while the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157 continues to provide effects during the game.

<Display example 3 of the management screen/Turn on the setting key SW while the reels are rotating>
The state shown in FIG. 14(A)(3) is when the reel operating state shown in FIG. 14(A)(2) is in operation.
When the front door 102 is in the open state and the opening/closing sensor is in the open detection state, an operation (a certain operation) to turn the setting key SW from OFF to ON is performed by the administrator of the game parlor, and the setting key SW is turned OFF.
It is in a state of N.

In the slot machine 100, the front door 102 (door body) is in an open state, the opening/closing sensor (detection means) is in an open detection state (first state), and the reels 110 to 112 are rotating. , even if an operation (certain operation) is performed to turn the setting key SW from OFF to ON, the state does not change to a state where the setting values can be confirmed (setting confirmation mode), and the management screen (management display) does not change. Configured not to start displaying.

More specifically, in steps S602 to S603 of the setting value confirmation process explained using FIG. The state where the number of medals (in this example, 3 medals) has been bet, or the replay state due to replay), the open/close sensor is not in the closed detection state, and the reel 110
112 is not rotating or notifying an error), and if it is determined that the setting key SW is ON, in the following step S604, the setting value display device 101
Display the current setting value using a.

In this example, since one of the reels 110 to 112 is rotating and the set value confirmation valid period is not over, the set value confirmation process is ended and the subsequent process of step S604 is not executed, so the set value display device Setting values are not displayed in 101a. Also, step S60
Since the process in step 5 is not executed, the setting confirmation start command indicating the start of setting confirmation is not sent to the first sub-control unit 400. Therefore, as shown in FIG. In the display area of the display device 157), the display of the management screen SD is not started,
The performance continues during the game.

<Display example 3 of management screen/Reel operating status: Operating → Stopped>
The state shown in FIG. 14(A)(4) is when the reel operating state shown in FIG. 14(A)(3) is in operation.
When the front door 102 is in the open state and the opening/closing sensor is in the open detection state, the third stop operation (stop operation) is performed by the manager of the game parlor, and the reels 110 to 112 are in a stopped state.

In the same state, the small winning combination (Bell) was internally won and the third stop operation (stop operation) was performed. In addition to displaying the combination (in this example, the symbol combination “Bell-Bell-Bell”),
) As shown in (4), in the display area of the display means (liquid crystal display device 157), a winning notification display ND1 (in this example, an image of a bell symbol and a bell symbol) indicating that a small winning combination (bell) has been won is displayed in the display area of the display means (liquid crystal display device 157). G
ET! ! ”) is displayed.

Note that in the state shown in FIG. 14A (4), the front door 102 is in an open state, so the light emitters (various lamps 420, etc.) emit light in an open light emission mode, and the sound output means (speaker 272
, 277), but the present invention is not limited to this, and the light emitters (various lamps 420, etc.) emit light in a winning notification mode that suggests that the winning combination has been won, and the sound is output. means(
A winning notification sound indicating that a winning combination has been won may be output from the speakers 272, 277 (the same applies to other embodiments).

<Display example 3 of management screen/Display of management screen>
The state shown in FIG. 14(A)(5) is a state in which the display of the management screen SD is started after winning the small winning combination (bell) described using FIG. 14(A)(4).

In the slot machine 100, the front door 102 (door body) is in an open state, the detection state of the opening/closing sensor (detection means) is an open detection state (first state), the reels 110 to 112 are rotating, and While an operation (certain operation) is being performed to turn the setting key SW from OFF to ON, the plurality of reels 110 to
112 is configured to start displaying a management screen SD (management display) when it is stopped in a first stop mode (in this example, a symbol combination corresponding to a small role (bell)).
More specifically, in steps S602 to S603 of the setting value confirmation process explained using FIG. The state where the number of medals (in this example, 3 medals) has been bet, or the replay state due to replay), the open/close sensor is not in the closed detection state, and the reel 110
112 is not rotating or notifying an error), and if it is determined that the setting key SW is ON, in the following step S604, the setting value display device 101
Display the current setting value using a.

In this example, since it is the set value confirmation valid period and the setting key SW is ON, a number indicating the current set value is displayed on the set value display device 101a.

Subsequently, in step S605 of the setting value confirmation process, the main control unit 300 transmits a setting confirmation start command indicating to start setting confirmation to the first sub-control unit 400, and the first sub-control unit 400 When a setting confirmation start command is received from the main control unit 300, a process to start displaying the management screen is executed. Thereby, as shown in FIG. 14(A)(5), the management screen SD is displayed in the display area of the display means (liquid crystal display device 157).

As explained above, the game machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 1 shown in FIG.
00, Pachinko machine) includes a display means (e.g., liquid crystal display device 157 shown in FIG. 1), a door body (e.g., front door 102 shown in FIG. 1) that is provided at the front of the gaming machine and can be opened and closed, and the A detection means capable of detecting the open/closed state of the door body (for example, the open/close sensor shown in FIG. 1), and a first operation means (for example, , setting key SW), a plurality of reels (for example, reels 110 to 112 shown in FIG. 1) that are rotatably driven and decorated with a plurality of types of symbols, and a plurality of reels provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels; A plurality of stop buttons (for example, stop buttons 137 to 137) for individually stopping the rotation of the reels
139), wherein the detection means is means capable of changing the detection state to a closed detection state when the door body is in the closed state, and the detection means is a means that can change the detection state to a closed detection state when the door body is in the closed state. means capable of changing the detection state to an open detection state when the body is in an open state, the display means being a means capable of displaying a management display for an administrator, and the detection state of the detection means is configured to be able to start displaying the management display when the certain operation is performed in the open detection state (hereinafter referred to as the "first state"); In the first state, when the reels are rotating, the display of the management display is not started even if the certain operation is performed, and in the first state, the reels are rotating. state, and in a state where the certain operation is being performed, when the plurality of reels are stopped in the first stopping mode (for example, a symbol combination corresponding to a small winning combination (bell)) by the stop button, the above-mentioned This gaming machine is configured to start displaying a management display (for example, management screen SD shown in FIG. 14(A)(5)).

According to the game machine according to the present embodiment, if a certain operation is performed on the first operation means during a game (for example, while the reels are rotating or when medals are being bet), a fraudulent act is committed. Therefore, security can be improved by configuring so that the management display is not displayed while the reels are rotating even when the door body is in an open state.

Note that the first operating means may be a means provided at a position that can be operated only when the door body is in the open state.

With such a configuration, only the administrator of the gaming parlor can operate the first operating means, and therefore, fraudulent acts and the like can be reliably prevented.

It also includes a sound output means (for example, the speakers 272, 277 shown in FIG. 2) and a second operation means (for example, the cross button 193 shown in FIG. 1), and the second operation means can be operated. The display means is configured to be able to change the volume output from the sound output means when the second operation means is operated, and the display means displays the volume value when the second operation means is operated.
For example, the means can display the volume value display VD2) shown in FIG. 18(B)(2), and while the management display is being displayed, the display means can display the volume value display, It may be configured such that the volume output from the sound output means cannot be changed even if the second operation means is operated (for example, see FIG. 18(B)(3)).

With such a configuration, it is possible to check the operation of the volume value display even while the management display is being displayed, and it is possible to improve convenience for the manager of the game parlor.

Further, the second operating means may be a means provided at a position where the door body can be operated whether the door body is in the open state or the closed state.

With such a configuration, not only the game parlor manager but also the players can adjust the volume, and the convenience for the players can be improved.

<Display example 4 of management screen>
Next, display example 4 of the management screen will be described using FIG. 14(B). Figure 14(B)
2 is a diagram showing the flow of display example 4 of the management screen in chronological order.

The states shown in FIGS. 14(B)(1) to 14(B)(3) are
) This is the same state as the setting confirmation mode explained using (3), and when the power is on, the front door 102 is in the open state, and the opening/closing sensor is in the open detection state, the setting key SW is pressed by the game parlor manager. An operation (certain operation) was performed to turn on from OFF, but reels 110 to 1
12 is rotating (the reel operating state is in operation), the management screen SD is not displayed. In order to avoid redundant explanation, detailed explanation of the same state will be omitted.

<Display example 4 of management screen/Reel operation status: Operating → Stopped>
The state shown in FIG. 14(B)(4) is when the reel operating state shown in FIG. 14(B)(3) is in operation.
When the front door 102 is in the open state and the opening/closing sensor is in the open detection state, the third stop operation (stop operation) is performed by the manager of the game parlor, and the reels 110 to 112 are in a stopped state.

In the same state, the re-gaming combination (replay) has been internally won and the third stop operation (stop operation) has been performed.
The symbol combination corresponding to (in this example, the symbol combination "Replay-Replay-Replay") is displayed, and the display means moves to a replay state by replay, as shown in FIG. 14(B)(4). In the display area of the (liquid crystal display device 157), a winning notification display ND2 (in this example, an image of a replay symbol and a message "GET!") indicating that a replay winning combination has been won is displayed.
! ”) is displayed.

<Display example 4 of the management screen/Hide the management screen>
The state shown in FIG. 14(B)(5) is the state after winning the replay combination (replay) described using FIG. 14(A)(4).

In the slot machine 100, the front door 102 (door body) is in an open state, the opening/closing sensor (detection means) is in an open detection state (first state), the reels 110 to 112 are rotating, and While an operation (certain operation) is being performed to turn the setting key SW from OFF to ON, the plurality of reels 110 to
112 is stopped in the second stopping mode (in this example, a symbol combination corresponding to a replay combination), the management screen SD (management display) is configured not to start displaying. ,
More specifically, in steps S602 to S603 of the setting value confirmation process explained using FIG. The state where the number of medals (in this example, 3 medals) has been bet, or the replay state due to replay), the open/close sensor is not in the closed detection state, and the reel 110
112 is not rotating or notifying an error), and if it is determined that the setting key SW is ON, in the following step S604, the setting value display device 101
Display the current setting value using a.

In this example, since it is a replay state (MAX bet state) due to replay and it is not the set value confirmation valid period, the set value confirmation process is ended and the subsequent process of step S604 is not executed, so the set value display device Setting values are not displayed in 101a. Furthermore, since the process in step S605 is not executed, a setting confirmation start command indicating that setting confirmation is to be started is not sent to the first sub-control unit 400, so that the display area of the display means (liquid crystal display device 157) is As shown in 14(B)(5), the display of the management screen SD is not started, and the performance during the game is continued.

According to this example, in the first state (the front door 102 is in the open state and the detection state of the opening/closing sensor is the open detection state), the state in which the reel is rotating, and the state in which a certain operation is being performed. , when the plurality of reels are stopped in a second stop mode (in this example, a symbol combination corresponding to a replay combination) by the stop button, the management display is configured not to start being displayed. Therefore, even if the reels are stopped, if they stop in the second stop mode (replay stop mode) (max bet state), it will be determined that the reel is in play and the management display will not start displaying. By doing so, security can be improved.

<Error notification display example 1>
Next, display example 1 of error notification will be described using FIG. 15(A). Figure 15(A)
1 is a diagram showing the flow of error notification display example 1 in chronological order.

<Error notification display example 1/Reel operating status: In operation (error non-detected state)>
The state shown in FIG. 15A (1) is a state in which the front door 102 is in the closed state, the opening/closing sensor is in the closed detection state, and the reel is in operation (at least one of the reels 110 to 112 is rotating). (state), and no error is detected.

In the same state, since the reel operation state is in operation, the light emitting body (various lamps 420, etc.)
emits light in a light emitting mode during the game, outputs BGM during the game from the sound output means (speakers 272, 277), and displays the effect during the game in the display area of the display means (liquid crystal display device 157).

<Error notification display example 1/Reel operating state: In operation (error detection state)>
The state shown in FIG. 15(A)(2) is different from the reel operating state shown in FIG. 15(A)(1) when the reel is in operation (
This is a state in which an error occurs in the state (error non-detection state), and the state becomes an error detection state.

In the slot machine 100, the front door 102 (door body) is in an open state, the opening/closing sensor (detection means) is in an open detection state (first state), and the reels 110 to 112 are rotating. , even if a certain error (in this example, medal insertion abnormality 1 (medal selector error)) is detected, the display of the error notification (error display) is not started.

More specifically, when the main control unit 300 detects each error in step S701 of the other device monitoring process described using FIG.
In S703, the error notification period (in this example, the reel 110 is not changing settings,
- 112 is not in rotation) and if it is determined that each error notification is not in progress, an error notification start process is executed in the subsequent step S704.

The state shown in FIG. 15(A)(2) is a state in which the reel operation state is in operation (reels 110 to 1
12 (at least one of them is rotating), and it is not the error reporting period, so other device monitoring processing is terminated and the error reporting is not started, as shown in FIG. 15 (A).
As shown in 2), the performance during the game is continued.

<Error notification display example 3/Reel operating status: Operating → Stopped>
The state shown in FIG. 15(A)(3) is different from the reel operating state shown in FIG. 15(A)(2) when the reel is in operation (
In the error detection state), the third stop operation (stop operation) is performed by the manager of the game parlor, and the reels 110 to 112 are in a stopped state.

In the same state, the small winning combination (Bell) was internally won and the third stop operation (stop operation) was performed. In addition to displaying the combination (in this example, the symbol combination "Bell-Bell-Bell"),
) As shown in (3), in the display area of the display means (liquid crystal display device 157), a winning notification display ND1 (in this example, an image of a bell symbol and a bell symbol) indicating that a small winning combination (bell) has been won is displayed in the display area of the display means (liquid crystal display device 157). G
ET! ! ”) is displayed.

In addition, the light-emitting body (various lamps 420, etc.) emits light in a bell-emitting manner indicating that a small prize (bell) has been won, and the sound output means (speakers 272, 277) indicates that a small prize (bell) has been won. Outputs a bell sound effect that suggests this.

<Error notification display example 1/Error notification display>
The state shown in FIG. 15(A)(4) is a state in which the display of the error notification ER is started after winning the small winning combination (bell) described using FIG. 15(A)(3).

In the slot machine 100, the front door 102 (door body) is in an open state, the opening/closing sensor (detection means) is in an open detection state (first state), the reels 110 to 112 are rotating, and When a certain error (in this example, medal insertion abnormality 1 (medal selector error)) is detected, the plurality of reels 110 to 112 are switched to the first stop mode (main stop mode) by the stop buttons 137 to 139 (stop buttons). In the example, when it is stopped at a symbol combination corresponding to a small winning combination (bell), it is configured to start displaying an error notification ER (error display).
More specifically, when the main control unit 300 detects each error in step S701 of the other device monitoring process described using FIG.
In S703, the error notification period (in this example, the reel 110 is not changing settings,
- 112 are not in rotation) and if it is determined that each error notification is not in progress, error notification is started in the subsequent step S704.

Since the state shown in FIG. 15(A)(4) is an error notification possible period, the main control unit 30
0 executes error notification start processing. In this error notification start process, the payout number display 1
27, and sends an error command corresponding to the detected error to the first sub-control unit 400, and the first sub-control unit 400 sends this error command to the main control unit 30.
If received from 0, execute processing to start error notification.

As a result, as shown in FIG. 15(A)(4), the display area of the display means (liquid crystal display device 157) displays an error notification ER (in this example, a character string "Selector error has occurred!!"). and the text string "Please call the game store clerk." is displayed. In addition, in the same state, the light emitters (various lamps 420, etc.) emit light in an error light emission mode, and the sound output means (speakers 272, 277) output an error sound (for example, "An error has occurred. Please call the game store clerk. ”) is output.

Note that the manner of error notification is not limited to this example; for example, after the first error notification in which the content of the error is indiscernible (for example, display of the character string "Please call a game store clerk"), , the content of the error may be notified in stages by executing a second error notification that allows the content of the error to be identified (for example, displaying a character string "Selector error has occurred!!"). .

Further, as shown in FIG. 15(A) (2'), the front door 102 (door body) is in the open state and the detection state of the opening/closing sensor (detection means) is in the open detection state (first state). reel 110
When a certain error (in this example, medal insertion error 1 (medal selector error)) is detected while the machine is rotating, a special error notification (error display) will start to be displayed. May be configured. Further, in this case, the configuration may be such that the error cannot be canceled while the reels 110 to 112 are rotating even if there is an operation using the reset SW (error cancellation operation).

As explained above, the game machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 1 shown in FIG.
00, Pachinko machine) includes a display means (e.g., liquid crystal display device 157 shown in FIG. 1), a door body (e.g., front door 102 shown in FIG. 1) that is provided at the front of the gaming machine and can be opened and closed, and the A detection means capable of detecting the open/closed state of the door body (for example, the open/close sensor shown in FIG. 1), and a first operation means (for example, , setting key SW), a plurality of reels (for example, reels 110 to 112 shown in FIG. 1) that are rotatably driven and decorated with a plurality of types of symbols, and a plurality of reels provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels; A plurality of stop buttons (for example, stop buttons 137 to 137) for individually stopping the rotation of the reels
139), wherein the detection means is means capable of changing the detection state to a closed detection state when the door body is in the closed state, and the detection means is a means that can change the detection state to a closed detection state when the door body is in the closed state. means capable of changing the detection state to an open detection state when the body is in an open state, the display means being a means capable of displaying a management display for an administrator, and the detection state of the detection means is configured to be able to start displaying the management display when the certain operation is performed in the open detection state (hereinafter referred to as the "first state"); In the first state, when the reels are rotating, the display of the management display is not started even if the certain operation is performed, and in the first state, the reels are rotating. state, and in a state where the certain operation is being performed, when the plurality of reels are stopped in the first stopping mode (for example, a symbol combination corresponding to a small winning combination (bell)) by the stop button, the above-mentioned It is configured to start displaying a management display, and when a certain error (for example, medal insertion error 1 (medal selector error)) is detected while the reels are stopped, The system is configured to be able to start displaying a related error display, and even if the certain error is detected in the first state in which the reels are rotating, the display of the error display is started. In the first state, in the state in which the reels are rotating, and in the state in which a certain error is detected, the stop button causes the plurality of reels to stop in a first stop state. (for example, a symbol combination corresponding to a small winning combination (bell)), the display is configured to start displaying the error display (for example, the error notification ER shown in FIG. 15(A)(4)). It is a game machine that is characterized by the fact that

According to the game machine according to the present embodiment, if a certain operation is performed on the first operation means during a game (for example, while the reels are rotating or when medals are being bet), a fraudulent act is committed. Therefore, security can be improved by configuring so that the management display is not displayed while the reels are rotating even when the door body is in an open state. In addition, even if an error occurs during gaming (for example, while the reels are spinning or medals are being bet), the error notification will not be started and the error notification will be started immediately after the game is stopped, thereby improving security. You can improve your performance.

Note that in the first state, the state in which the reels are rotating, and the state in which a certain operation is being performed, the plurality of reels are moved to a second stop state (for example, a replay winning combination) by the stop button. (symbol combination corresponding to replay)), the display of the management display may not be started.

With this configuration, even if the reels are in a stopped state, if they stop in the second stop mode (replay stop mode) (because it becomes a max bet state), it will be determined that gaming is in progress and the management display will be displayed. Security can be improved by preventing the display from starting.

Moreover, the first operating means may be a means provided at a position that can be operated only when the door body is in the open state.

With such a configuration, only the administrator of the gaming parlor can operate the first operating means, and therefore, fraudulent acts and the like can be reliably prevented.

<Error notification display example 2>
Next, a second error notification display example will be described using FIG. 15(B). Figure 15(B)
2 is a diagram showing the flow of error notification display example 2 in chronological order.

The states shown in FIG. 15(B)(1) to FIG. 15(B)(2) are as shown in FIG. 15(A)(1) to FIG.
) (2) is the same state as the error detection state explained using (2), and the reel operating state is in operation (
This is a state in which an error occurs in the state (error non-detection state), and the state becomes an error detection state. In order to avoid redundant explanation, detailed explanation of the same state will be omitted.

<Error notification display example 2/Reel operating status: Operating → Stopped>
The state shown in FIG. 15(B)(3) is different from the reel operating state shown in FIG. 15(B)(2) when the reel is in operation (
In the error detection state), the third stop operation (stop operation) is performed by the manager of the game parlor, and the reels 110 to 112 are in a stopped state.

In the same state, the re-gaming combination (replay) has been internally won and the third stop operation (stop operation) has been performed.
The symbol combination corresponding to (in this example, the symbol combination "Replay-Replay-Replay") is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 15(B)(3), the display means (liquid crystal display device 157)
In the display area of , a winning notification display ND indicating that a replay winning combination has been won.
2 (in this example, an image of a replay symbol and a character string "GET!!") are displayed.

In addition, the light emitters (various lamps 420, etc.) emit light in a replay lighting mode that suggests that a replay winning combination (replay) has been won, and the sound output means (speakers 272, 277) outputs light to indicate that a replay winning combination (replay) has been won. Outputs a replay sound effect that suggests a prize has been won.

<Error notification display example 2/Error notification display>
The state shown in FIG. 15(A)(4) is a state in which the display of the error notification ER is started after winning the replay combination (replay) explained using FIG. 15(A)(3).

In the slot machine 100, the front door 102 (door body) is in an open state, the opening/closing sensor (detection means) is in an open detection state (first state), the reels 110 to 112 are rotating, and When a certain error (in this example, medal insertion abnormality 1 (medal selector error)) is detected, the plurality of reels 110 to 112 are switched to the second stop mode (main stop mode) by the stop buttons 137 to 139 (stop buttons). In the example, when the game is stopped at a symbol combination corresponding to a replay combination (replay), it is configured to start displaying an error notification ER (error display).
More specifically, when the main control unit 300 detects each error in step S701 of the other device monitoring process described using FIG.
In S703, the error notification period (in this example, the reel 110 is not changing settings,
- 112 are not in rotation) and if it is determined that each error notification is not in progress, error notification is started in the subsequent step S704.

The state shown in FIG. 15(B)(4) is a replay state due to replay, but it is also an error notification possible period, so the main control unit 300 executes error notification start processing. In this error notification start process, an error code is displayed on the payout number display 127, and an error command corresponding to the detected error is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400.
When receiving this error command from the main control unit 300, executes processing to start error notification.

As a result, as shown in FIG. 15(A)(4), the display area of the display means (liquid crystal display device 157) displays an error notification ER (in this example, a character string "Selector error has occurred!!"). and the text string "Please call the game store clerk." is displayed. In addition, in the same state, the light emitters (various lamps 420, etc.) emit light in an error light emission mode, and the sound output means (speakers 272, 277) output an error sound (for example, "An error has occurred. Please call the game store clerk. ”) is output.

According to this example, in the first state, the state where the reels are rotating, and the state where a certain operation is being performed, the stop button causes the plurality of reels to change to the second stop state (in this example, replay). If the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination (replay) is stopped, the management display will not start displaying, but the system is configured to start displaying an error, so if the game is stopped during play (for example, when the reels are spinning or the medals are Even if an error occurs in the bet state), the error notification will not start and if the game is stopped, the error notification will be started immediately regardless of how the reels are stopped, thereby improving security. can.

<Display example 1 of management screen and error notification>
Next, display example 1 of the management screen and error notification will be described using FIG. 16(A).
FIG. 16A is a diagram showing the flow of display example 1 of the management screen and error notification in chronological order.

<Display example 1 of management screen and error notification/Reel operating status: In operation (error detection status)>
The state shown in FIG. 16A (1) is when the reel operation state is in operation, the front door 102 is in the door open state, the opening/closing sensor is in the open detection state, and the error detection state, and the setting key SW is pressed by the administrator of the game parlor. An operation (certain operation) is performed to turn on the setting key SW from OFF to ON, and the setting key SW is in the ON state.

In the slot machine 100, the front door 102 (door body) is in an open state, the opening/closing sensor (detection means) is in an open detection state (first state), and the reels 110 to 112 are rotating. , even if an operation (certain operation) is performed to turn the setting key SW from OFF to ON, the state does not change to a state where the setting values can be confirmed (setting confirmation mode), and the management screen (management display) does not change. Configured not to start displaying.

More specifically, in steps S602 to S603 of the setting value confirmation process explained using FIG. The state where the number of medals (in this example, 3 medals) has been bet, or the replay state due to replay), the open/close sensor is not in the closed detection state, and the reel 110
112 is not rotating or notifying an error), and if it is determined that the setting key SW is ON, in the following step S604, the setting value display device 101
Display the current setting value using a.

In the state shown in FIG. 16(A)(1), one of the reels 110 to 112 is rotating,
Since it is not the valid period for setting value confirmation, the setting value confirmation process is ended and the process proceeds to the subsequent step S604.
Since this process is not executed, the setting value is not displayed on the setting value display device 101a. In addition, since the process in step S605 is not executed, a setting confirmation start command indicating that setting confirmation is to be started is not sent to the first sub-control unit 400, so that the display as shown in FIG. 16(A)(1) is In the display area of the means (liquid crystal display device 157), the display of the management screen SD is not started, and the performance during the game is continued.

Further, in the slot machine 100, the front door 102 (door body) is in an open state, the opening/closing sensor (detection means) is in an open detection state (first state), and the reels 110 to 112 are rotating. In this state, even if a certain error (in this example, medal insertion abnormality 1 (medal selector error)) is detected, the display of the error notification ER (error display) is not started.

More specifically, when the main control unit 300 detects each error in step S701 of the other device monitoring process described using FIG.
In S703, the error notification period (in this example, the reel 110 is not changing settings,
- 112 is not in rotation) and if it is determined that each error notification is not in progress, an error notification start process is executed in the subsequent step S704.

The state shown in FIG. 16(A)(1) is a state in which the reel operating state is in operation (reels 110 to 1
Since at least one of the devices 12 is rotating) and it is not the error notification period, other device monitoring processing is ended and the in-game performance is continued without starting error notification.

<Display example 1 of management screen and error notification/Reel operation status: Operating → Stopped>
The state shown in FIG. 16(A)(2) is during the reel operation state shown in FIG. 16(A)(1).
In the error detection state), the third stop operation (stop operation) is performed by the manager of the game parlor, and the reels 110 to 112 are in a stopped state.

In the same state, the small winning combination (Bell) was internally won and the third stop operation (stop operation) was performed. In addition to displaying the combination (in this example, the symbol combination "Bell-Bell-Bell"),
) As shown in (2), in the display area of the display means (liquid crystal display device 157), a winning notification display ND1 (in this example, an image of a bell symbol and an image of " G
ET! ! ”) is displayed.

<Display example 1 of management screen and error notification/Error notification display>
The state shown in FIG. 16(A)(3) is a state in which the display of the error notification ER is started after winning the small winning combination (bell) described using FIG. 16(A)(2).

In the slot machine 100, when the front door 102 (door body) is in the open state and the detection state of the opening/closing sensor (detection means) is the open detection state (first state), the operation of turning the setting key SW from OFF to ON (or (a state in which an operation is being performed), and a certain error (in this example, a medal insertion error 1)
(medal selector error)) is detected (second state), when multiple reels 110 to 112 are stopped by the stop buttons 137 to 139 (stop buttons), the management screen SD (management display ) does not start to be displayed, but the error notification ER (error display)
is configured to start displaying.

More specifically, when the main control unit 300 detects each error in step S701 of the other device monitoring process described using FIG.
In S703, the error notification period (in this example, the reel 110 is not changing settings,
- 112 are not in rotation) and if it is determined that each error notification is not in progress, error notification is started in the subsequent step S704.

Since the state shown in FIG. 16(A)(3) is an error notification possible period, the main control unit 30
0 executes error notification start processing. In this error notification start process, the payout number display 1
27, and sends an error command corresponding to the detected error to the first sub-control unit 400, and the first sub-control unit 400 sends this error command to the main control unit 30.
If received from 0, execute processing to start error notification.

As a result, as shown in FIG. 16(A)(3), the display area of the display means (liquid crystal display device 157) displays an error notification ER (in this example, a character string "Selector error has occurred!!"). and the text string "Please call the game store clerk." is displayed. In addition, in the same state, the light emitters (various lamps 420, etc.) emit light in an error light emission mode, and the sound output means (speakers 272, 277) output an error sound (for example, "An error has occurred. Please call the game store clerk. ”) is output.

<Display example 1 of management screen and error notification/error detection status → error non-detection status>
The state shown in FIG. 16A (4) is a state in which the error detection state shown in FIG. 16A (3) has changed to the error non-detection state.

In this state, after the medal insertion abnormality 1 (medal selector error) has been resolved and the error detection state has changed to an error non-detection state, an error cancellation operation using the reset SW has been performed.

In the same state, since the front door 102 is open, the light emitting body (various lamps 420, etc.)
emits light in an open light emission mode and outputs an open sound from the sound output means (speakers 272, 277), and since the error detection state has changed to an error non-detection state, the display of the preparation screen is started.

More specifically, after determining that the error notification end condition is satisfied in step S706 of the other device monitoring process described using FIG. 11, the main control unit 300 determines that the setting key SW is turned ON in step S708. If it is determined that there is a preparation screen, a preparation screen display command is sent to the first sub-control unit 400 instructing to start displaying the preparation screen in step S709. When the first sub-control unit 400 receives this preparation screen display command from the main control unit 300, the first sub-control unit 400 displays the preparation screen until the management screen can be displayed, or is capable of displaying the management screen. However, the process of displaying the preparation screen for a predetermined period of time is executed.

As a result, as shown in FIG. 16(A)(4), in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157,
After the error notification ER is finished, a preparation screen (in this example, display of a character string "Preparing for management display") indicating that the management display SD is being prepared for display starts to be displayed. Note that the screen before the management screen SD is displayed is not limited to this example, and may be the same screen as a part of the in-game effect, or the same screen as a part of the in-stop effect, for example. Good too.

<Display example 1 of management screen and error notification/Display of management screen>
The state shown in FIG. 16(A)(5) is a state in which the error cancellation operation is performed by the reset SW after the error non-detection state shown in FIG. 16(A)(4), and the display of the management screen has started. .

In the slot machine 100, when the front door 102 (door body) is in the open state and the detection state of the opening/closing sensor (detection means) is the open detection state (first state), the operation of turning the setting key SW from OFF to ON (or (a state in which an operation is being performed), and a certain error (in this example, a medal insertion error 1)
(medal selector error)) is detected (second state), multiple reels are stopped by the stop buttons 137 to 139 (stop buttons), and the error notification ER (
The reset switch (second operating means) is operated after a certain error (in this example, medal insertion abnormality 1 (medal selector error)) has not been detected. When this occurs, the display of the error notification ER (error display) and the preparation screen is terminated, and the display of the management screen SD (management display) is started.

More specifically, in steps S602 to S603 of the setting value confirmation process explained using FIG. The state where the number of medals (in this example, 3 medals) has been bet, or the replay state due to replay), the open/close sensor is not in the closed detection state, and the reel 110
112 is not rotating or notifying an error), and if it is determined that the setting key SW is ON, in the following step S604, the setting value display device 101
Display the current setting value using a.

In this example, since it is the set value confirmation valid period and the setting key SW is ON, a number indicating the current set value is displayed on the set value display device 101a.

Subsequently, in step S605 of the setting value confirmation process, the main control unit 300 transmits a setting confirmation start command indicating to start setting confirmation to the first sub-control unit 400, and the first sub-control unit 400 When a setting confirmation start command is received from the main control unit 300, a process to start displaying the management screen is executed. As a result, as shown in FIG. 16A (5), the management screen SD is displayed in the display area of the display means (liquid crystal display device 157).

As shown in FIG. 16(A) (4'), even if the error detection state changes to the error non-detection state, if the detection state of the opening/closing sensor (detection means) is the closing detection state, the reset is not performed. The configuration may be such that the error cannot be canceled even if an operation (error cancellation operation) is performed using the SW (second operating means), and the error notification ER continues.

Furthermore, if the management screen SD is displayed while the number of coins to be paid out is displayed, the display of the number of coins to be paid out may be ended. Further, even if a certain error occurs while displaying the management screen SD, the configuration may be such that an error notification to notify the occurrence of the certain error is not performed.

As explained above, the game machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 1 shown in FIG.
00, Pachinko machine) includes a display means (e.g., liquid crystal display device 157 shown in FIG. 1), a door body (e.g., front door 102 shown in FIG. 1) that is provided at the front of the gaming machine and can be opened and closed, and the A detection means capable of detecting the open/closed state of the door body (for example, the open/close sensor shown in FIG. 1), and a first operation means (for example, , setting key SW), a plurality of reels (for example, reels 110 to 112 shown in FIG. 1) that are rotatably driven and decorated with a plurality of types of symbols, and a plurality of reels provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels; A plurality of stop buttons (for example, stop buttons 137 to 137) for individually stopping the rotation of the reels
139), wherein the detection means is means capable of changing the detection state to a closed detection state when the door body is in the closed state, and the detection means is a means that can change the detection state to a closed detection state when the door body is in the closed state. means capable of changing the detection state to an open detection state when the body is in an open state, the display means being a means capable of displaying a management display for an administrator, and the detection state of the detection means is configured to be able to start displaying the management display when the certain operation is performed in the open detection state (hereinafter referred to as the "first state"); Even if the certain operation is performed while the reels are rotating, the display of the management display is not started, and when the reels are stopped, if a certain error occurs (for example,
When a medal insertion abnormality 1 (medal selector error) is detected, an error display related to the certain error can be started to be displayed, and the reel is in the first state and the reel is rotating. The reel is configured not to start displaying the error display even if the certain error is detected, and the first state, the state where the reels are rotating, and the certain operation is not performed. When the plurality of reels are stopped by the stop button in the state where the error is detected and the state where the certain error is detected (hereinafter referred to as the "second state"), the display of the management display is started. However, the above error display (for example, Fig. 16(A) (3)
This game machine is configured to start the error notification ER shown in ).

According to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, security can be improved by displaying an error display with priority over a management display when the reels are stopped.

Furthermore, it is provided with a second operation means (for example, a reset SW), and in the second state, the plurality of reels are stopped by the stop button, the display of the error display is started, and the certain error is detected. If an operation is performed using the second operation means after the state is reached, the display of the error display is terminated and the management display (for example, the administrator screen shown in FIG. 16A) (5) is displayed. SD) may be configured to start displaying.

With such a configuration, by clearing the error and displaying the management display after the error display ends, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that is easy for gaming store staff to use.

Further, when an operation is performed by the second operating means to end displaying the error display and start displaying the management display, a certain display ( For example, it may be configured to start displaying the preparation screen shown in FIG. 16(A)(4).

With such a configuration, it is possible to visually confirm that the second operation means has been accepted, and it is possible to improve convenience for the manager of the game parlor.

Moreover, the first operating means may be a means provided at a position that can be operated only when the door body is in the open state.

With such a configuration, only the administrator of the gaming parlor can operate the first operating means, and therefore, fraudulent acts and the like can be reliably prevented.

Moreover, the second operating means may be a means provided at a position that can be operated only when the door body is in the open state.

With such a configuration, only the administrator of the gaming parlor can operate the second operating means, and therefore, fraudulent acts and the like can be reliably prevented.

<Display example 2 of management screen and error notification>
Next, a second display example of the management screen and error notification will be described using FIG. 16(B).
FIG. 16(B) is a diagram showing the flow of display example 2 of the management screen and error notification in chronological order.

<Display example 2 of management screen and error notification/Turn on setting key SW with power OFF>
In the state shown in FIG. 16(B)(1), when the power is off, the front door 102 is in the open state, the opening/closing sensor is in the open detection state, and the error detection state, the setting key SW is pressed by the game parlor manager. An operation (certain operation) to turn on from OFF has been performed, and the setting key SW is in the ON state.

In this state, an error detection state is detected, but since the power supply state is OFF, the light emitters (various lamps 420, etc.) are turned off, and the sound output from the sound output means (speakers 272, 277) is not output. , the display means (liquid crystal display device 157) is not displayed.

<Display example 2 of management screen and error notification/Start of setting change mode, display of management screen>
The state shown in FIG. 16(B)(2) is the setting key SW explained using FIG. 16(B)(1).
In this state, the power switch is operated by the manager of the game parlor while the power switch is on, and the power state changes from power off to power on.

The slot machine 100 is configured so that when the power is turned on while the setting key SW is turned from OFF to ON, the slot machine 100 enters a state in which setting values can be changed (setting change mode). In this state, the setting value is changed to a state (setting change mode) in which the setting value can be changed, and a setting change sound is output from the sound output means (speakers 272, 277).

Furthermore, in the state shown in FIG. 16(B)(2), since the front door 102 is open,
A light emitting body (such as various lamps 420) emits light in an open light emission mode.

Further, in the slot machine 100, the front door 102 (door body) is in an open state, the opening/closing sensor (detection means) is in an open detection state (first state), and the setting key SW is turned from OFF to OFF.
In a state (second state) where an operation (a certain operation) to turn the power to N is being performed and a certain error (in this example, medal insertion error 1 (medal selector error)) is detected When turned on, the display of the error notification ER (error display) is not started, but the display of the management screen (management display) is started.

More specifically, the main control unit 300 performs step S of the initial setting process described using FIG.
In steps 203 to S204, when it is determined that the front door 102 is in the open state and the setting key SW is ON, the setting change process explained using FIG. 7 is started.
Since it is in the open state and the setting key SW is ON, the setting change process is started.

Subsequently, in step S302 of this setting change process, the main control unit 300 transmits a setting change start command indicating to start changing settings to the first sub-control unit 400, and the first sub-control unit 400 When a setting change start command is received from the main control unit 300, a process to start displaying the management screen is executed. Thereby, as shown in FIG. 16(B)(2), the management screen SD is displayed in the display area of the display means (liquid crystal display device 157).

Next, in step S304 of the setting change process, the main control unit 300 displays the current setting value using the setting value display device 101a.

<Display example 2 of management screen and error notification/confirmation of setting values>
The state shown in FIG. 16(B)(3) is a state in which the start lever 135 is operated by the manager of the game parlor in the setting change mode.

The main control unit 300 controls the start lever 135 in step S307 of the setting change process.
If it is determined that the operation has been performed, in the following steps S308 to S309,
The setting value displayed on the setting value display device 101a is stored (determined) as a new setting value, the display on the setting value display device 101a is erased, and the setting value is hidden.

<Display example 2 of management screen and error notification/Error notification display>
The state shown in FIG. 16(B)(4) is a state in which the display of the error notification ER is started after the setting values shown in FIG. 16(B)(3) are determined.

In the slot machine 100, when the front door 102 (door body) is in the open state and the detection state of the opening/closing sensor (detection means) is the open detection state (first state), the operation of turning the setting key SW from OFF to ON (or A certain error (in this example, a medal insertion error 1) is being performed.
(medal selector error)) is detected (second state), after the start lever 135 is operated, the operation (certain operation) of turning the setting key SW from OFF to ON is canceled. Then, the display of the management screen (management display) is ended and the display of the error notification ER (error display) is started.

More specifically, when the main control unit 300 detects each error in step S701 of the other device monitoring process described using FIG.
In S703, the error notification period (in this example, the reel 110 is not changing settings,
- 112 are not in rotation) and if it is determined that each error notification is not in progress, error notification is started in the subsequent step S704.

Since the state shown in FIG. 16(B)(4) is an error notification possible period, the main control unit 30
0 executes error notification start processing. In this error notification start process, the payout number display 1
27, and sends an error command corresponding to the detected error to the first sub-control unit 400, and the first sub-control unit 400 sends this error command to the main control unit 30.
If received from 0, execute processing to start error notification.

As a result, as shown in FIG. 16(B)(4), the display area of the display means (liquid crystal display device 157) displays an error notification ER (in this example, a character string "Selector error has occurred!!"). and the text string "Please call the game store clerk." is displayed. In addition, in the same state, the light emitters (various lamps 420, etc.) emit light in an error light emission mode, and the sound output means (speakers 272, 277) output an error sound (for example, "An error has occurred. Please call the game store clerk. ”) is output.

As explained above, the game machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 1 shown in FIG.
00, Pachinko machine) includes a display means (e.g., liquid crystal display device 157 shown in FIG. 1), a door body (e.g., front door 102 shown in FIG. 1) that is provided at the front of the gaming machine and can be opened and closed, and the A detection means capable of detecting the open/closed state of the door body (for example, the open/close sensor shown in FIG. 1), and a first operation means (for example, , setting key SW), a plurality of reels (for example, reels 110 to 112 shown in FIG. 1) that are rotatably driven and decorated with a plurality of types of symbols, and a plurality of reels provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels; A plurality of stop buttons (for example, stop buttons 137 to 137) for individually stopping the rotation of the reels
139), wherein the detection means is means capable of changing the detection state to a closed detection state when the door body is in the closed state, and the detection means is a means that can change the detection state to a closed detection state when the door body is in the closed state. means capable of changing the detection state to an open detection state when the body is in an open state, the display means being a means capable of displaying a management display for an administrator, and the detection state of the detection means is configured to be able to start displaying the management display when the certain operation is performed in the open detection state (hereinafter referred to as the "first state"), and when a certain error (for example, medal Loading error 1 (
When a medal selector error)) is detected, the system is configured to start displaying an error display related to the certain error, and displays the first state, the state where the certain operation is being performed, and the certain operation. When the power is turned on in a state where an error is detected (hereinafter referred to as the "second state"), the error display does not start to be displayed, but the management display (for example, FIG. 16 (
B) The game machine is configured to start displaying the administrator screen SD shown in (2).

According to the game machine according to the present embodiment, by giving priority to displaying the management display over the error display when the power is turned on, it is possible to provide a game machine that is easy to use for the manager of the game parlor. .

Furthermore, it is provided with a start lever (for example, the start lever 135), and when the certain operation is canceled after the start lever is operated in the second state, the display of the management display is terminated, It may be configured to start displaying the error display (for example, error notification ER shown in FIG. 16(B)(4)).

With this configuration, after the start lever is operated, the management screen can be closed and an error display can be started, so that it is possible to reliably notify the occurrence of an error.

Further, a second operating means (for example, a reset SW) is provided, so that when the detection state of the detection means is the closed detection state, the error cannot be canceled even if an operation by the second operating means is performed. It may be configured.

With such a configuration, fraudulent acts such as forcibly canceling an error state can be prevented, and security can be improved.

Moreover, the first operating means may be a means provided at a position that can be operated only when the door body is in the open state.

With such a configuration, only the administrator of the gaming parlor can operate the first operating means, and therefore, fraudulent acts and the like can be reliably prevented.

Moreover, the second operating means may be a means provided at a position that can be operated only when the door body is in the open state.

With such a configuration, only the administrator of the gaming parlor can operate the second operating means, and therefore, fraudulent acts and the like can be reliably prevented.

<Display setting history>
Next, display of setting history will be explained using FIG. 17(A). FIG. 17A is a diagram showing the flow of displaying the setting history in chronological order.

The states shown in FIG. 17(A)(1) to FIG. 17(A)(2) are the same as those shown in FIG. 12(A)(1) to FIG.
) This is the same state as the setting change mode explained using (2), and the power is turned on when the setting key SW is turned from OFF to ON, and the setting value can be changed (setting change mode). mode). In order to avoid redundant explanation, detailed explanation of the same state will be omitted.

<Specific operations in settings history display/settings change mode>
The state shown in FIG. 17A (3) is a state in which a specific operation has been performed in the setting change mode and the display of the setting history has started.

The display means (in this example, the liquid crystal display device 157) of the slot machine 100 displays the first event (
In this example, it is possible to display a history display (in this example, setting history SH) that shows the history of occurrences (determination of setting values due to setting changes), and in a certain state (in this example, setting change mode). When the first event (determining the set value due to a setting change) occurs, in a certain state (setting change mode) in which the first event (determining the set value due to the setting change) occurs, It is possible to display a history display (setting history SH) regarding the first event (decision of setting value due to setting change).

In this example, when the setting history item is selected from the menu display on the management screen SD by a specific operation (operation using the cross button 193), the settings shown in FIG. 17(A)(3) are changed. Display history SH.

The display format of the setting history SH is not particularly limited, but in this example, the date and time when the setting change (or setting confirmation) was made, the setting value set (or confirmed) by the setting change (or setting confirmation), and the details of the operation. (Setting change or setting confirmation) can be displayed in chronological order, for example, "(N
o1) Setting change/confirmation date and time: 〇 year 〇 month 〇 day 〇 hour 〇 minute 〇 seconds, setting value: 6, operation: change, (N
o2) Setting change/confirmation date and time: 〇 year 〇 month 〇 day 〇 hour 〇 minute 〇 seconds, setting value: 6, operation: confirmation] Items related to setting changes and confirmations made in the past are listed in chronological order. (Display in order of newest (or oldest) date and time).

According to this example, since the manager of the gaming parlor can easily check the setting values set in the past, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that is easy to use for the management of the gaming parlor. Further, even if the information is displayed to the player due to fraudulent operation, the history display is not related to the current event, but is related to events that have occurred in the past, so it is unlikely to be used for fraudulent activities.

<Displaying setting history/confirming setting values in setting change mode>
The state shown in FIG. 17A (4) is a state in which the start lever 135 is operated by the manager of the game parlor in the setting change mode.

The main control unit 300 controls the start lever 135 in step S307 of the setting change process.
If it is determined that the operation has been performed, in the following steps S308 to S309,
The setting value displayed on the setting value display device 101a is stored (confirmed) as a new setting value (setting 5 in this case), and the display on the setting value display device 101a is erased to hide the setting value. Make it.

Furthermore, when the first event (fixing of the setting value due to a setting change) occurs in a certain state (setting change mode in this example), the slot machine 100 is configured to In a certain state (setting change mode) in which a setting change (confirmation) has occurred, the history display (setting history SH) regarding the first event (confirmation of setting value due to setting change) that has occurred this time cannot be displayed.

According to this example, since the history of the setting value due to the current setting change (history display regarding the first event that occurred this time) is not displayed, for example, if the player performs an unauthorized setting change operation, the setting value will be changed. Security can be improved by not being able to easily check whether or not the process was executed correctly.

In the state shown in FIG. 17(A)(4), the setting key is kept ON, so the setting history S
H continues to be displayed, but in the setting change mode, the setting history corresponding to the setting value set this time (in this example, the date and time when the setting change was made, the setting value set by the setting change, the details of the operation (setting changes)) are not displayed.

Furthermore, when the first event (fixing of the setting value due to a setting change) occurs in a certain state (setting change mode in this example), the slot machine 100 is configured to In a certain state (setting change mode) in which a setting change (confirmation) has occurred, it is possible to erase at least a part of the history display (setting history SH) regarding the first event that occurred in the past (fixation of a setting value due to a setting change). On the other hand, the history display (setting history SH) regarding the first event that occurred this time (determination of setting value due to setting change) cannot be deleted.

Specifically, by operating the cross button 193, "
When the user selects and presses the "History Delete" button, at least a portion of the past setting history SH (in this example, only the currently displayed setting history SH) is deleted.

According to this example, the history related to the first event that occurred this time (the history of the setting values due to the current settings change) cannot be cleared (deleted), so if the settings are changed illegally, the evidence of fraud will be destroyed. It is difficult to achieve this, and security can be improved. In addition, if you want to clear the history of the first event that occurred this time (the history of the setting values due to the current setting change), it is necessary to transition to a certain state again, which is a high risk for fraudsters. It is possible to prevent fraudulent acts.

<Displaying the settings history/exiting the settings change mode>
The state shown in FIG. 17A (5) is a state in which the setting key SW is turned OFF as a result of the operation of turning the setting key SW from ON to OFF by the administrator of the gaming parlor in the setting change mode.

In step S310 of the setting change process, the main control unit 300 turns off the setting key SW.
If it is determined that
When the first sub-control unit 400 receives this setting change end command from the main control unit 300, the first sub-control unit 400 executes a process of terminating the display of the management screen.

As a result, as shown in FIG. 17(A)(5), the setting history SH of the management screen SD displayed in the display area of the display means (liquid crystal display device 157) is erased, and the normal performance is started. . In this example, since the reels 110 to 112 are stopped, a performance to be executed while the reels 110 to 112 are stopped is started as a normal performance.

<Display settings history/start settings confirmation mode>
In the state shown in FIG. 17(A)(6), when the front door 102 shown in FIG. 17(A)(5) is in the open state and the opening/closing sensor is in the open detection state, the setting key SW is pressed by the manager of the game parlor. OFF
An operation (a certain operation) to turn the setting key SW on is performed, and the setting key SW is turned on.

When the slot machine 100 is powered on, turn the setting key SW from OFF to ON.
The configuration is such that when an operation is performed, the setting changes to a state in which the settings can be confirmed (settings confirmation mode). Transition.

Further, in the slot machine 100, when the front door 102 (door body) is in the open state and the detection state of the opening/closing sensor (detection means) is in the open detection state (first state), the setting key SW is turned OFF.
When an operation (certain operation) is performed to turn it on from In this example, since the setting history item was selected on the most recent management screen SD, in the setting confirmation mode, as shown in FIG. 17(A)(6), First, the setting history SH is displayed.

In this example, since the setting value was changed to setting 5 in the most recent setting change mode (FIG. 17 (A) (4)), in the setting history SH, the first event that occurred in the past (setting value change )
As a history display corresponding to "(No. 3) Setting change/confirmation date and time:
seconds, setting value: 5, operation: change" and a history display corresponding to the confirmation of the setting value in the current setting confirmation mode, "(No. 4) Setting change/confirmation date and time: 〇 year. A history display is additionally displayed that reads 〇Month〇Day〇Hour〇Minute〇Second, Setting value: 5, Operation: Confirm.''

According to this example, since the manager of the gaming parlor can easily check the setting values set in the past, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that is easy to use for the management of the gaming parlor.

<Display error history>
Next, displaying the error history will be described using FIG. 17(B). FIG. 17(B) is
FIG. 3 is a diagram showing the flow of error history display in chronological order.

<Display error history/start setting confirmation mode>
In the state shown in FIG. 17(B)(1), the setting key SW is turned from OFF to ON by the manager of the game parlor when the power is on, the front door 102 is in the open state, and the opening/closing sensor is in the open detection state. This is a state in which an operation (a certain operation) has been performed and the setting key SW has been turned on.

When the slot machine 100 is powered on, turn the setting key SW from OFF to ON.
The configuration is such that when an operation is performed, the setting changes to a state in which the settings can be confirmed (settings confirmation mode). Transition.

Further, in the slot machine 100, when the front door 102 (door body) is in the open state and the detection state of the opening/closing sensor (detection means) is in the open detection state (first state), the setting key SW is turned OFF.
When an operation (certain operation) is performed to turn it on from , the display of the management screen SD (management display) can be started, so as shown in FIG. 17(B)(1), A management screen SD is displayed in the display area of the display means (liquid crystal display device 157).

<Specific operations in error history display/setting confirmation mode>
The state shown in FIG. 17B (2) is a state in which a specific operation has been performed in the setting confirmation mode and the display of the error history has started.

The display means (liquid crystal display device 157) of the slot machine 100 displays the second event (in this example,
It is possible to display a history display (in this example, error history EH) that shows the history of occurrences of door openings and door closings. In a certain state (setting confirmation mode) in which the first event (door opening or door closing) has occurred, the first event (door opening or door closing) that has occurred this time or in the past It is possible to display a history display (error history EH) regarding door closing).

More specifically, when the main control unit 300 detects a signal indicating the open detection state in step S502 of the device monitoring process described using FIG. 9, it detects that the front door 102 has been opened. The opening detection information shown is stored in the RAM 308, and the front door 10
A door open detection command indicating that the opening of the door No. 2 has been detected is sent to the first sub-control unit 400, and the
When the sub-control unit 400 receives this door open detection command from the main control unit 300, the sub-control unit 400 generates open detection information indicating that the front door 102 has been opened (in this example, information indicating “open”), and
The date and time of opening) are stored in the RAM 408 in chronological order as historical information, and a door opening notification is performed.

On the other hand, when the main control unit 300 detects a signal indicating the open detection state in step S502 of the device monitoring process, it stores in the RAM 308 closure detection information indicating that the front door 102 has been closed. When a door closing detection command indicating that the closing of the front door 102 has been detected is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and the first sub-control unit 400 receives this door closing detection command from the main control unit 300, Closure detection information indicating that the front door 102 has been closed (in this example, information indicating "closed" and the date and time of closure) is stored in the RAM 408 in chronological order as history information.

In this example, when the error history item is selected from the menu display on the management screen SD by a specific operation (operation using the cross button 193), the release detection information (information indicating "open" and the release date and time) and closure detection information (information indicating "closed" and date and time of closure) are acquired from the RAM 408, and as shown in FIG.
57) displays the current and past error history EH.

The display format of the error history EH is not particularly limited, but in this example, it is possible to display the error occurrence date and time and the details of the error that occurred in chronological order. For example, "(No. 1) Error occurrence date and time: 〇hours〇minutes〇seconds, error occurred: selector error, (No. 2) error occurrence date and time: 〇month〇day, 〇hours〇minutes〇seconds, error occurred: door opened, (No.3) error occurrence date and time:〇year〇month 〇day〇hour〇minute〇second, error occurred: door closed, (No. 4) error occurrence date and time: 〇year〇month〇〇hour〇minute〇second, error occurred: door opened, this time and in the past. Displays items related to errors in chronological order (in order of newest (or oldest)).

<Display error history/Front door: Door open state → Door closed state>
In the state shown in FIG. 17(B)(3), the front door 102 is closed in the door open state shown in FIG. 17(B)(2), and the front door 102 changes from the door open state to the door closed state. This is the state that has become.

In the slot machine 100, even if the detection state of the open/close sensor (detection means) changes from the open detection state to the closed detection state while the error history EH (management display) is displayed, the error history EH (management display) is displayed. In this example, since the setting value is being confirmed and the setting key SW is ON, the error history EH is continued to be displayed. In addition, in the same state, a light emitting body (such as various lamps 420) that was emitting light in an open mode
is turned off, and the output sound of the sound output means (speakers 272, 277) that was outputting the open sound is set to non-output.

In addition, since the front door 102 changed from the door body open state to the door body closed state, the error history E
H, as a history display corresponding to the first event (door opening error) that occurred this time, "(No. 5
) Error occurrence date and time: 〇 year 〇 month 〇 day 〇 hour 〇 minute 〇 seconds (date and time when closing of front door 102 was detected),
An additional history display of "Error occurred: Door closed" is displayed.

According to this example, since the history of opening and closing of the door body can be displayed, it is possible to check whether there has been any fraudulent activity and the past work status, etc., which increases the convenience of the manager of the game parlor. Can be done.

<Displaying error history/exiting setting confirmation mode>
The state shown in FIG. 17B (4) is a state in which the setting key SW is turned OFF as a result of the operation of turning the setting key SW from ON to OFF by the administrator of the game parlor in the setting confirmation mode.

In step S606 of the setting value confirmation process, the main control unit 300 determines that the setting key SW is OFF.
If it is determined to be F, a setting confirmation end command indicating to end the setting confirmation is sent to the first sub-control unit 400, and the first sub-control unit 400 transmits this setting confirmation end command to the main control unit. When received from 300, processing for terminating the display of the management screen is executed.

As a result, as shown in FIG. 17(B)(4), the error history EH displayed in the display area of the display means (liquid crystal display device 157) is erased, and the normal performance is started. In addition, in this example, since reels 110 to 112 are stopped, reels 110 to 1
12 is stopped.

As explained above, the game machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 1 shown in FIG.
00, Pachinko machine) is a game machine equipped with a display means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 157 shown in FIG. 1), and the display means is configured to display a first event (for example, confirmation of a set value due to a setting change). History display showing the history of occurrences (for example, setting history SH shown in FIG. 17(A) (3))
The display means can display a history display (for example, an error history EH shown in FIG. 17B (2) ), and when the second event occurs in a certain state, in the certain state in which the second event occurred, the history display regarding the second event that occurred this time can be displayed. If the first event occurs in the certain state, the history display regarding the first event that occurred this time is not displayed in the certain state in which the first event occurred. This game machine is characterized by the fact that it is impossible.

According to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, since the history display regarding the first event that occurred this time (the history of the setting value due to the current setting change) is not displayed, for example, if the player performs an unauthorized setting change operation. In some cases, security can be improved by not being able to easily check whether the settings have been changed correctly.

Further, when the second event occurs in the certain state, the history display regarding the second event that occurred in the past can be displayed in the certain state in which the second event occurred. and when the first event occurs in the certain state, the history display regarding the first event that occurred in the past can be displayed in the certain state in which the first event occurred. There may be.

With such a configuration, the manager of the game parlor can easily check the setting values set in the past, so it is possible to provide a game machine that is easy to use for the management of the game parlor. Further, even if the information is displayed to the player due to fraudulent operation, it is unlikely to be used for fraudulent activities because it is a history display of events that occurred in the past.

Further, when the first event occurs in the certain state, in the certain state in which the first event occurred, at least a part of the history regarding the first event that occurred in the past is While being erasable, the history regarding the first event that occurred this time may be non-erasable.

With such a configuration, the history related to the first event that occurred this time (the history of the setting values due to the current setting change) cannot be cleared, so if the settings are changed illegally, it is necessary to try to destroy evidence of fraudulent activity. is difficult, and security can be improved. In addition, if you want to clear the history of the first event that occurred this time (the history of the setting values due to the current setting change), it is necessary to transition to a certain state again, which is a high risk for fraudsters. It is possible to prevent fraudulent acts.

Further, the apparatus may include an operating means, and the first event may be that an operation for determining a set value is performed by the operating means.

With such a configuration, even if an operation to confirm a setting value is performed, the setting value confirmed by the operation will not be displayed, so that, for example, if a player performs an unauthorized setting change operation. In addition, security can be improved by not being able to easily check whether the settings have been changed correctly.

In addition, a door body that is provided at the front of the game machine and can be opened and closed (for example, the front door 102 shown in FIG. 1)
and a detecting means (for example, an open/close sensor) capable of detecting the open/closed state of the door body, and the detecting means is configured such that when the door body is in the closed state, the detection state becomes the closed detection state. This is a possible means, and the second event may be that the detection state of the detection means becomes the closed detection state.

With this kind of configuration, it is possible to display the history of opening and closing of the door body, so it is possible to check whether there has been any fraudulent activity or the past work status, etc. can be increased.

<Volume adjustment>
Next, volume adjustment will be explained using FIG. 18.

<If the volume adjustment/management screen is not displayed>
FIG. 18(A) is a diagram showing the flow of volume adjustment in chronological order when the management screen is not displayed.

In Fig. 18 (A) (1), the power state is ON, the front door 102 is in the closed state, and the opening/closing sensor is in the closed detection state, and the stop effect is being executed and the management screen is not displayed. state.

In the same state, since the reels 110 to 112 are stopped, the light emitters (various lamps 42
0, etc.) in a stopped light emitting mode, and the sound output means (speakers 272, 277) outputs the stopped B
GM is output, and the stop effect is displayed in the display area of the display means (liquid crystal display device 157), but in this example, the stop BGM is output at a certain volume (volume 4 in this example). .

FIG. 18A (2) shows a state in which the volume increase operation is performed in a state where the volume value display VD is not displayed.

In the same state, when the volume value display VD is not displayed, a volume increase operation (in this example, the upper button of the cross button 193 or When the right button operation is received, the display of the volume value display VD indicating the current volume value (volume 4 in this example) is started, but the volume is not increased.

In addition, in this example, an increase in volume has been explained, but a decrease in volume can also be caused by the volume value display V.
In a state where D is not displayed, a volume reduction operation (in this example, an operation using the lower or left button of the cross button 193) for reducing the volume output from the sound output means (speakers 272, 277) is accepted. The current volume value (in this example, volume 4)
), the volume value display VD starts to be displayed, but the volume is configured not to decrease.

FIG. 18(A)(3) shows a state in which the volume increase operation is performed in a state where the volume value display VD shown in FIG. 18(A)(2) is displayed.

In this state, when a volume increase operation (in this example, an operation using the upper button or right button of the cross button 193) is received while the volume value display VD is displayed, the volume is increased by one level. and a volume value display V indicating the increased volume value (in this example, volume 5)
D is displayed, and the stopped BGM is output at the increased volume value (volume 5 in this example).

In this example, the increase in volume has been explained, but the decrease in volume can also be similarly performed by performing a volume reduction operation (in this example, an operation using the lower or left button of the cross button 193) while the volume value display VD is displayed. ), the volume is decreased by one step, and a volume value display VD indicating the volume value after the decrease (volume 3 in this example) is displayed, and the volume value after the decrease (in this example, volume 3) is displayed. , output BGM while stopped at volume 3).

Note that an administrator volume adjustment SW may be provided as an operating means provided at a position that can be operated only when the front door 102 (door body) is in an open state. ) In the state where the volume value display VD is displayed, when the volume increase operation or the volume decrease operation is performed using the administrator volume adjustment SW, the volume may be adjusted, and the volume value may be adjusted. A volume value display VD indicating the volume value may be displayed.

<When displaying the volume adjustment/management screen>
FIG. 18(B) is a diagram showing the flow of volume adjustment in chronological order when the management screen is displayed.

In FIG. 18(B)(1), when the power is on, the front door 102 is in the open state, and the opening/closing sensor is in the open detection state, the setting key SW is turned on and the management screen SD is displayed. It is in a state of being

In the same state, since the front door 102 is in the open state, the light emitting body (various lamps 420
etc.) in an open light emission mode, an open sound is output from the sound output means (speakers 272, 277), and a management screen SD is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157. The open sound is output at a volume (volume 4 in this example).

Note that the release sound and error sound may be output at a predetermined volume (for example, maximum volume) regardless of the set volume value.

FIG. 18B (2) shows a state in which the volume increase operation is performed in a state where the volume value display VD2 is not displayed.

In the same state, when the volume value display VD2 is not displayed, a volume increase operation (in this example, the upper button of the cross button 193 or When the right button operation is received, the display of the volume value display VD indicating the current volume value (volume 4 in this example) is started, but the volume is not increased.

In this example, an increase in volume has been explained, but a decrease in volume is also a method for reducing the volume output from the sound output means (speakers 272, 277) when the volume value display VD is not displayed. Upon reception of a volume reduction operation (in this example, an operation using the lower or left button of the cross button 193), the display of the volume value display VD indicating the current volume value (in this example, volume 4) is started. However, the configuration is such that the volume does not decrease.

FIG. 18B (3) shows a state in which the volume increase operation is performed while the volume value display VD2 shown in FIG. 18B (2) is displayed.

In the same state, while the volume value display VD2 is displayed, a volume increase operation (in this example, the upper button of the cross button 193 or However, since the management screen SD is being displayed, the volume is not increased and the current volume value (in this example, volume 4) is accepted.
The volume value display VD continues to be displayed.

In this example, an increase in volume has been explained, but a decrease in volume is also a method for decreasing the volume output from the sound output means (speakers 272, 277) in a state where the volume value display VD2 is displayed. Even if a volume reduction operation (in this example, an operation using the lower or left button of the cross button 193) is received, the volume will not be decreased and the current level will be changed because the management screen SD is being displayed. The volume value display VD indicating the volume value (volume 4 in this example) continues to be displayed.

Note that an administrator volume adjustment SW may be provided as an operating means provided at a position that can be operated only when the front door 102 (door body) is in an open state. ) In the state where the volume value display VD is displayed, when the volume increase operation or the volume decrease operation is performed using the administrator volume adjustment SW, the volume may be adjusted, and the volume value may be adjusted. A volume value display VD indicating the volume value may be displayed.

<Transition of AT system game state>
Next, the AT system game state will be explained using FIG. 19. FIG. 19 is a simple game flow showing an AT system game state.

First, the AT system gaming state is roughly divided into a low navigation state and a high navigation state. What is low navigation state?
This is a state in which the probability that operation navigation will be executed is low, and is also called a normal mode, non-advantageous section, normal section, or normal state. The high navigation state is a state in which there is a higher probability that operation navigation will be executed than in the low navigation state (a state that is more advantageous than the low navigation state (normal state) regarding operation navigation (notification of operation information)). It is also called an advantageous section or an advantageous state.

Here, the operation navigation is an effect that notifies operation information (for example, correct operation order and stop operation timing) of the stop buttons 137 to 139 (operation means) in order to obtain medals and maintain an advantageous gaming state. Yes, for example, a production that announces the correct operation order of the push order combination (for example, "
(a production that displays the characters ``left → middle → right''), etc.

If a stop operation is performed in accordance with the operation contents of the operation navigation, an advantageous result is brought to the player, so the high navigation state is a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the low navigation state. Here, advantageous specifically refers to the total number of gaming media paid out by the gaming machine compared to the total number of gaming media used by the player as the number of bets on the gaming machine when playing for a predetermined period of time. It means that the ratio, so-called payout rate (ball output rate), is advantageous. Furthermore, since it is easier to shift to the CZ state or AT state in the stock time or CZ state than in the normal stage, the stock time or CZ state can also be said to be an advantageous state compared to the normal stage.

Note that in this example, the low navigation state is a state where the probability of executing operation navigation is low, and the high navigation state is a state where the probability of executing operation navigation is higher than the low navigation state. The state where operation navigation is not executed and the high navigation state may be changed to the state where operation navigation is executed.

Each AT system game state is subdivided and managed, and this is called a performance state. In this example, the performance state in the low navigation state includes a special stage, and the performance state in the high navigation state includes stock time (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "ST"), normal stage, and CZ state (compared to the normal stage). (a state in which it is easy to transition to an AT state) and an AT state. Among these presentation states, the AT state is, in principle, a state in which the number of balls increased. Note that the performance state is not limited to this example, and for example, the high navigation state may include other performance states such as a confirmed notification state and a pullback state.

In this embodiment, when condition (A) is satisfied in a special stage in a low navigation state (normal section) (in this example, when winning a winning combination other than a losing one), the high navigation state (advantageous section) is set.
Shift to stock time. Note that after clearing the RAM when changing settings, etc., the condition (A
) may be configured to shift to stock time, or may be configured not to shift.

Stock time (first gaming state) is the right to move to CZ state (hereinafter simply "CZ")
In this state, it is possible to hold a CZ lottery in which you can obtain (in some cases) or to stock one or more CZs.

In this stock time, even if you win the CZ lottery, you will not enter the CZ state until the stock time specified number of games (first period, in this example, 50 games) has passed, and the CZ obtained in the CZ lottery will not be transferred to the CZ state. Stock (accumulate).

Then, when condition (B) is satisfied (in this example, when the stock time specified number of games (50 games in this example) has elapsed without stocking CZ), the game moves to the normal stage, When condition (C) is satisfied (in this example, when the stock time prescribed number of games (50 games in this example) has elapsed while CZ is being stocked), the state shifts to the CZ state. Note that the transition destination when condition (C) is satisfied during the stock time is not limited to the CZ state, and may be configured to transition to the CZ state after passing through the normal stage, for example.

Note that the stock time end conditions of condition (B) and condition (C) are not limited to this example, and are 50
It may be less than the game, or it may be more.

According to this example, even if you win the CZ lottery (even if a certain condition is met), you will remain in the CZ state (second gaming state) until the stock time specified number of games (first period) ends. Since no transition occurs, the game can be enjoyed for a long period of time during the stock time specified number of games (first period), and the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, when transitioning from a normal section to an advantageous section, there is no transition to the CZ state or AT state until the stock time specified number of games has elapsed.
When the player moves from the end of the T state to the next advantageous section via the normal section, it is possible to avoid a situation where too many balls are put out in a short period of time and the gambling becomes more intense than necessary.

The normal stage has various production stages, and is a state in which a CZ lottery can be performed in which the right to transition to the CZ state (CZ) can be acquired.

In this normal stage, if condition (D) is met (in this example, if CZ is won)
, immediately transition to the CZ state without stocking CZ.

The CZ state (second gaming state) is more advantageous for the player than the normal gaming state (special stage) in the low navigation state (normal section) or the normal stage in the high navigation state (advantageous section). (For example, it is easier to shift to the AT state if you win a rare combination in the CZ state than if you win a rare combination in the normal stage.) In this example, the weak CZ state (third gaming state) , strong CZ state (fourth gaming state), and AT confirmed CZ state (fourth gaming state)
There is. Note that the strong CZ state is a state in which it is easier to transition to the AT state compared to the weak CZ state, and the AT confirmed CZ state is a state that always transitions to the AT state after the CZ state ends.

In the CZ state, if condition (E) is satisfied (in this example, if the AT is not won in the CZ state and C
When the Z predetermined number of games (in this example, 9 games) have passed, the stage moves to the normal stage, and when condition (F) is satisfied (in this example, when AT is won in the CZ state and the CZ predetermined number of games ( In this example, when nine games have elapsed, the AT state is entered.

Note that the conditions for ending the CZ state in condition (E) and condition (F) are not limited to this example, and may be less than or more than 9 games, but if more than 9 games, it may be less than the stock time. Preferably number of games. Furthermore, the CZ state may be terminated by winning a specified number of specific winning combinations, or if the AT state is won, the state may be shifted to the AT state before a predetermined number of games have elapsed (CZ ).

The AT state is a state in which AT games can be played a predetermined number of times (for example, 30 games in one set), and is better than the special stage in the low navigation state (normal section) or the stock time in the high navigation state (advantageous section). This is an advantageous state for the player, and in this example, the normal AT, the AT add-on state where an AT game add-on lottery is executed, and the ED (ending) that indicates the end of the high navigation state.
There is an ED state in which a performance is executed.

In addition, in this AT state, a set continuation lottery (for example, a lottery with a winning probability of 1/4) is executed to determine whether or not to continue the AT game, and if the set continuation lottery is won, a predetermined number of times (in this example, a lottery with a winning probability of 1/4) is executed. A set of 30 AT games will be given, and the AT state will be extended.

If condition (G) is satisfied in this AT state (if the AT end condition is met (in this example, when all games are played in the AT state), or if the advantageous section end condition is met (in this example, if all games are played in the AT state) Then, if 1,500 games have passed in the advantageous section, or if 2,400 coins have been paid out in the advantageous section), the game moves to a special stage in a low navigation state (normal section).

Note that the condition for ending the advantageous period is just an example, and it may be the case that 3,000 games have elapsed, or
A case where 000 pieces are paid out is also acceptable.

In addition, in this example, the production state was set to a special stage in the low navigation state (normal section), but
Even if it is a low navigation state (normal section), the production state may be stock time or a normal stage. In other words, even in the low navigation state (normal section), the presentation state can be changed to the stock time (or /
and normal stage), the stock time (or/and normal stage) will have a period of low navigation state (normal section) and a period of high navigation state (advantageous section). Also, conversely,
The special stage may be continued even if the state shifts to a high navigation state (advantageous section).

<CZ lottery>
Next, using FIGS. 20(b) and 20(c), a description will be given of the CZ lottery executed during the stock time and the normal stage.

The CZ lottery is a lottery in which the right to transition to the CZ state (CZ) can be obtained, and in this example, a specific symbol combination (in this example, weak cherry, watermelon, chance, strong Cherry) is stopped and displayed in the symbol display window 113, C
A CZ lottery is executed using the Z determination table.

The lottery mode of the CZ lottery includes a high probability mode where the probability of winning the CZ lottery is relatively high, and a CZ lottery mode with a relatively high probability of winning the CZ lottery.
There is a low probability mode in which the probability of winning the lottery is relatively low. When moving to the normal stage or stock time, the low probability mode is set first, but if a certain winning combination (for example, a rare combination with a low winning probability) is won in each performance state, the high probability mode is set. be done.

<CZ Lottery/Normal Stage>
FIG. 20(b) is a diagram showing an example of a CZ determination table used for CZ lottery in the normal stage. For convenience of explanation, only the CZ determination table that is referred to when the setting value is Setting 1 is illustrated, but for Settings 2 to 6, it is preferable that the larger the setting value, the higher the probability of winning the CZ lottery. (The same applies to the stock time CZ judgment table).

In the normal stage (low probability mode), the symbol combination corresponding to weak cherry is symbol display window 1
13, there is a 2% chance of winning the CZ lottery (obtaining CZ), and when the symbol combination corresponding to watermelon is displayed on the symbol display window 113, there is a 1% probability of winning the CZ lottery. If you win the CZ lottery (obtain CZ) and the symbol combination corresponding to the chance is stopped and displayed in the symbol display window 113, there is a 6% probability that you will win the CZ lottery (obtain CZ) and win the strong When the symbol combination corresponding to cherry is stopped and displayed on the symbol display window 113, the player wins the CZ lottery with a probability of 27% (obtains the CZ).

In addition, in the normal stage (high probability mode), when the symbol combination corresponding to weak cherry is stopped and displayed in the symbol display window 113, there is a 13% probability of winning the CZ lottery (obtaining CZ).
, when the symbol combination corresponding to the watermelon is stopped and displayed in the symbol display window 113, there is a 7% probability that you will win the CZ lottery (CZ will be obtained), and the symbol combination corresponding to the chance will be displayed in the symbol display window 1.
13, there is a 20% probability of winning the CZ lottery (obtaining CZ), and when the symbol combination corresponding to the strong cherry is displayed in the symbol display window 113, there is a 34% probability. Win the CZ lottery (obtain CZ).

<CZ Lottery/Stock Time>
FIG. 20(c) is a diagram showing an example of a CZ determination table used for CZ lottery in stock time.

In stock time (low probability mode), when the symbol combination corresponding to weak cherry is stopped and displayed in the symbol display window 113, there is a 10% probability of winning the CZ lottery (obtaining CZ) and corresponding to watermelon. When the symbol combination is stopped and displayed in the symbol display window 113, there is a 5% probability that C
Winning the Z lottery (obtaining CZ), the symbol combination corresponding to the chance is displayed in the symbol display window 113
If the symbol combination corresponding to the strong cherry is displayed in the symbol display window 113, there is a 12% probability of winning the CZ lottery (obtaining CZ), and if the symbol combination corresponding to the strong cherry is displayed in the symbol display window 113, there is a 30% probability. C
Win the Z lottery (obtain CZ). In this example, even in the same low probability mode, it is easier to win the CZ lottery (CZ is easier to obtain) in the stock time (low probability mode) than in the normal stage (low probability mode).

In addition, in stock time (high probability mode), if the symbol combination corresponding to weak cherry is stopped and displayed in the symbol display window 113, there is a 15% probability that you will win the CZ lottery (obtain CZ) and win the watermelon. When the corresponding symbol combination is stopped and displayed in the symbol display window 113, there is a probability of 11% to win the CZ lottery (CZ is acquired), and the symbol combination corresponding to the chance is stopped and displayed in the symbol display window 113. , there is a 40% probability of winning the CZ lottery (obtaining a CZ),
100% when the symbol combination corresponding to strong cherry is stopped and displayed in the symbol display window 113.
Winning the CZ lottery (obtaining CZ) with a probability of In this example, even if they are in the same high probability mode, the stock time (high probability mode) has a higher CZ than the normal stage (high probability mode).
It is easy to win the lottery (easy to obtain CZ).

According to this example, it is possible to create a sense of expectation for the advantageous section (high probability mode) during the stock time (first period), and increase the player's desire to play during the stock time (first period). Can be done.

<Example of transition of performance state in advantageous section>
Next, an example of transition of performance states in an advantageous section will be described using FIG. 20(a).
FIG. 20(a) is a diagram showing an example of transition of performance states in an advantageous section.

As explained using FIG. 19, when a winning combination other than a loss is won in the special stage in the low navigation state (normal section), the stock time shifts to the high navigation state (advantageous section).

Note that the conditions for transitioning to stock time are not limited to this example; for example, if the conditions for transitioning from a low navigation state (normal section) to a high navigation state (advantageous section) are met, the transition to stock time will always occur. It may be configured as follows, it may be determined by lottery whether or not to shift to stock time, or it may be configured such that it does not shift to stock time after the RAM is cleared by changing settings etc. , it may be configured such that the transition to stock time occurs only after the start of the advantageous section after AT or bonus.

In the stock time, as shown in FIG. 20(a) (1) and (2), even if you win the CZ lottery, the state does not shift to the CZ state until the stock time specified number of games (50 games) has elapsed.
Stock up (accumulate) CZ, perform a premonitory effect over a certain period (in this example, a period of 5 games) from the game in which the player wins the CZ lottery, and win the CZ lottery in the final game of the certain period. A CZ winning announcement will be made suggesting that.

In this example, in stock time, even if you win the CZ lottery, you will not enter the CZ state until the stock time specified number of games (50 games) have elapsed. The period (number of games) from when the game starts until the game changes to the CZ state differs.

On the other hand, in the normal stage, as shown in Figure 20(a)(1), if you win the CZ lottery,
A foreshadowing effect is executed for a certain period of time (in this example, a period of 5 games) starting from the game that won the CZ lottery, and in the final game of the certain period, a CZ winning announcement indicating that the CZ lottery was won is made. After this, the next game with the precursor effect immediately shifts to the CZ state (weak CZ state). Therefore, in the normal stage, the period (number of games) from winning the CZ lottery until shifting to the CZ state is the same regardless of the timing of winning the CZ lottery.

In stock time, when the specified number of games for stock time (50 games) has elapsed, C.
If you do not have Z in stock, move to the normal stage, and if you have CZ in stock, move to one of the CZ states: weak CZ state, strong CZ state, or AT confirmed CZ state. .

In this example, if one CZ is stocked before the stock time specified number of games (50 games) has elapsed, as shown in FIG. For example, as shown in FIG. 20(a)(2), if two CZs are in stock, the state will shift to a strong CZ state, and if three or more CZs are in stock, Transition to AT confirmed CZ state. That is, when a plurality of CZs are stocked during the stock time, the state shifts to a strong CZ state or an AT confirmed CZ state, which is more advantageous to the player than a weak CZ state.

According to this example, a new game feature is provided in which the number of times a CZ lottery is won (how many times a certain condition is satisfied) is determined until the stock time specified number of games (first period) ends. This makes it possible to improve the interest of the game. Moreover, even after winning the CZ lottery (after a certain condition is met), the sense of anticipation can be maintained without impairing the gameplay.
In addition, it is possible to suppress the gambling nature from becoming too high, and by winning the CZ lottery twice or more during the stock time specified number of games (first period) (a certain condition is met in the second number) ), the strong CZ state (fourth gaming state) is more advantageous than the weak CZ state (third gaming state)
Since it is possible to shift to the AT confirmed CZ state (fourth gaming state), the player's expectations can be appropriately aroused.

Furthermore, if the player wins an AT lottery in the CZ state that has transitioned from stock time, or if the player has transitioned from stock time to AT confirmed CZ, the game will transition to AT gaming after the CZ state ends.

In addition, if you stock 3 or more CZs during the stock time (when an AT game is confirmed), you will immediately receive an A even if the stock time stipulated number of games (50 games) has not yet passed.
It may be configured to shift to the T-determined CZ state. Also, in stock time, CZ
In addition to the lottery, an AT lottery (a lottery with a lower probability of winning than the CZ lottery) is conducted, and if you win the AT lottery, you will immediately switch to AT status even before the stock time specified number of games (50 games) has elapsed. It may be configured as follows.

Also, in the final game of stock time, regardless of whether CZ is in stock or not, CZ
You may perform a judge performance to determine whether or not to move to the state, or at stock time,
Execute an AT lottery in which the right to transition to T state (AT) can be obtained, and instead of CZ (or
In addition), AT may be stocked, and in this case, the effect state to which the player shifts after the stock time may be determined according to the number of AT (and/or CZ) stocked.

<Example of performance during stock time>
Next, an example of performance in stock time will be described using FIG. 21. Figure 21 is
It is a diagram showing an example of performance in stock time in chronological order.

The state shown in FIG. 21(a) is a state in which the remaining number of games in the stock time (low probability mode) is 48 games.

In the same state, the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157 displays a stock time background image (in this example, an image of the night sky including the moon) that suggests that the performance state is stock time, and also displays a stock time background image (in this example, an image of the night sky including the moon). The remaining number of games (in this example, 48G) in the probability mode) is displayed.

The state shown in FIG. 21(b) is a state in which the remaining number of games in the stock time (low probability mode) is 47 games, and the player has won the CZ lottery.

In the same state, the background image for stock time (an image of the night sky including the moon) and the number of remaining games (in this example, 47G) continue to be displayed, and since the player won the CZ lottery, it is indicated that the player has won the CZ lottery. They have started producing signs that suggest that.

Although there are no particular limitations on the form of the omen production, in this example, the confrontation production showing the main character Tono confronting the enemy samurai is performed for a certain period of time (in this example, 5 games) starting from the game in which he won the CZ lottery. period).

Specifically, in the first game's foreshadowing performance shown in FIG. 21(b), the character string "Showdown!" is displayed, indicating that the confrontation performance has started, and then as shown in FIG. 21(c). In the second game's omen production, the character image of Tono and the text string "It's a game!" are displayed, followed by the same figure (d).
In the foreshadowing performance of the third game shown in Figure 2, the character images of the lord and the samurai are displayed, and in the subsequent foreshadowing performance of the fourth game shown in Figure (e), a confrontation scene between the Lord and the enemy is displayed, and then the character images of the lord and the samurai are displayed. 5 shown in f)
In the premonitory effect for the first game, a victory scene in which the player defeats the enemy and a CZ winning notification (in this example, an image including the character string "CZ won!") are displayed to notify that the player has won the CZ lottery.

In addition, in this example, when winning the CZ lottery, a foreshadowing performance is performed and a CZ winning notification is performed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a CZ winning notification is not performed in the foreshadowing performance. In some cases, it may be determined by lottery whether or not to notify the CZ winning. Furthermore, there may be cases where no omen effect is performed. Furthermore, at least a portion of the effect before the CZ winning notification (for example, background image for stock time) and the effect after the CZ winning notification may be made different.

The state shown in FIG. 21(g) is a state in which the remaining number of games in the stock time (low probability mode) is 46 games.

In the same state, the background image for stock time (an image of the night sky including the moon) and the number of remaining games (46G in this example) continue to be displayed, as well as the fact that you won the CZ lottery and stocked one CZ. , a CZ stock icon SI indicating that CZ has been stocked is displayed.

In addition, in this example, the number of remaining games in the stock time is not subtracted during the harbinger effect, but the number of remaining games may be subtracted even during the harbinger effect. Further, even if the player wins the CZ lottery, the CZ stock icon SI may be configured not to be displayed, and in this case, the foreshadow effect may not be executed.

The state shown in FIG. 21(h) is the final game state of stock time (low probability mode), and the subsequent state shown in FIG. 21(i) is the state of transition from stock time (low probability mode) to the CZ state. It is.

In this example, since one CZ was stocked during the stock time (low probability mode), after transitioning to the weak CZ state, in the weak CZ state, the CZ indicating the transition to the CZ state
In addition to displaying a transition notification (in this example, an image that includes the character string "CZ entry!"), a weak CZ background image (in this example, a background image for weak CZ indicating that the production state is weak CZ state) is displayed. image of a sandy beach) is displayed.

Further, in this example, an example of the performance in stock time (low probability mode) is shown, but in stock time (high probability mode), for example, a performance as shown in FIG. 21(j) is performed.

In the stock time (high probability mode) performance, a background image for stock time (an image of the night sky including the moon) and the number of remaining games (48G in this example) are displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157. In addition, on both sides of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157, a background image HD for high probability mode (in this example, a plurality of character strings of "high probability") indicating that the CZ lottery is in high probability mode is displayed. (band-shaped image).

The background image HD for high probability mode is preferably displayed at a position that does not overlap with both ends of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157 (at a predetermined distance from both ends). In this case, it is preferable that the display of 48G) be displayed in an overlapping manner in front of the background image HD for high probability mode.

With such a configuration, it is possible to make the high probability mode feel special, and it is possible to increase the player's sense of expectation during the stock time (first period). In addition to being able to make the high probability mode background image HD stand out, the high probability mode background image HD does not obstruct the visibility of other images (display of the number of remaining games, etc.).

<Example of production on normal stage>
Next, an example of the production on the normal stage will be described using FIG. 22. FIG. 22 is a diagram illustrating examples of performances on the normal stage in chronological order.

The state shown in FIG. 22(a) is a normal stage (low probability mode) state. In the same state, the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157 displays a background image for a normal stage (in this example, an image of the inside of the castle) indicating that the production state is a normal stage.

The state shown in FIG. 22(b) is a normal stage (low probability mode) state, and is a state in which the player has won the CZ lottery.

In the same state, the normal stage background image (image inside the castle) continues to be displayed, and the CZ
Since he won the lottery, he has started producing signs that suggest he has won the CZ lottery.

Although there are no particular limitations on the form of the omen production, in this example, similar to stock time, the confrontation production showing the main character Tono confronting the enemy samurai will be performed for a certain period (main) from the game in which he won the CZ lottery. In the example, this is executed over a period of 5 games.

Specifically, in the premonitory effect of the first game shown in FIG. 22(b), a character string "Showdown!" is displayed, indicating that a confrontation effect has started, and then as shown in FIG. 22(c). In the second game's omen production, the character image of Tono and the text string "It's a game!" are displayed, followed by the same figure (d).
In the foreshadowing performance of the third game shown in Figure 2, the character images of the lord and the samurai are displayed, and in the subsequent foreshadowing performance of the fourth game shown in Figure (e), a confrontation scene between the Lord and the enemy is displayed, and then the character images of the lord and the samurai are displayed. 5 shown in f)
In the premonitory effect for the first game, a victory scene in which the player defeats the enemy and a CZ winning notification (in this example, an image including the character string "CZ won!") are displayed to notify that the player has won the CZ lottery.

In addition, if two CZs were stocked during the stock time, the system was configured to shift to a strong CZ state.
If you hold a lottery and win the CZ lottery, you will receive a strong C in the same way as if you stock two CZ.
It may be configured to shift to the Z state.

The state shown in FIG. 22(g) is a state in which the normal stage (low probability mode) has transitioned to the CZ state.

In this example, since the player wins the CZ lottery in the normal stage (low probability mode), the player immediately moves to the CZ state (weak CZ state) from the next game with the omen effect, and then shifts to the CZ state in the weak CZ state. In addition to displaying a CZ transition notification (in this example, an image containing the character string "Entering CZ!") indicating that the production state is a weak CZ state, a weak CZ background image (main In the example, an image of the sea and a sandy beach) is displayed.

Further, in this example, an example of the effect in the normal stage (low probability mode) is shown, but in the normal stage (high probability mode), for example, the effect shown in FIG. 22(h) is performed.

In the production of the normal stage (high probability mode), in addition to displaying the background image for the normal stage (image of the castle interior) in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157, on both sides of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157, A high probability mode background image HD (in this example, a band-shaped image with a plurality of character strings of "high probability") indicating that the CZ lottery is in the high probability mode is displayed.

Note that the high probability mode background image HD is preferably displayed at a position that does not overlap both ends of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157 (at a position a predetermined distance from both ends).

Also, in this example, the background image for the normal stage (image inside the castle) and the background image for stock time (image of the night sky including the moon) are different images, but they may be the same image, and in this case,
Only the high probability mode for the normal stage and stock time may be the same image, and the low probability mode for the normal stage and stock time may be different images, or vice versa.

As explained above, the game machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 1 shown in FIG.
00, Pachinko machine) is a gaming machine equipped with a control means (for example, the main control section 300 and the first sub-control section 400 shown in FIG. 3) that can set one gaming state from a plurality of gaming states, The plurality of game states include a first game state (for example, the normal stage shown in FIG. 19) and a second game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state (for example, the normal stage shown in FIG. 19). CZ state, AT state), and the control means controls the above state based on a certain condition being satisfied (for example, winning a CZ lottery) while the first gaming state is set. It is possible to set a second gaming state, and the control means controls a first period (for example, 50
Even if the certain condition is satisfied during the game stock time, the second gaming state will not be set during the first period, and the second gaming state will not be set after the first period ends. This is a gaming machine characterized by setting a gaming state.

According to the game machine according to the present embodiment, even if a certain condition is satisfied, the game does not shift to the second game state until the first period ends, so that the game machine cannot be played for a long period of time in the first period. It is possible to enjoy the game and improve the interest of the game.

Further, it is provided with operation means (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139 shown in FIG. 1), and the plurality of game states include a normal state (for example, a normal section shown in FIG. 19), the first game state, and the An advantageous state (for example, an advantageous section shown in FIG. 19) including a second gaming state is included,
It is configured to be able to notify operation information (for example, operation navigation) of the operation means, and the advantageous state is:
The state may be more advantageous than the normal state regarding notification of the operation information, and when the normal state is shifted to the advantageous state, the state may be shifted to the first period.

With such a configuration, when the state shifts to an advantageous state, the period shifts to the first period, so it is possible to maintain the feeling of expectation from the previous advantageous state, and when the state shifts from the normal state to the advantageous state. , it is possible to avoid a situation where too many balls are rolled out in a short period of time, resulting in an unnecessarily high level of gambling.

Further, the first period may be a period in which the certain condition is more easily satisfied than the second period (a certain period excluding the first period).

With such a configuration, it is possible to make the first period feel more special than the second period, and it is possible to increase the player's expectations for the first period.

Further, the first period may include a normal period (e.g., low probability mode) and an advantageous period (e.g., high probability mode) in which the certain condition is more likely to be satisfied than the normal period. .

With such a configuration, it is possible to create a feeling of expectation for an advantageous period (high probability mode) in the first period, and it is possible to increase the player's desire to play in the first period. In addition, a certain period (second period) other than the first period includes a normal period (for example, a period in which the probability of winning a CZ lottery or an AT lottery is relatively low) and a certain period other than the normal period. An advantageous period in which conditions are likely to be met (for example, a period in which the probability of winning a CZ lottery or an AT lottery is relatively high) may be included.

Furthermore, the effects executed during the normal period and the effects executed during the advantageous period differ in at least some aspects of the effects (for example, in the high probability mode, the effects shown in FIG. 21(j)
The high probability mode background image HD shown in (displaying a band-shaped image with a plurality of character strings of "high probability") may be used.

With this configuration, it is possible to make the advantageous section (high probability mode) feel special, and it is possible to increase the player's sense of expectation in the first period.

Further, even if the certain condition is satisfied during the first period, the certain condition may be satisfied during the first period after the certain condition is satisfied. You can.

With such a configuration, even if a certain condition is met, the second gaming state will not be entered until the first period ends, so if a certain condition is met early in the first period Even though
It is possible to prevent the player from feeling like a loss, and it is possible to maintain the player's desire to play.

Further, the second gaming state includes a third gaming state (for example, a weak CZ state) and a fourth gaming state that is more advantageous than the third gaming state (for example, a strong CZ state, an AT confirmed CZ state). state), and if the number of times the certain condition is satisfied in the first period is a first number (for example, once), the third gaming state is executed after the end of the first period. and if the number of times the certain condition is satisfied in the first period is a second number (for example, 2 or more times), the fourth gaming state is set after the first period ends. It may be something.

With such a configuration, it is possible to provide a new gameplay feature in which the number of times a certain condition is satisfied before the first period ends, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Furthermore, even after a certain condition is met, the sense of anticipation can be maintained without impairing the gameplay. In addition, it is possible to prevent gambling from becoming too high, and when a second number of certain conditions are satisfied during the first period, a transition to a fourth gaming state that is more advantageous than the third gaming state can be made. Therefore, it is possible to moderately arouse the expectations of the players.

<<Embodiment 2>>
A gaming machine (slot machine) according to a second embodiment of the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings.

<Overall configuration>
First, the overall configuration of the slot machine 100 will be described using FIG. 23. Figure 23 shows
1 is an external perspective view of the slot machine 100 seen from the front side (player side). FIG.

The slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 23 corresponds to an example of the gaming machine of the present invention,
The device includes a main body 101 and a front door 102 that is attached to the front of the main body 101 and can be opened and closed with respect to the main body 101. Three reels (left reel 110, middle reel 111, and right reel 112) each having a plurality of types of symbols arranged on the outer circumferential surface are stored in the center of the main body 101 (not shown), and are rotated inside the slot machine 100. It is configured so that it can be done. these reels 1
10 to 112 are rotationally driven by a driving device such as a stepping motor.

In this embodiment, a suitable number of each pattern is printed on a band-like member at equal intervals, and this band-like member is attached to a predetermined circular cylindrical frame material to constitute each reel 110 to 112 (Fig. 26
reference). From the player's perspective, the symbols on the reels 110 to 112 are
Approximately three symbols are displayed vertically from a symbol display window 113 provided in front of the symbol, making a total of nine symbols visible.

By rotating each reel 110 to 112, the combination of symbols visible to the player changes. In other words, each reel 110 to 112 functions as a display device that variably displays combinations of a plurality of types of symbols. In addition to the reel, an electronic image display device such as a liquid crystal display device can also be used as such a display device. Furthermore, in this embodiment,
Although three reels are provided inside the center of the slot machine 100, the number of reels and the installation positions of the reels are not limited to this.

A backlight (not shown) is arranged on the back of each reel 110 to 112 to illuminate each symbol displayed in the symbol display window 113. It is desirable that the backlight be shielded for each pattern so that each pattern can be illuminated evenly. In addition,
Inside the slot machine 100, near each reel 110 to 112, an optical sensor (also referred to as an index sensor, not shown) consisting of a light emitting part and a light receiving part is provided, and the light emitting part of this optical sensor A light-shielding piece of a certain length provided on the reel is configured to pass between the light-receiving section and the light-receiving section. The position of the symbol on the reel in the rotational direction is determined based on the detection result of this sensor, and the reels 110 to 112 are stopped so that the desired symbol is displayed on the winning line.

For example, the notification lamp 123 may indicate a specific prize winning combination (specifically,
(Special Role 1 or Special Role 2) has been internally won, or during a bonus game (Special Role 1)
・This is a lamp that informs the player that the player is currently in a gaming state. The game medal insertion possible lamp 124 is a lamp for informing the player that game medals can be inserted.
The replay lamp 122 notifies the player that the current game can be replayed (no need to insert medals) when the player wins a replay that is one of the winning combinations in the previous game. It's a lamp. The reel panel lamp 128 is a lamp for performance.

The bet buttons 130 to 132 are buttons for inserting a predetermined number of medals (referred to as credits) electronically stored in the slot machine 100. In this embodiment, one coin is inserted each time the bet button 130 is pressed, up to a maximum of three coins, two coins are inserted when the bet button 131 is pressed, and three coins are inserted when the bet button 132 is pressed. It has become so. Hereinafter, the bet button 132 will also be referred to as the MAX bet button. Note that the game medal insertion lamp 129 lights up a number of lamps according to the number of inserted medals,
When a prescribed number of medals are inserted, a game start lamp 121 lights up to notify that a game start operation is possible.

The performance button 156 is an operation means that can be operated by the player. In this embodiment, the button is configured to be pressed and operated by the player, and is used for various effects. The operating means used for such effects are not limited to buttons, but may be configured with levers, touch panels, etc., or may include a plurality of operating means.

The medal slot 141 is an slot for the player to insert medals at the time of starting a game. That is, medals can be inserted electronically using the bet buttons 130 to 132, or actual medals can be inserted (insertion operation) from the medal slot 141, and the term "insertion" includes both. be.

The stored medal number display 125 is a display device for displaying the number of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100. The game information display 126 displays various internal information (for example,
This is a display device for numerically displaying the number of medals paid out during the bonus game. The payout number display 127 is a display for displaying the number of medals that will be paid out to the player as a result of winning some winning combination, and is also used as an instruction monitor for performing a press order effect. In this example, the number of stored coins display 125, the game information display 126, and the number of paid coins display 127 are 7.
It was used as a segment (SEG) display.

The start lever 135 is a lever-type switch for starting rotation of the reels 110 to 112. That is, when the desired number of medals is inserted into the medal slot 141 or the bet buttons 130 to 132 are operated and the start lever 135 is operated, the reels 11
0 to 112 will start rotating. The operation on the start lever 135 is called a game start operation.

The stop button unit 136 is provided with stop buttons 137 to 139. The stop buttons 137 to 139 are button-shaped switches for individually stopping the reels 110 to 112 that have started rotating by operating the start lever 135, and are associated with each reel 110 to 112. In addition, each stop button 137 to 13
A light emitting body may be provided inside the player 9, and when the stop buttons 137 to 139 can be operated, the light emitting body can be turned on to notify the player.

Hereinafter, the operations on the stop buttons 137 to 139 are referred to as stop operations, the first stop operation is the first stop operation (hereinafter also referred to as "first stop" or "first stop"), and the next stop operation is the second stop operation. operation (hereinafter also referred to as "second stop" or "second stop"), and the final stop operation is called the third stop operation (hereinafter also referred to as "second stop" or "second stop").
Hereinafter, it will also be referred to as "3rd stop" or "3rd stop." ).

Further, the reels that are stopped in response to these stop operations are referred to as a first stop reel, a second stop reel, and a third stop reel in this order. Further, the order in which the stop buttons 137 to 139 are operated to stop all of the rotating reels 110 to 112 is referred to as an operation order (or press order).

The operation order (pressing order) of the stop buttons 137 to 139 is when the left stop button 137 is represented by "left or R", the middle stop button 138 is represented by "middle or C", and the right stop button 139 is represented by "right or R". , (1) Left → middle → right operation order (left middle right or LCR), (2)
Left → right → center operation order (center left or right or LRC), (3) middle → left → right operation order (center left or CLR), (4) middle → right → left operation order (center right left or CRL) , (5) Right → left → center operation order (right left center or RLC), (6) right → center → left operation order (right center left or RCL)
).

The medal return button 133 is a button that is pressed to remove the inserted medals when the medals are jammed. The settlement button 134 is a button for settling medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100 and bet medals, and discharging them from the medal payout port 155. The door key hole 140 is a hole into which a key for unlocking the front door 102 of the slot machine 100 is inserted.

A title panel 162 is provided at the bottom of the stop button unit 136 for displaying the model name and pasting various certificate stamps. At the bottom of the title panel 162, a medal payout opening 155 and a medal receiving tray 161 are provided. The sound hole 181 is a hole for outputting sound from a speaker provided inside the slot machine 100 to the outside. Side lamps 144 provided on the left and right sides of the front door 102 are decorative lamps to enliven the game.
A presentation device 160 is disposed at the top of the front door 102, and a sound hole 143 is provided at the top of the presentation device 160.

This production device 160 includes a shutter (shielding device) 163 consisting of two right shutters 163a and a left shutter 163b that can be opened and closed in the horizontal direction, and a liquid crystal display device 157 (production image display device), and when the right shutter 163a and the left shutter 163b open horizontally outward in front of the liquid crystal display device 157, the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 157 appears in front of the slot machine 100 (on the player side). It becomes.

Note that the display device does not have to be a liquid crystal display device, but may be any display device that can display various performance images and various game information, such as a multi-segment display (7 segment display), a dot matrix display, an organic EL display, a plasma display, etc. , a reel (drum), or a display device consisting of a projector and a screen. Further, the display screen has a rectangular shape, and the entire display screen is configured to be visible to the player. In the case of this embodiment, the display screen is rectangular, but may be square. Furthermore, a decoration (not shown) may be provided around the periphery of the display screen so that a part of the periphery of the display screen is hidden by the decoration, making the display screen appear oddly shaped. Although the display screen is a flat surface in this embodiment, it may be a curved surface.

Additionally, inside the main body 101, there are setting keys that can be turned on and off by rotation, and operations for changing settings (setting value change operation) and checking settings by pressing. There is a setting switch that allows you to The setting key is an operation means for starting to change or check the setting values (setting 1 to setting 6 in this example), and the setting switch is
This is one of the setting means that can set one of a plurality of setting values.

<Winning line>
Next, the winning line will be explained using FIG. 24. FIG. 24 shows the slot machine 10
It is a diagram showing an example of a winning line of 0.

As explained using FIG. 23, when viewed from the player, approximately three symbols on the reels 110 to 112 are displayed vertically from the symbol display window 113 provided in front of each reel 110 to 112. A total of nine patterns are visible.

Specifically, the symbols displayed on the upper row of the left reel 110 (position 1 shown in the figure; also referred to as symbol position 1) are the left reel upper row symbol and the middle row of the left reel 110 (position 2 shown in the figure; symbol position 1). 2
The symbols displayed on the left reel 110 (position 3; also referred to as symbol position 3) are called the left reel lower symbols.

In addition, the symbol displayed in the upper row of the middle reel 111 (position 4 shown in the diagram; also referred to as symbol position 4) is the middle reel upper row symbol, and the symbol displayed in the middle row of the middle reel 111 (position 5 shown in the diagram; also referred to as symbol position 5). ) is the middle reel middle row symbol, the lower row of the middle reel 111 (position 6 shown in the figure;
The symbol displayed at symbol position 6) is called the middle reel lower symbol.

In addition, the symbols displayed in the upper row of the right reel 112 (position 7 shown in the diagram; also referred to as symbol position 7) are the right reel upper row symbols, and the symbols displayed in the middle row of the right reel 112 (position 8 shown in the diagram; also referred to as symbol position 8). ) is the middle row symbol on the right reel, and the lower row on the right reel 112 (position 9 shown in the figure;
The symbol displayed at symbol position 9) is called the right reel lower symbol.

In the present embodiment, the winning line is a middle winning line L1 (hereinafter simply referred to as a winning line) consisting of a left reel middle symbol (symbol position 2), a middle reel middle symbol (symbol position 5), and a right reel middle symbol (symbol position 8). ) is provided.

Here, the winning line is a line set at the stop position of the symbols that can be visually recognized through the symbol display window 113, and the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination, which will be explained using FIGS. 27 and 28, is displayed. This is the line on which it is determined whether or not the lines have been completed (or not). The valid winning line (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "valid line") is predetermined by the number of medals bet as gaming media.

The slot machine 100 of this embodiment is a three-copy bet-only machine, and when the number of medals inserted is less than three, none of the winning lines become valid, and when three medals are bet, the winning line L1 becomes effective. When the winning line becomes valid, the game can be started by operating the start lever 135.

Hereinafter, in the symbol display window 113, symbol positions 2, 5, and 8 on the winning line L1 are "winning positions", and other symbol positions, that is, symbol positions 1, 3, 4, 6, 7, and 9 are "non-winning positions". Sometimes referred to as "winning position". That is, the winning position refers to the position on the winning line where the symbols constituting the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination stop.

Note that the number of winning lines is not limited to one line. For example, in addition to the winning line L1, there is an upper winning line consisting of left reel upper symbols, middle reel upper symbols, and right reel upper symbols, and a left reel lower symbol, middle reel lower symbols, and right reel lower symbols. A total of three winning lines, including the lower winning lines, may be set as valid winning lines, or a number of winning lines corresponding to the number of medals bet may be set as valid winning lines.

<Control unit>
Next, the circuit configuration of the control section of the slot machine 100 will be described in detail using FIG. 25. Note that this figure shows a circuit block diagram of the control section.

The control unit of the slot machine 100 can be roughly divided into a main control unit 300 that controls the progress of the game.
and a first sub-control unit 400 that controls the main effects in response to a command signal (hereinafter simply referred to as a “command”) sent by the main control unit 300; The second sub-control unit 500 controls various devices based on commands.

<Main control section>
First, the main control section 300 of the slot machine 100 will be explained. The main control unit 300 is
It is equipped with a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300, and this basic circuit 302 stores a CPU 304, control program data, lottery data used for internal lottery of winning combinations, reel stop positions, etc. ROM 306 and R for temporarily storing data.
It is equipped with an AM 308, an I/O 310 for controlling input/output of various devices, a counter timer 312 for measuring time, number of times, etc., and a WDT (watchdog timer) 314. Note that other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and RAM 308.
This point also applies to the first sub-control section 400 and the second sub-control section 500, which will be described later.

The CPU 304 of this basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 315b as a system clock. Furthermore, when the power is turned on, the CPU 304 transmits the frequency division data stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 306 to the counter timer 312, and the counter timer 312 sets the interrupt time based on the received frequency division data. An interrupt request is sent to the CPU 304 at each interrupt time. CPU304
uses this interrupt request as a trigger to monitor each sensor and send drive pulses. for example,
When the clock signal output by the crystal oscillator 315b is set to 8 MHz, the frequency division value of the counter timer 312 is set to 1/256, and the frequency division data of the ROM 306 is set to 47, the reference time of the interrupt is 256 x 47 ÷ 8 MHz = 1 .504ms.

Each time the main control unit 300 receives a clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 315a,
A random value generation circuit 316 (this circuit is assumed to have two random value generation circuits built-in) that derives a numerical value in the range of 5535 and outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. A start signal output circuit 338 is provided, and the CPU 304 uses this start signal output circuit 3.
When a start signal is input from 38, game control is started (main processing of the main control section to be described later is started).

Random value generation circuit 316 generates random values used in basic circuit 302. The generation of random numbers in the random number generation circuit 316 can be roughly divided into two modes: counter mode and random number mode.
There are different methods. In the counter mode, a numerical value that is counted up (down) at a predetermined time interval is obtained and the numerical value is derived as a random value. There are two additional methods for random number mode. The first method in the random number mode is to use a random value seed to perform an operation according to a predetermined function (for example, a modulus function), and derive the result of this operation as a random number value. The second method is to read a numerical value from a random number table in which numerical values in the range of 0 to 65535 are randomly arranged, and derive the read numerical value as a random numerical value. The random value generation circuit 316 uses white noise superimposed on signals input from various sensors 318 to the sensor circuit 320 to obtain irregular values. The random number generation circuit 316 uses the obtained value as the initial value of a counter that counts up (down) in counter mode, as a seed for a random number, or when determining the reading start position of the random number table. use

The main control unit 300 is also equipped with a sensor circuit 320, and the CPU 304 controls various sensors 318 (bet button 130 sensor, bet button 131 sensor, bet button 132 sensor, medal input slot 141) at each interrupt time. medal acceptance sensor, start lever 135 sensor, stop button 137 sensor, stop button 13
8 sensors, stop button 139 sensors, payment button 134 sensors, medal payout device 18
Medal payout sensor for medals paid out from 0, optical sensor for reel 110, reel 1
11 optical sensor, reel 112 optical sensor, etc.).

Note that when the sensor circuit 320 detects the H level of the start lever sensor, it outputs a signal indicating this detection to the random value generation circuit 316. The random number generation circuit 316 that receives this signal latches the value at that timing and stores it in a register that stores the random number used for the lottery.

Two medal reception sensors are installed in the internal passage of the medal slot 141, and detect whether or not a medal has passed. Two start lever 135 sensors are installed inside the start lever 135 and detect a start operation by a player. stop button 137 sensor,
A stop button 138 sensor and a stop button 139 are installed on each of the stop buttons 137 to 139, and detect the operation of the stop button by the player.

Bet button 130 sensor, bet button 131 sensor, and bet button 132
The sensor is installed in each of the medal insertion buttons 130 to 132, and the RAM 30
8 detects an insertion operation when electronically stored medals are inserted into a game as medals. The payment button 134 sensor is provided on the payment button 134. When the settlement button 134 is pressed once, the electronically stored medals are settled. The medal payout sensor is a sensor for detecting medals paid out by the medal payout device 180. Note that each of the above sensors may be a non-contact type sensor or a contact type sensor.

The optical sensor of reel 110, the optical sensor of reel 111, and the optical sensor of reel 112 are installed at predetermined positions on the mounting base of each reel 110 to 112, and a light shielding piece provided on the reel frame passes through them. Every time I do it, it becomes L level. When the CPU 304 detects this signal, it determines that the reel has rotated once, and resets the rotational position information of the reel to zero.

The main control unit 300 includes a drive circuit 322 that drives the stepping motors provided in the reel devices 110 to 112, a drive circuit 324 that drives the solenoids provided in the medal selector 170 that selects the inserted medals, and a drive circuit 324 that drives the solenoids provided in the medal payout device 180. A drive circuit 326 that drives the motor, various lamps 336 (winning line display lamp 120, notification lamp 123, game medal insertion possible lamp 124, replay lamp 122, game medal insertion lamp 129, game start lamp 121, storage number display device 125, game information display 126, payout number display 127
).

Further, an information output circuit 334 (external centralized terminal board 248) is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control section 300 is connected to an external hall computer (not shown) etc. via this information output circuit 334. Gaming information (for example, gaming status) of the slot machine 100 is output to the information input circuit 652 provided.

The main control unit 300 also includes a voltage monitoring circuit 330 that monitors the voltage value of the power supply supplied to the main control unit 300 from a power management unit (not shown). If the value is less than a predetermined value (9V in this embodiment), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has decreased is output to the basic circuit 302.

Further, the main control section 300 is provided with an output interface for transmitting commands to the first sub-control section 400, and enables communication with the first sub-control section 400. Note that information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 300
Although the configuration is such that signals such as commands can be transmitted to the sub-control unit 400, the first sub-control unit 4
The configuration is such that signals such as commands cannot be transmitted to the main control unit 300 from 00 onwards.

<Sub-control unit>
Next, the first sub-control unit 400 of the slot machine 100 will be explained. First sub-control unit 4
00 receives the control command sent by the main control unit 300 via the input interface,
It is equipped with a basic circuit 402 that controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 based on this control command, and this basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404 and an RA for temporarily storing data.
It is equipped with an M408, an I/O 410 for controlling input/output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time, number of times, etc. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 is
It operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period outputted from a crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. The ROM 406 stores control programs and data for controlling the entire first sub-control unit 400, data for controlling backlight lighting patterns, various displays, and the like.

The CPU 404 transmits frequency division data stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 406 to the counter timer 412 via the data bus at a predetermined timing. The counter timer 412 determines the interrupt time based on the received frequency division data, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 404 at each interrupt time. The CPU 404 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

Further, the first sub-control unit 400 is provided with a sound source IC 418, and speakers 272 and 277 are provided with the sound source IC 418 via an output interface. The sound source IC418 is CP
Controls the audio output from the amplifier and speakers 272 and 277 in accordance with commands from U404. An S-ROM (sound ROM) in which audio data is stored is connected to the sound source IC 418, and the audio data acquired from this ROM is amplified by an amplifier and sent to the speaker 27.
Output from 2,277.

Further, the first sub-control unit 400 is provided with a drive circuit 422, and various lamps 420 (upper lamp, lower lamp, side lamp 14) are connected to the drive circuit 422 via an input/output interface.
4, title panel 162 lamp, etc.) are connected.

The first sub-control unit 400 is also provided with a drive circuit 424 that drives the motor of the shutter 163, and the drive circuit 424 is provided with the shutter 163 via an output interface. This drive circuit 424 outputs a drive signal to a stepping motor (not shown) provided in the shutter 163 in response to a command from the CPU 404.

Further, the first sub-control unit 400 is provided with a sensor circuit 426, and the sensor circuit 426 includes a shutter sensor 4 that can detect the position of the shutter 163 via an input interface.
28 and a performance button sensor 430 that can detect the pressing operation of the performance button 156 are connected. The CPU 404 monitors the states of the shutter sensor 428 and the effect button sensor 430 at each interrupt time.

Further, the CPU 404 transmits and receives signals to and from the second sub-control unit 500 via the output interface. The second sub-control unit 500 controls the performance image display device 157 (hereinafter, “liquid crystal display device 15
Also called 7. ) performs various controls on the presentation device 160, including display control. Note that the second sub-control unit 500 is, for example, a control unit that controls the display of the liquid crystal display device 157, a control unit that controls various production drive devices (for example, a control unit that controls motor drive of the shutter 163). It may be configured with a plurality of control units, such as.

The second sub-control unit 500 includes a basic circuit 502 that receives the control command transmitted by the first sub-control unit 400 via an input interface and controls the entire second sub-control unit 500 based on this control command. This basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, and an I/O 510 for controlling input/output of various devices.
and a counter timer 512 for measuring time, number of times, etc. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock. The ROM 506 stores a control program and data for controlling the entire second sub-control unit 500, data for image display, and the like.

The CPU 504 transmits frequency division data stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 506 to the counter timer 512 via the data bus at a predetermined timing. The counter timer 512 determines the interrupt time based on the received frequency division data, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 504 at each interrupt time. The CPU 504 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

Further, the second sub-control unit 500 is provided with a VDP 516 (video display processor), and a ROM 506 and a VRAM 518 are connected to the VDP 516 via a bus. The VDP 516 reads image data etc. stored in the ROM 506 based on a signal from the CPU 504, generates a display image using the work area of the VRAM 518, and displays the image on the effect image display device 157.

<Design arrangement>
Next, the symbol arrangement on each of the reels 110 to 112 described above will be explained using FIG. 26. In addition, FIG. 26 shows each reel (left reel 110, middle reel 111, right reel 11
2) is a plan view showing the arrangement of the patterns applied to the item 2).

On each reel 110 to 112, a predetermined number of symbols (in this embodiment, 20 symbols with numbers 0 to 19) of a plurality of types (in this embodiment, 9 types) shown on the right side of the figure are arranged. . Further, the numbers 0 to 19 shown at the left end of the figure are numbers indicating the arrangement positions of the symbols on each reel 110 to 112. For example, in this embodiment, the number 0 piece on the left reel 110 has “
A "watermelon symbol", a "bell symbol" is placed on the number 1 piece of the middle reel 111, and a "replay symbol" is placed on the number 0 piece of the right reel 112.

<Type of winning role>
Next, the types of winning combinations of the slot machine 100 will be explained using FIG. 27. In addition, FIG. 27 shows the types of winning combinations, names of condition devices, symbol combinations corresponding to each winning combination, number of payouts,
It is a figure showing notes.

The winning combinations of the slot machine 100 include special prizes (special prize 1, special prize 2), general prizes (replayed prizes 1 to 3, small prizes 1 to 5), and the like. Note that the types of winning combinations are not limited to these winning combinations, and can be arbitrarily adopted, and some of the winning combinations are omitted from illustration in FIG. 27.

<Types of winning roles/special roles>
Among the winning combinations in this embodiment, special combination 1 and special combination 2 are combinations that shift to a special gaming state in which a predetermined profit is given to the player. Furthermore, the replay combination is a combination that allows replay without inserting new medals (a combination to which replay is granted). These winning roles are
Sometimes called the "actuator".

In addition, "winning" in this embodiment includes cases where a symbol combination of an operating combination that does not involve a payout of medals (does not involve a payout of medals) is displayed on the winning line; for example, special winning combination 1, This includes winning the special winning combination 2 and the replay winning combination.

Special role 1 and special role 2 are internally won and the gaming state changes to special role 1 and 2 internal winning state (R
This is a winning combination in which the game state shifts to the special combination 1/2 gaming state (RT4) upon winning. In addition, the specified number of coins (for example, 200 coins) in the special role 1 and 2 gaming state (RT4)
When more medals are paid out, the gaming state shifts to a low replay probability state (RT1).
Note that each gaming state (RT1 to RT4) will be described later.

The symbol combination corresponding to Special Role 1 (BB) is "Seven 1 symbol - Seven 1 symbol - Seven 1"
"Symbol" or "Seven 2 symbol - Seven 2 symbol - Seven 2 symbol", special role 2 (RB)
The symbol combination corresponding to is "BAR symbol-BAR symbol-BAR symbol".

When the special winning combination 1 or special winning combination 2 is internally won, the special winning internal winning flag corresponding to this internally winning winning combination is set to ON (stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300). This flag remains on until the internally won winning combination is won, and it becomes easier to win the internally winning winning combination in subsequent games. In other words, in a game where the special role 1 or 2 is internally won, even if the special role is not won, the special role will be internally won in the next game and thereafter, and the symbol combination corresponding to the special role will be All together, it will be easier to win.

<Types of winning roles/replaying roles>
Re-gaming combinations 1 to 3 are winning combinations (activation combinations) that allow players to play the next game without inserting medals (gaming media) by winning a prize, and no medals are paid out. The corresponding symbol combinations are as shown in FIG. 27. Note that the replay combination may be any combination that allows the player to play the next game without inserting medals. Therefore, for example, when winning a re-game winning combination, medals may be automatically inserted in the next game (the number of inserted medals is reset in the storage area for the number of inserted medals), or when winning a re-gaming winning combination It may also be possible to carry over the medals inserted in the next game and use them as they are in the next game.

<Types of winning roles/small roles>
Small winning combinations 1 to 5 are winning winning combinations in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out (there is a number of medals to be paid out) upon winning.

Small winning combination 1 (watermelon) is a winning combination in which, upon winning, a symbol combination of "watermelon pattern - watermelon pattern - watermelon pattern" is stopped and displayed on the winning line L1, and five medals are paid out.

Small winning combination 2 (Cherry) is a winning winning combination in which the symbol combination "Cherry symbol-ANY-ANY" is stopped and displayed on the winning line L1 and two medals are paid out. In addition,"
The symbol combination "Cherry symbol-ANY-ANY" indicates that the symbol on the left reel 110 only needs to be the "cherry symbol", and the symbols on the middle reel 111 and right reel 112 may be any symbol.

Hereinafter, these small roles 1 (Watermelon) and 2 (Cherry) may be collectively referred to as "rare roles," but rare roles are not limited to these winning roles, and may be It may be one of the winning combinations, or other winning combinations may be added.

<U>In addition, if you win a rare role in the AT state described later, the number of games will be increased or the set</U>
<U>It is now possible to run a lottery that increases the number of points (making it easier to win the lottery). One</U>
<U>If you win a rare role in the ED state, the number of games or sets will be increased</U>
Lotteries that involve <U> are no longer executed. </U>
<U></U>As shown in FIG. 28, the small winning combination 3 (pressing order bell) is composed of six types of winning combinations, small winning combinations 3a to 3f. In this example, by lottery, with a predetermined probability (approximately 1/6 in this example, common to all settings),
If any of the winning combinations from the small winning combinations 3a to 3f is internally won, and the operation order (pressing order) of the stop operations using the stop buttons 137 to 139 matches the correct pressing order corresponding to the internally winning winning combination. A prize is won and 12 medals are paid out (details will be described later using FIG. 28).

For small winning combination 4 (common bell), the symbol combination of "bell symbol - bell symbol - bell symbol" is placed on the winning line L1, regardless of the operation order (press order) or operation timing of the stop operations using the stop buttons 137 to 139. This is a winning combination that is stopped and displayed and 12 medals are paid out.

In the small winning combination 5 (1-card winning), the symbol combination of "Replay symbol - Replay symbol - Blank 1 symbol" is the winning line L1, regardless of the operation order (press order) or operation timing of the stop operations using the stop buttons 137 to 139. This is a winning combination that is stopped and displayed above and one medal is paid out.

<Small role 3 (push order bell) and AT game>
Next, the relationship between the small winning combination 3 (press order bell) and the AT game will be explained using FIGS. 28(a) and 28(b).

In addition, FIG. 28(a) is a diagram showing the symbol combinations, payout numbers, and notes corresponding to the small role 3 (press order bell) and the small role 5 (1-card role), and the same figure (b) is a diagram showing the small role It is a diagram showing the relationship between the pressing order of stop buttons 137 to 139 in a game in which winning combination 3 (pressing order bell) is internally won and an AT game.

Small role 3 (press order bell) is small role 3a (press order bell LCR), small role 3b (press order bell RLC),
Small role 3c (press order bell CRL), small role 3d (press order bell LRC), small role 3e (press order bell CLR)
), small winning combination 3f (press order bell RCL), and six types of winning combinations.

If the small winning combination 3 (press order bell) is internally won, which symbol combination will be stopped and displayed on the winning line L1 depending on the order of stop operations using the stop buttons 137 to 139;
Then, it is determined whether the AT game will be advantageous or disadvantageous.

Details will be described later, but in this example, among the six types of push order bells of small winning combinations 3a to 3f, small winning combinations 3b (pressing order bell RLC), small winning combinations 3c (pressing order bell CRL), and small winning combinations 3e (press order bell CLR),
In the four types of small winning combinations 3f (press order bell RCL), 12 medals are paid out when the stop operation is performed according to the irregular press which is the correct operation order. Therefore, if you internally win the small role 3 (press order bell) and perform the stop operation according to the irregular press, there is a 4/6 probability that the small role (press order bell) will be won.
A game in which a prize is won and a stop operation is performed in accordance with an irregular press is a "high base game" in which the number of medals acquired is relatively large.

On the other hand, in this example, among the six types of push order bells of small winning combinations 3a to 3f, the small winning combination 3a (pressing order bell LCR) is stopped when the stop operation is performed according to the correct operation order. Twelve medals are paid out, and 12 medals are paid out when the small winning combination 3d (press order bell LRC) is stopped according to the correct operation order of scissor hitting. Therefore, if you internally win the small winning combination 3 (push order bell), if you perform the stop operation according to the order push or scissor hit, 2/
A game in which there is a probability of 6 to win a small winning combination (press order bell) and a stop operation is performed according to the order push or scissor hit is a "low base game" in which the number of medals acquired is relatively small.

Below, six types of small winnings 3a to 3f will be specifically explained.

<Small role 3a (press order bell LCR)>
When the small winning combination 3a (pressing order bell LCR) is internally won among the small winning combinations 3 (pressing order bell) and the stop operation is performed according to the predetermined correct operation order (in this example, sequential pressing (LCR)) for,"
The symbol combination "bell symbol - bell symbol - bell symbol" is displayed in a stopped state, 12 medals are paid out, and the AT game becomes advantageous.

On the other hand, the small winning combination 3a (press order bell LCR) is internally won, and according to the predetermined incorrect operation order (in this example, scissors hit (LRC)) among the multiple incorrect operation orders other than the correct operation order. When the stop operation is performed, symbol combinations other than "bell symbol - bell symbol - bell symbol" are stopped and displayed, one medal is paid out, and the AT game becomes advantageous.

In addition, the small winning combination 3a (press order bell LCR) is internally won, and among the multiple incorrect operation orders other than the correct operation order, a predetermined incorrect operation order (in this example, irregular presses (CLR, CRL,
When a stop operation is performed according to either RLC or RCL)), symbol combinations other than "Bell symbol - Bell symbol - Bell symbol" are stopped and displayed, one medal is paid out, and the AT game is disadvantageous. becomes.

Here, "AT games become disadvantageous" refers to "making the ease of acquiring game value in AT games disadvantageous for some players", for example, when a player performs a stop operation by pressing an irregular button in a normal game. In the game, the AT lottery is not executed, or the number of games in one set of AT games is reduced, the initial number of games and the probability of winning an AT are disadvantageous depending on the number of irregular presses, and a points lottery is conducted every game. , If you make an irregular press on a game machine that determines AT performance according to the points, the point lottery will be disadvantageous, and in normal games where you perform a stop operation with an irregular press, the probability of winning the AT lottery will be lowered. , lowering the frequency of execution of operation navigation in AT games, not executing set continuation lottery in AT games, lowering the winning probability of set continuation lottery in AT games, etc. On the other hand, "AT games become advantageous" refers to "making it easier for players to acquire gaming value in AT games".

As described above, in this example, when the small role 3 is internally won, the AT game becomes advantageous if you perform the forward push (LCR) or the scissors hit (LRC), and when the small role 3 is internally won, the irregular push (C
LR, CRL, RLC, RCL), the AT game is disadvantageous, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, if the small role 3 is internally won,
) or scissors hit (LRC), the advantage of AT game will not change, and if you win the small role 3 internally, if you perform an irregular push (CLR, CRL, RLC, RCL), AT game will be disadvantageous. It is also possible to make the AT game advantageous by performing a sequential push (LCR) or scissors hit (LRC) when the small role 3 is internally won, and an irregular push when the small role 3 is internally won. (
If any one of CLR, CRL, RLC, and RCL is performed, the advantage of the AT game may not change.

<Small role 3b (Press order bell RLC)>
When the small winning combination 3b (pressing order bell RLC) is internally won among the small winning combinations 3 (pressing order bell) and the stop operation is performed according to the predetermined correct operation order (in this example, irregular pressing (RLC)) for,
The symbol combination "bell symbol - bell symbol - bell symbol" is displayed in a stopped state, 12 medals are paid out, and the AT game becomes disadvantageous.

On the other hand, the small winning combination 3b (press order bell RLC) is internally won, and among the multiple incorrect operation orders other than the correct operation order, a predetermined incorrect operation order (in this example, order press (LCR) or scissors When a stop operation is performed in accordance with the strike (LRC), symbol combinations other than "bell symbol - bell symbol - bell symbol" are stopped and displayed, one medal is paid out, and the AT game becomes advantageous.

In addition, the small winning combination 3b (press order bell RLC) is internally won, and among the multiple incorrect operation orders other than the correct operation order, a predetermined incorrect operation order (in this example, irregular presses (CLR, CRL,
If a stop operation is performed according to any one of RCL)), symbol combinations other than "Bell symbol - Bell symbol - Bell symbol" are stopped and displayed, one medal is paid out, and the AT game becomes disadvantageous. .

<Small role 3c (press order bell CRL)>
When the small role 3c (press order bell CRL) is internally won among the small role 3 (press order bell) and the stop operation is performed according to the predetermined correct operation order (in this example, irregular press (CRL)) for,
The symbol combination "bell symbol - bell symbol - bell symbol" is displayed in a stopped state, 12 medals are paid out, and the AT game becomes disadvantageous.

On the other hand, the small winning combination 3c (press order bell CRL) is internally won, and among the multiple incorrect operation orders other than the correct operation order, a predetermined incorrect operation order (in this example, order press (LCR) or scissors When a stop operation is performed in accordance with the strike (LRC), symbol combinations other than "bell symbol - bell symbol - bell symbol" are stopped and displayed, one medal is paid out, and the AT game becomes advantageous.

In addition, the small winning combination 3c (press order bell CRL) is internally won, and among the multiple incorrect operation orders other than the correct operation order, a predetermined incorrect operation order (in this example, irregular presses (CLR, RLC,
If a stop operation is performed according to any one of RCL)), symbol combinations other than "Bell symbol - Bell symbol - Bell symbol" are stopped and displayed, one medal is paid out, and the AT game becomes disadvantageous. .

<Small role 3d (Oshijun Bell LRC)>
When the small winning combination 3d (pressing order bell LRC) is internally won among the small winning combinations 3 (pressing order bell) and the stop operation is performed according to the predetermined correct operation order (in this example, scissors hitting (LRC)) , the symbol combination "bell symbol - bell symbol - bell symbol" is displayed in a stopped state, 12 medals are paid out, and the AT game becomes advantageous.

On the other hand, the small winning combination 3d (press order bell LRC) is internally won, and among the multiple incorrect operation orders other than the correct operation order, according to the predetermined incorrect operation order (in this example, order press (LCR)) When the stop operation is performed, symbol combinations other than "bell symbol - bell symbol - bell symbol" are stopped and displayed, one medal is paid out, and the AT game becomes advantageous.

In addition, the small winning combination 3d (press order bell LRC) is internally won, and among the multiple incorrect operation orders other than the correct operation order, a predetermined incorrect operation order (in this example, irregular presses (CLR, CRL,
When a stop operation is performed according to either RLC or RCL)), symbol combinations other than "Bell symbol - Bell symbol - Bell symbol" are stopped and displayed, one medal is paid out, and the AT game is disadvantageous. becomes.

<Small role 3e (press order bell CLR)>
When the small winning combination 3e (pressing order bell CLR) is internally won from the small winning combination 3 (pressing order bell) and the stop operation is performed according to the predetermined correct operation order (in this example, irregular pressing (CLR)) for,
The symbol combination "bell symbol - bell symbol - bell symbol" is displayed in a stopped state, 12 medals are paid out, and the AT game becomes disadvantageous.

On the other hand, the small winning combination 3e (press order bell CLR) is internally won, and among the multiple incorrect operation orders other than the correct operation order, a predetermined incorrect operation order (in this example, order press (LCR) or scissors When a stop operation is performed in accordance with the strike (LRC), symbol combinations other than "bell symbol - bell symbol - bell symbol" are stopped and displayed, one medal is paid out, and the AT game becomes advantageous.

In addition, the small winning combination 3e (press order bell CLR) is internally won, and among the multiple incorrect operation orders other than the correct operation order, a predetermined incorrect operation order (in this example, irregular presses (CRL, RLC,
If a stop operation is performed according to any one of RCL)), symbol combinations other than "Bell symbol - Bell symbol - Bell symbol" are stopped and displayed, one medal is paid out, and the AT game becomes disadvantageous. .

<Small role 3f (Push order bell RCL)>
When the small winning combination 3f (pressing order bell RCL) is internally won among the small winning combinations 3 (pressing order bell) and the stop operation is performed according to the predetermined correct operation order (in this example, irregular pressing (RCL)) for,
The symbol combination "bell symbol - bell symbol - bell symbol" is displayed in a stopped state, 12 medals are paid out, and the AT game becomes disadvantageous.

On the other hand, the small winning combination 3f (press order bell RCL) is internally won, and among the multiple incorrect operation orders other than the correct operation order, a predetermined incorrect operation order (in this example, order press (LCR) or scissors When a stop operation is performed in accordance with the strike (LRC), symbol combinations other than "bell symbol - bell symbol - bell symbol" are stopped and displayed, one medal is paid out, and the AT game becomes advantageous.

In addition, the small winning combination 3f (press order bell RCL) is internally won, and among the multiple incorrect operation orders other than the correct operation order, a predetermined incorrect operation order (in this example, irregular presses (CRL, CLR,
If a stop operation is performed according to any of the RLC), symbol combinations other than "Bell symbol - Bell symbol - Bell symbol" are stopped and displayed, one medal is paid out, and AT games become disadvantageous. .

In addition, in this example, if the small winning combinations 3a to 3f are internally won and the stop operation is performed in the incorrect operation order, one medal is paid out, but the number of medals paid out is as follows. The number is not limited to one, but may be zero, or may be one or more as long as it is less than the 12 coins paid out when the stop operation is performed in the correct operation order.

<Small role 5 (1 role)>
Next, using FIGS. 28(a) and 28(c), the relationship between the small winning combination 5 (one-card winning combination) and the setting suggestion effect A will be explained.

In addition, FIG. 28 (a) is a diagram showing the symbol combinations, payout numbers, and notes corresponding to the small role 3 (press order bell) and the small role 5 (1-card role), and the same figure (c) is a diagram showing the symbol combinations, payout numbers, and notes corresponding to the small role 3 (press order bell) and the small role 5 (1-card role). It is a diagram showing the relationship between the pressing order of stop buttons 137 to 139 in a game in which winning combination 5 (one-card winning combination) is internally won and setting suggestion performance A.

If the small winning combination 5 (1 card winning) is internally won, the small winning 5 (1 card winning) will be won regardless of the order (pressing order) or timing of the stop operations using the stop buttons 137 to 139. One medal is paid out, but it is determined whether or not setting suggestion effect A can be executed depending on the order of stop operations using the stop buttons 137 to 139.

A specific example is when the small winning combination 5 (1-card winning combination) is internally won and the stop operation is performed according to a predetermined operation order (in this example, sequential pressing (LCR) or scissor hitting (LRC)). for,
A small winning combination 5 (one-card winning combination) is won and one medal is paid out, and the setting suggestion performance A becomes executable.

On the other hand, the small winning combination 5 (one-card winning combination) is internally won, and the stop operation is performed according to an operation order other than the predetermined operation order (in this example, an irregular press (CLR, CRL, RLC, RCL)). In this case, the small winning combination 5 (one-card winning combination) is won and one medal is paid out, but the setting suggestion performance A is not executed.

In addition, in this example, when the small role 5 (one-card role) is internally won and the stop operation is performed according to the irregular press, setting suggestion performance A becomes impossible to execute. If 5 (1 card role) is internally won, the operation navigation will be displayed, and if the stop operation is performed without following the operation navigation (
If a stop operation is performed that ignores the operation navigation), the setting suggestion performance A may become impossible to execute.

In addition, in this example, if the small winning combination 5 is won internally and the stop operation is performed with an irregular press, one medal is paid out, but the number of medals paid out is not limited to one. It may be set to 0.

Here, the setting suggestion performance is a performance that suggests the currently set setting values (in this example, settings 1 to 6) using performance elements in the slot machine 100, and is a setting suggestion performance that will be described later. Production A and setting suggestion production B are one type of setting suggestion production.

The production elements used for the setting suggestion production are not particularly limited, but include display means (e.g.
The display on the liquid crystal display device 157 shown in FIG. 23, the sound output from the sound output means (for example, the speakers 272 and 277 shown in FIG. 25), and the sound output from the optical output means (for example, the reels 110 to 112 shown in FIG. The light output from a backlight, a lamp such as the side lamp 144 shown in FIG. ) etc. are applicable.

In this example, if the stop operation is performed in an operation order other than the predetermined operation order (in this example, an irregular press), setting suggestion performance A becomes impossible to execute. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a predetermined operation order (in this example, sequential pressing (LCR)
, or the setting suggestion performance A may be performed less frequently than when the stop operation is performed according to the scissor strike (LRC)).

In addition, a predetermined operation order (in this example, sequential pressing (LCR) or scissor tapping (
The execution frequency of setting suggestion effects is the same as when the stop operation is performed according to LRC)), but among the setting suggestion effects, effects that definitively suggest the setting value (for example, including a display such as "Setting 5 confirmed") Effects) will be executed less frequently (effects that vaguely suggest the setting value (for example, “Setting 5
? Setting 6? ”) may be performed more frequently.

In addition, a predetermined operation order (in this example, sequential pressing (LCR) or scissor tapping (
The execution frequency of the setting suggestion effect A may be lower than that when the stop operation is performed according to LRC)), and the execution frequency of the effect that definitely suggests the setting value may also be lower.

<Types of RT-type gaming states>
Next, the types and transitions of RT-based gaming states in the slot machine 100 will be explained.

<Low replay probability state (RT1)>
The low replay probability state (RT1) is a default RT-based gaming state (hereinafter also referred to as "normal gaming state") that is initially set immediately after the power of the slot machine 100 is turned on.
This is a gaming state that is relatively disadvantageous for the player compared to other gaming states.

In this example, in this replay low probability state (RT1), replay combination 2 (promotion replay 1)
Or, if you win the re-gaming combination 3 (promotion replay 2), the re-gaming high probability state (R
Move on to T2). In addition, in this re-gaming low probability state (RT1), when special winning combination 1 or special winning combination 2 is internally won, the state shifts to special winning combination 1 and 2 internal winning state (RT3), which will be described later.

<High replay probability state (RT2)>
The replay high probability state is a gaming state in which the internal winning probability of replay is higher than the replay low probability state (RT1).

In this example, in this re-gaming high probability state (RT2), when special winning combination 1 or special winning combination 2 is internally won, the state shifts to special winning combination 1 and 2 internal winning state (RT3), which will be described later.

<Special role 1 and 2 internal winning status (RT3)>
The special prize 1/2 internal winning state (RT3) is a state in which the internal winning flag corresponding to special prize 1 or special prize 2 is set to ON, and when the player performs a stop operation at a predetermined timing, This is a gaming state in which a symbol combination corresponding to the special combination corresponding to this flag can be displayed.

In this example, when a special prize 1 or special prize 2 is won in this special prize 1/2 internal winning state (RT3), the state shifts to a special game state (RT4) to be described later.

<Special gaming state (RT4)>
The special gaming state (RT4) is the most advantageous gaming state for the player among all the gaming states.
In this example, in the special gaming state (RT4), when a specified number of coins (for example, 200 coins) are paid out, the state shifts to the low re-gaming probability state (RT1).

In this example, the conditions for ending the special gaming state (RT4) are not particularly limited, and may include, for example, when a predetermined role is won internally, when a predetermined number of prizes (e.g., 8) are won, or when a predetermined prize is won. This may be the case where the game has been played a number of times (for example, six times).

<Transition of AT system game state>
Next, the AT system game state will be explained.

The AT system gaming state is broadly divided into a low navigation state and a high navigation state. The low navigation state is a state in which the probability that operation navigation will be executed is low, and is also referred to as a normal mode, a non-advantageous section, or a normal section. A high navigation state is a state where the probability that operation navigation will be executed is higher than a low navigation state.
Also called AT mode or advantageous section.

Here, the operation navigation refers to an effect that notifies the stop operation mode (for example, correct operation order and stop operation timing) of the stop buttons 137 to 139 in order to obtain medals and maintain an advantageous gaming state. , an effect that notifies the correct operation order of a pressing order winning combination (for example, small winning combination 3 (pressing order bell LCR)) (for example, an effect that displays characters "left → middle → right"), etc.

If a stop operation is performed in accordance with the operation contents of the operation navigation, an advantageous result is brought to the player, so the high navigation state is a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the low navigation state. Here, advantageous specifically refers to the total number of gaming media paid out by the gaming machine compared to the total number of gaming media used by the player as the number of bets on the gaming machine when playing for a predetermined period of time. It means that the ratio, so-called payout rate (ball output rate), is advantageous.

Note that in this example, the low navigation state is a state where the probability of executing operation navigation is low, and the high navigation state is a state where the probability of executing operation navigation is higher than the low navigation state. The state where operation navigation is not executed and the high navigation state may be changed to the state where operation navigation is executed.

Each AT system game state is subdivided and managed, and this is called a performance state. In detail, the performance state in the low navigation state is the normal gaming state, and the performance state in the high navigation state is the normal state,
It has a confirmed notification state, a judge state, a pullback state, an AT1 state, an AT2 state, and an ED (ending) state. Note that the AT1 state, AT2 state, and ED state are states in which the number of balls produced increases in principle.

In this embodiment, when a certain condition is satisfied in the normal gaming state of the low navigation state (for example, when winning a winning combination other than a loss), the game shifts to the normal gaming state of the high navigation state. After that, for example, the transition occurs in the order of confirmed notification state → AT1 state → Judge state, and from this judge state via the pullback state to the normal gaming state or AT2 state, or directly from the judge state, AT2 There are routes etc. to transition to the state.

AT state (AT1 state, AT2 state) is a predetermined number of games (for example, 1 set of 30 games)
This is a state in which AT gaming is possible, and is more advantageous for the player than the normal game state with low navigation state or the normal state with high navigation state.

In this AT game, in the starting game of the AT game, a set continuation lottery (for example, a lottery with a winning probability of 1/4) is executed to determine whether or not to continue the AT game, and if this set continuation lottery is won, an additional number of predetermined times will be drawn. (In this example, 30 games per set) AT games are provided, and the AT state is extended. Further, when the conditions for transition to the normal gaming state are satisfied in the AT state (in this example, when all games in the AT state are played), the next game will be shifted to the normal gaming state.

Furthermore, when the number of remaining games in the high navigation state becomes less than a predetermined number of games (for example, 20 games), the state shifts to the ED state, and in this ED state, an ED (ending) effect indicating the end of the high navigation state is executed. Ru.

Note that the condition for transition to the ED state is that the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is a predetermined number of games (for example,
For example, the predetermined number of games is not limited to 20 games or less, and may be more than or less than 20 games, or may be "number of acquired coins + expected difference in number of acquired coins>2000".

<Setting suggestion production A>
Next, setting suggestion effect A will be explained using FIG. 29. FIG. 29(a) is a time chart showing an example of the game period of the high probability mode and low probability mode of setting suggestion performance A.

In this example, in the advantageous section, the small winning combination 5 (1-card winning combination) is internally won in the internal lottery when the start lever 135 is pressed (lever on), and the predetermined operation order (in this example, (LCR) or scissor strike (LRC)) when the stop button 137 to 139 is stopped, setting suggestion performance A using the setting suggestion performance A selection table described later
By executing the lottery, setting suggestion performance A becomes executable.

Further, when it is determined to execute the setting suggestion performance A by the setting suggestion performance A lottery, a suggestion performance suggesting that the setting suggestion performance A will be executed is executed in the game in which the lottery was executed.

On the other hand, in the advantageous section, when the start lever 135 is pressed down (lever on), the small winning combination 5 (one-card winning combination) is internally won, and the operating order other than the predetermined operating order (in this example, Irregular press (CLR, CRL, RLC, RCL)) Stop button 13
When the stop operation 7 to 139 is performed, the setting suggestion performance A lottery is not executed, so neither the setting suggestion performance A nor the suggestion performance suggesting that the setting suggestion performance A will be executed is executed.

In this example, the small winning combination 5 (one-card winning combination) is internally won, and the stop button 137 is pressed in a predetermined order of operations (in this example, sequential pressing (LCR) or scissor hitting (LRC)). ~
An example will be shown in which the setting suggestion effect A lottery is executed when the stop operation of 139 is performed, but the present invention is not limited to this. , may be executed when the stop buttons 137 to 139 are stopped in a predetermined order of operations, or
Regardless of the stop operation of the stop buttons 137 to 139, it may be executed when a predetermined winning combination (for example, a 1-card winning combination) is won, or the operation of the stop buttons 137 to 139 may be performed.
If a predetermined number of medals are paid out regardless of the stop operation (for example, if 1 is issued by an irregular press)
(e.g., when a number of medals have been paid out).

In addition, the small role 5 (1-card role) is internally won, and you can press it in order (LCR) or hit it with scissors (LR).
When the stop operation is performed in C), one medal will be paid out and the small role 5 will be internally won, and when the stop operation is performed with an irregular press, the medal will not be paid out, and the medal will be paid out when the small role 5 is internally won. It may be determined whether or not to execute the setting suggestion performance A lottery based on the number of payouts.

In other words, the conditions for executing the setting suggestion performance A lottery may be that the small winning combination 5 (one-card winning combination) is internally won and one medal is paid out.

There are two types of setting suggestion performance A lottery in this example: a low probability mode and a high probability mode in which the execution probability of setting suggestion performance A is higher than the low probability mode.

The starting conditions for the low probability mode and high probability mode are not particularly limited, but in this example,
), when transitioning from a low navigation state (normal section) to a high navigation state (advantageous section), a high probability mode for a predetermined number of games (10 games in this example) is set. In this high probability mode, a predetermined number of games (in this example, 1
0 games), the mode shifts to the low probability mode from the next game. On the other hand, in the high probability mode, if setting suggestion effect A is executed before the predetermined number of games (10 games) has elapsed (in this example, the 8th game), the setting suggestion effect A is executed in the game in which setting suggestion effect A is executed. Shift to low probability mode from the next game.

Conventionally, when the AT state, ED state, etc. end, the transition immediately goes from the high navigation state (advantageous section) to the high navigation state (advantageous section) via the low navigation state (normal section). Many players end the game immediately when they change from a low navigation state (regular section) to a high navigation state (advantageous section), but according to this example, when they change from a low navigation state (normal section) to a high navigation state ( advantageous section)
By providing a period of high probability mode with a high probability of executing setting suggestion effects, which is different from the period of low probability mode, when the navigation mode shifts from a low navigation state (normal section) to a high navigation state (advantageous section) It is possible to make it difficult to immediately end the game (immediately quit) when the game is played, and it is possible to improve the operating rate.

The conditions for setting the high-probability mode are not particularly limited. For example, the high-probability mode may be set if you lose in a confrontation performance, or if you fail in a CZ or omen performance (or if you win a bonus or AT). The high probability mode may be set if the player wins a predetermined winning combination, or the high probability mode may be set if the player wins a lottery. You may.

<Setting suggestion effect A selection table>
FIG. 29(b) is a diagram showing an example of a setting suggestion performance A selection table used for the setting suggestion performance A lottery.

The setting suggestion performance A lottery is a lottery for determining whether or not to execute the setting suggestion performance A, and if so, the content of the performance of the setting suggestion performance A. In this example, the setting suggestion effect A is determined by the lottery.
If it is decided to execute, in the game in which the lottery was executed, a suggestion effect suggesting that setting suggestion effect A will be executed is executed, and then setting suggestion effect A is executed in the next game. .

Note that the game in which the setting suggestion effect A is executed is not limited to the game following the game in which the setting suggestion effect A lottery was executed, but may be the game in which the setting suggestion effect A lottery was executed, or a game after the next game. It may be a game of. Furthermore, the game that executes the suggestion effect that suggests that setting suggestion effect A is to be executed is not limited to the game in which the setting suggestion effect A lottery is executed, and may be any game that is executed before setting suggestion effect A is executed.

Among the "effect contents" in the setting suggestion effect A selection table shown in FIG. The content of performance A is shown.

In setting suggestion performance A, among a plurality of types of performance elements, a display by a display means (in this example, the liquid crystal display device 157 shown in FIG. 23) and a sound output means (in this example, the speaker 27 shown in FIG. 25) are used.
2, 277)).

Note that there may be multiple types of performance elements used in the setting suggestion performance A, such as display by a display means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 157 shown in FIG. 23), sound output means (for example, the speaker 272 shown in FIG. 25, 277), light output from a light output means (for example, the backlight of the reels 110 to 112 shown in FIG. 23, a lamp such as the side lamp 144 shown in FIG. 23), or a movable body (for example, Movement of the shutter (shielding device) 163) shown in FIG.
For example, vibration, rotation, expansion/contraction, vertical movement), etc. can be arbitrarily combined.

The production content "even number suggestion image" is a setting suggestion production A that displays an image on the LCD that suggests that the setting value may be an even number (in this example, setting 2, setting 4, or setting 6). In addition to displaying on the display device 157, a sound suggesting that the set value may be an even number is displayed.
This is the effect output from the speakers 272 and 277.

The production content "odd number suggestion image" is a setting suggestion production A that displays an image on the LCD that suggests that the setting value may be an odd number (in this example, setting 1, setting 3, or setting 5). In addition to displaying on the display device 157, a sound suggesting that the set value may be an odd number is displayed.
This is the effect output from the speakers 272 and 277.

The production content "High setting suggestion image" is a setting suggestion production A with a high setting value (in this example,
An image suggesting that the setting value may be set to 5 or 6) is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 157, and a sound indicating that the setting value may be set to high is displayed on the speakers 272 and 277. This is a performance output from.

The effect content "Even number setting confirmed image" is a setting suggestion effect A, and the setting value is an even number (in this example,
Setting 2, Setting 4, Setting 6)
This is an effect that is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 157 and outputs a sound from the speakers 272 and 277 that suggests that the set value is determined to be an even number.

The production content "4 or more confirmed image" indicates that the setting value is confirmed to be 4 or more (in this example, setting 4, setting 5, or setting 6) as setting suggestion production A. This is an effect in which an image is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 157, and a sound indicating that the set value is determined to be 4 or higher is output from the speakers 272 and 277.

The effect content "5 or more confirmed image" is a setting suggestion effect A that displays an image that suggests that the setting value is confirmed to be 5 or more (in this example, setting 5 or setting 6) on the LCD display. This is an effect that is displayed on the device 157 and outputs a sound from the speakers 272 and 277 that suggests that the set value is determined to be 5 or higher.

The production content "6 confirmed image" displays, as setting suggestion production A, an image that suggests that the setting value is confirmed to be setting 6 on the liquid crystal display device 157, and also displays an image that suggests that the setting value is set to setting 6. This is an effect in which the speakers 272 and 277 output a sound that suggests that something is certain.

Note that the content of the setting suggestion effect is not limited to this example, and includes, for example, an effect that vaguely suggests a setting value (for example, an effect that includes a display or sound such as "Setting 5? Setting 6?"), It may be an effect that suggests a range (for example, an effect that includes a display or sound such as "Settings 2 to 4"), or the like.

<Setting suggestion effect A/low probability mode>
In the low probability mode of setting suggestion effect A, the lottery data corresponding to the low probability mode in the setting suggestion effect A selection table is referred to, and based on the current setting value, whether or not to execute setting suggestion effect A is determined. If so, the content of the setting suggestion performance A is determined.

For example, when the current setting value is setting 1 or setting 3, there is a 100% probability that "no execution" is selected and setting suggestion effect A is not executed. If the current setting value is setting 2, 99%
With a probability of 1%, setting suggestion performance A is not executed by selecting "no execution", and with a probability of 1%, setting suggestion performance A with the performance content "even number setting confirmed image" is executed.

If the current setting value is setting 4, there is a 98% probability that "No execution" will be selected and setting suggestion effect A will not be executed, and a 1% probability that the effect content "even number setting confirmed image" will be selected. The setting suggestion performance A is executed, and the setting suggestion performance A with the performance content "4 or more confirmed images" is executed with a probability of 1%.

If the current setting value is setting 5, there is a 98% probability that "No execution" will be selected and setting suggestion effect A will not be executed, and a 1% probability that the effect content "4 or more confirmed images" will be selected. The setting suggestion performance A is executed, and the setting suggestion performance A with the performance content "5 or more confirmed images" is executed with a probability of 1%.

If the current setting value is setting 6, there is a 96% probability that "No execution" will be selected and setting suggestion effect A will not be executed, and a 1% probability that the effect content "even number setting confirmed image" will be selected. Execute setting suggestion effect A, with a 1% probability, execute setting suggestion effect A with the effect content "4 or more confirmed images", and with a 1% probability, execute setting suggestion effect A with the effect content "5 or more confirmed images" Execute, with a 1% probability, the production content “
6. Execute setting suggestion effect A of ``6 confirmed image''.

<Setting suggestion effect A/High probability mode>
In the high probability mode of the setting suggestion effect A, the content of the effect of the setting suggestion effect A is determined based on the current setting value by referring to the lottery data corresponding to the high probability mode in the setting suggestion effect A selection table. Note that in the high probability mode, the probability that "no execution" is selected is 0% for all settings 1 to 6, and the setting suggestion effect A is always executed.

If the current setting value is setting 1, there is a 47% probability that setting suggestion effect A for the effect content "even number suggestion image" will be executed, and a 47% probability will execute the setting suggestion effect for the production content "odd number suggestion image". Performance A is executed, and setting suggestion performance A of the performance content "high setting suggestion image" is executed with a probability of 6%.

If the current setting value is setting 2, there is a 56% probability that the setting suggestion effect A with the effect content "even number suggestion image" will be executed, and a 38% probability that the setting suggestion effect will be executed with the production content "odd number suggestion image". Performance A is executed, setting suggestion performance A with performance content ``high setting suggestion image'' is executed with a probability of 5%, and setting suggestion performance A with performance content ``even number setting confirmed image'' is executed with a probability of 1%.

If the current setting value is setting 3, there is a 37% probability that the setting suggestion effect A with the effect content "even number suggestion image" will be executed, and a 55% probability that the setting suggestion effect will be executed with the production content "odd number suggestion image". Performance A is executed, and setting suggestion performance A of the performance content "high setting suggestion image" is executed with a probability of 8%.

If the current setting value is setting 4, there is a 54% probability that the setting suggestion effect A with the effect content "even number suggestion image" will be executed, and a 34% probability that the setting suggestion effect of the production content "odd number suggestion image" will be executed. Execute the effect A, execute the setting suggestion effect A with the effect content "high setting suggestion image" with a probability of 8%, execute the setting suggestion effect A with the effect content "even number setting confirmed image" with a 3% probability, There is a 1% chance that the performance content “4”
Execute setting suggestion effect A of ``Above confirmed image''.

If the current setting value is setting 5, there is a 31% probability that the setting suggestion effect A with the effect content "even number suggestion image" will be executed, and a 58% probability that the setting suggestion effect will be executed with the effect content "odd number suggestion image". Execute the effect A, execute the setting suggestion effect A with the effect content "high setting suggestion image" with a probability of 9%, execute the setting suggestion effect A with the effect content "4 or more confirmed image" with a 1% probability, A setting suggestion performance A with the performance content "5 or more confirmed images" is executed with a probability of 1%.

If the current setting value is setting 6, there is a 51% probability that setting suggestion effect A for the effect content "even number suggestion image" will be executed, and a 29% probability will be used to execute the setting suggestion effect for the production content "odd number suggestion image". Execute the effect A, execute the setting suggestion effect A with the effect content "high setting suggestion image" with a probability of 10%, execute the setting suggestion effect A with the effect content "even number setting confirmed image" with a 5% probability, There is a 2% chance that the performance content “
Execute the setting suggestion effect A of ``4 or more confirmed image'', and there is a 2% probability that the effect content ``5 or more confirmed image''
Setting suggestion performance A of ``6 confirmed images'' is executed with a probability of 1%.

As mentioned above, the first feature of the setting suggestion effect A selection table is that in the high probability mode, compared to the low probability mode, effects that vaguely suggest the setting value ("even number suggestion image", "odd number suggestion image", "
This means that the execution probability of "high setting suggestion image") is high. By doing so, even in the high probability mode, it is possible to prevent the player from easily guessing the set value, and it is possible to encourage the player to play the game over a long period of time.

In addition, in the low probability mode, the execution probability itself is extremely low, so if it is executed, an effect that vaguely suggests the setting value ("even number suggestion image", "odd number suggestion image", "high setting suggestion image") will be executed. By lowering the probability, it is possible to prevent the setting value from becoming too difficult to guess.

The second feature of the setting suggestion effect A selection table is that in the low probability mode, setting suggestion effect A is more likely to be executed in settings 4 to 6 than in settings 1 to 3. There are several points. By doing this, when executed in the low probability mode where the execution probability itself is extremely low, an effect that gives a good impression will be executed (in the case of settings 4 to 6, the effect that gives a better impression will be executed). (because there is a possibility that the game will be executed), it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable, and it is possible to encourage him or her to play the game for a long period of time.

Note that the selection probabilities shown in the setting suggestion effect A selection table of this example are just an example, and are not limited to the numerical values of this example. For example, in settings 1 to 3 of low probability mode, it was not supposed to be executed, but it can be set to be executed, and in high probability mode, it was always supposed to be executed, but it is not executed. You can make it happen.

<Setting suggestion production B>
Next, setting suggestion effect B will be explained using FIG. 30. FIG. 30(a) is a time chart showing an example of the game period of the high probability mode and low probability mode of setting suggestion effect B.

In this example, in the AT state or ED state of the advantageous section, a rare winning combination (in this example, small winning combination 1 (watermelon) or small winning combination 2 (cherry)) is selected by an internal lottery when the start lever 135 is pressed (lever on). In the case of internal winning, regardless of the operation order (pressing order) or operation timing of the stop operations using the stop buttons 137 to 139, by executing the setting suggestion effect B lottery using the setting suggestion effect B selection table described later. , setting suggestion effect B becomes executable.

There are two types of setting suggestion performance B lottery in this example: a low probability mode and a high probability mode in which the execution probability of setting suggestion performance B is higher than the low probability mode.

The starting conditions for the low probability mode and high probability mode are not particularly limited, but in this example,
), a low probability mode is set in a game where the gaming state is AT, and a high probability mode is set in a game where the gaming state is ED. Therefore, in this example, the frequency of execution of setting suggestion effect B in the ED state is higher than the frequency of execution of setting suggestion effect B in the AT state. Note that the frequency of execution of the setting suggestion effect B in the AT state may be set to 0%, and the configuration may be such that the setting suggestion effect B is not executed in the AT state.

In addition, in this example, the execution period of the high probability mode of setting suggestion effect B (in this example, 20 games +
α) is set to be at least a period longer than the execution period of the high probability mode of setting suggestion performance A (10 games in this example).

Although the details will be described later, in the high probability mode of setting suggestion performance B, if you win a rare role, setting suggestion performance B will always be executed, so the high probability mode of setting suggestion performance B is better than the setting suggestion performance A. It can also be said that the execution probability of the setting suggestion performance is higher than the low probability mode of the setting suggestion performance A, which has an extremely low execution probability.

In the high probability mode of setting suggestion effect B, even if setting suggestion effect B is executed before the predetermined number of games (20 games + α) has elapsed, until the end condition of the ED state is satisfied, If the high probability mode is continued and the end conditions of the ED state are met and the transition is made from the high navigation state (advantageous section) to the low navigation state (normal section), setting suggestion performances including setting suggestion performances A and B are performed. If the navigation mode is not executed and the low navigation state (normal section) shifts to the high navigation state (advantageous section) again, the high probability mode of setting suggestion performance A is set.

According to this example, by providing a high probability mode period in which the execution probability of setting suggestion effects is high, which is different from the low probability mode period, the game can be immediately ended (immediately quit) after the low probability mode period ends. This makes it possible to improve the operating rate.

In addition, in the ED state, even if a rare combination is won, the additional lottery is not executed, so the player feels like a loss even if he wins a rare combination, but as in this example, setting suggestion performance B By doing so, it is possible to alleviate the player's feelings of loss.

In addition, from the period from the end of the high probability mode of setting suggestion presentation A to the start of the high probability mode of setting suggestion presentation B, the period from the end of the high probability mode of setting suggestion presentation B to the start of the high probability mode of setting suggestion presentation A.
The period until the high probability mode starts (the period shown as the normal section in Fig. 30(a))
is preferably shorter, but it goes without saying that the present invention is not limited to this.

<Setting suggestion effect B selection table>
FIG. 30(b) is a diagram showing an example of a setting suggestion effect B selection table used in the setting suggestion effect B lottery.

The setting suggestion performance B lottery is a lottery for determining whether or not to perform the setting suggestion performance B, and if so, the content of the performance of the setting suggestion performance B. In this example, the setting suggestion effect B is determined by the lottery.
If it is determined to perform the lottery, setting suggestion performance B is performed in the game in which the lottery was performed.

Note that the game in which the setting suggestion effect B is executed is not limited to the game in which the setting suggestion effect B lottery is executed, but may be a game that is later than the game in which the setting suggestion effect B lottery is executed.

Among the "effect contents" in the setting suggestion effect B selection table shown in FIG. The content of performance B is shown.

In setting suggestion performance B, the performance is performed using only the sounds output from the sound output means (in this example, speakers 272 and 277 shown in FIG. 25) among the plurality of types of performance elements.

Note that the number of performance elements used in the setting suggestion performance B may be one or more, as long as it is smaller than the number of performance elements used in the setting suggestion performance A.
57), the sound output from the sound output means (for example, the speakers 272 and 277 shown in FIG. 25), and the light output means (for example, the backlight of the reels 110 to 112 shown in FIG. 23, Among the light output from a lamp such as the side lamp 144, the movement (e.g., vibration, rotation, expansion/contraction, vertical movement) of a movable body (e.g., the shutter (shielding device) 163 shown in FIG. 23), One, more than one, or all can be selected arbitrarily.

Furthermore, the presentation contents of the setting suggestion presentation B are output from the sound output means (in this example, the speakers 272 and 277 shown in FIG. 25) among the presentation contents of the setting suggestion presentation A explained using FIG. 29(b). Since this is the same as the performance performed using the voice that is played, the explanation thereof will be omitted.

<Setting suggestion effect B/low probability mode>
In the low probability mode of setting suggestion effect B, the lottery data corresponding to the low probability mode in the setting suggestion effect B selection table is referred to, and based on the current setting value, it is determined whether or not to execute setting suggestion effect B. If so, the content of the setting suggestion performance B is determined.

For example, if the current setting value is Setting 1 to Setting 3, there is a 100% probability that "No execution" will be selected.
Select and do not execute setting suggestion effect B. If the current setting value is setting 4, there is a 99% probability that "No execution" will be selected and setting suggestion effect B will not be executed, and a 1% probability that the effect content "4" will be selected.
Execute the setting suggestion performance B of "Confirmed voice".

If the current setting value is setting 5, there is a 98% probability that "No execution" will be selected and setting suggestion effect B will not be executed, and a 1% probability that the effect content "4 or more confirmed voice" will not be executed. Setting suggestion performance B is executed, and setting suggestion performance B with the performance content "5 or more confirmed voice" is executed with a probability of 1%.

If the current setting value is setting 6, there is a 97% probability that "No execution" will be selected and setting suggestion effect B will not be executed, and a 1% probability that the production content "4 or more confirmed audio" will be selected. Execute setting suggestion performance B, execute setting suggestion performance B with performance content "5 or more confirmed audio" with a 1% probability, execute setting suggestion performance B with performance content "6 confirmed audio" with a 1% probability .

<Setting suggestion effect B/high probability mode>
In the high probability mode of the setting suggestion performance B, the lottery data corresponding to the high probability mode of the setting suggestion performance B selection table is referred to, and the content of the performance of the setting suggestion performance B is determined based on the current setting value. In the high probability mode, the probability that "no execution" will be selected is 0% for all settings 1 to 6, and the configuration is such that setting suggestion effect B is always executed.

If the current setting value is setting 1, there is a 38% probability that the setting suggestion effect B for the effect content "even number suggestion voice" will be executed, and a 57% probability will be used to suggest the setting effect for the production content "odd number suggestion voice". Performance B is executed, and setting suggestion performance B with the performance content "high setting suggestion sound" is executed with a probability of 5%.

If the current setting value is setting 2, there is a 57% probability that setting suggestion performance B with the production content "even number suggestion audio" will be executed, and a 38% probability will execute the setting suggestion production B with the production content "odd number suggestion audio". Performance B is executed, and setting suggestion performance B with the performance content "high setting suggestion sound" is executed with a probability of 5%.

If the current setting value is setting 3, there is a 37% probability that setting suggestion performance B with the production content "even number suggestion audio" will be executed, and a 55% probability will execute the setting suggestion production B with the production content "odd number suggestion audio". Performance B is executed, and setting suggestion performance B with the performance content "high setting suggestion sound" is executed with a probability of 8%.

If the current setting value is setting 4, there is a 54% probability that the setting suggestion effect B with the effect content "even number suggestion voice" will be executed, and a 36% probability that the setting suggestion effect of the production content "odd number suggestion voice" will be executed. Performance B is executed, setting suggestion performance B with performance content "high setting suggestion sound" is executed with a probability of 8%, and setting suggestion performance B with performance content "4 or more confirmed sound" is executed with a probability of 2%.

If the current setting value is setting 5, there is a 34% probability that setting suggestion performance B with the production content "even number suggestion audio" will be executed, and a 51% probability will execute the setting suggestion production B with the production content "odd number suggestion audio". Execute production B, execute setting suggestion production B with production content "high setting suggestion audio" with a 10% probability, execute setting suggestion production B with production content "4 or more confirmed audio" with a 3% probability, There is a 2% chance that the performance content “5”
Execute the setting suggestion performance B of "Confirmed voice".

If the current setting value is setting 6, there is a 49% probability that the setting suggestion effect B with the effect content "even number suggestion voice" will be executed, and a 33% probability that the setting suggestion effect of the production content "odd number suggestion voice" will be executed. Execute the effect B, and execute the setting suggestion effect B with the effect content "high setting suggestion voice" with a probability of 10%, 3.5%
With a probability of 2.5%, setting suggestion performance B with the production content "4 or more confirmed audio" will be executed, and with a 2.5% probability, setting suggestion performance B with the production content "5 or more confirmed audio" will be executed, with a 2% probability Execute setting suggestion effect B with content "6 confirmed voice".

As mentioned above, the first feature of the setting suggestion effect B selection table is that in the high probability mode, compared to the low probability mode, effects that vaguely suggest the setting value ("even number suggestion image", "odd number suggestion image", "
This means that the execution probability of "high setting suggestion image") is high. By doing so, even in the high probability mode, it is possible to prevent the player from easily guessing the set value, and it is possible to encourage the player to play the game over a long period of time.

In addition, in the low probability mode, the execution probability itself is extremely low, so if it is executed, an effect that vaguely suggests the setting value ("even number suggestion image", "odd number suggestion image", "high setting suggestion image") will be executed. By lowering the probability, it is possible to prevent the setting value from becoming too difficult to guess.

Also, the second feature of the setting suggestion effect B selection table is that in the low probability mode, setting suggestion effect A is more likely to be executed in settings 4 to 6 than in settings 1 to 3. There are several points. By doing this, when executed in the low probability mode where the execution probability itself is extremely low, an effect that gives a good impression will be executed (in the case of settings 4 to 6, the effect that gives a better impression will be executed). (because there is a possibility that the game will be executed), it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable, and it is possible to encourage him or her to play the game for a long period of time.

Note that the selection probabilities shown in the setting suggestion effect A selection table of this example are just an example, and are not limited to the numerical values of this example. For example, in settings 1 to 3 of low probability mode, it was not supposed to be executed, but it can be set to be executed, and in high probability mode, it was always supposed to be executed, but it is not executed. You can make it happen.

<Main control unit main processing>
First, the main control unit main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described using FIG. Note that this figure is a flowchart showing the flow of main processing by the main control section.

As described above, when the power is turned on, the main control unit 300 receives a start signal (reset signal).
A start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 338 is provided to output the . The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 to which this activation signal has been input is reset-started by the reset interrupt and executes the main control section main processing shown in FIG. 31 according to the control program stored in advance in the ROM 306.

When the power is turned on, first, various initial settings are performed in step S101. This initial setting includes setting the stack initial value to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, setting interrupt prohibition, initial setting of the I/O 310, initial setting of various variables stored in the RAM 308, and setting of the WDT.
314 and sets initial values.

In step S102, a bet number setting/start operation acceptance process is executed. Here, it is checked whether or not medals have been inserted, and preparations are made to send an insert command indicating that medals have been inserted. In addition, if the player wins a re-playing combination in the previous game, the process of inserting the same number of medals as the number of medals inserted in the previous game is performed, so there is no need for the player to insert medals. Also, it is checked whether or not the start lever 135 has been operated, and the start lever 135 is checked.
If there is an operation of 35, the process advances to step S103.

In step S103, a winning line determination process is performed to determine the number of inserted medals and to determine a valid winning line.

In step S104, the random number generated by the random number generation circuit 316 is acquired, and a winning combination internal lottery process is performed. In the winning combination internal lottery process, the winning combination lottery table stored in the ROM 306 is read out according to the current gaming state, and an internal lottery is performed using this and the obtained random number value, and the results of this internal lottery are displayed. Preparations are made for transmitting the internal lottery command to the first sub-control unit 400. As a result of the internal lottery, if any winning combination (including the activation combination) is internally won, the flag for that winning combination is turned on.

In step S105, a reel stop data selection process is performed to select reel stop data based on the internal lottery result of the winning combination internal lottery process. Note that this reel stop data is stored in the ROM 306 of the main control section 300. Further, in step S105, a reel stop data command containing information regarding the selected reel stop data is sent to the first sub-control unit 400.
Prepare to send to.

In step S106, based on the start lever operation, the performance state control process regarding the control of the AT system game state described above is executed. In step S107, production processing is executed. In this production processing, various production controls and the like are performed.

In step S108, a reel rotation start process is executed, and rotation of all reels 110 to 112 is started.

In step S109, reel stop control processing is performed. In the reel stop control process, stop buttons 137 to 139 can be accepted, and when any stop button is pressed, a stop table of reel stop data is created in order to stop the reel corresponding to the pressed stop button. Refer to the reel 110~ according to the number of drawn frames set in the stop table.
112 is stopped. When all the reels 110 to 112 have stopped, the process advances to step S110. In addition, in this step S109, for each stop operation, a stop button reception command related to the stop button 137 to 139 that has been stopped (in detail, for the first stop operation, a stop button reception 1 command, a second stop operation For, stop button reception 2 command,
For the third stop operation, preparations are made to send a stop button reception 3 command) to the first sub-control unit 400, and for the stop of each reel, a reel stop command regarding the reel stop position (for details, A reel stop 1 command is sent to the first sub-control unit 400 for the first stop reel, a reel stop 2 command is sent to the second stop operation, and a reel stop 3 command is sent to the third stop operation. Prepare to send.

In step S110, a winning determination process is performed to determine winning. In this prize determination process,
When a symbol combination corresponding to some winning combination is displayed on the activated winning line 114, it is determined that the winning combination has been won. For example, if "Bell-Bell-Bell" are aligned on the activated winning line, it is determined that a small winning combination 3 (Bell) has been won. In addition, in this step S110, the first sub-control unit 400 sends a winning determination command indicating the winning determination result.
Prepare for sending to.

In step S111, medal award processing is performed. In the medal awarding process, if a prize is won in any winning combination that has a payout, the number of medals corresponding to the winning combination is paid out according to the number of winning lines.

In step S112, a gaming state control process is performed. In the game state control process, processing related to transition of each RT-based game state is performed, and the game state is transitioned when the start condition or end condition is satisfied. Also, preparations are made for transmitting a gaming status command including information indicating the current RT-based gaming status.

In step S113, the performance state control process regarding the control of the AT system game state described above is executed. In step S114, high navigation state termination processing regarding the termination of the high navigation state is executed.

With the above, one game ends. Thereafter, the game progresses by returning to step S102 and repeating the above-described process. The various commands prepared in each step above are used in the command setting transmission process of the main control unit timer interrupt process (step S2 in FIG. 32), which will be described later.
06).

<Main control unit timer interrupt processing>
Next, the main control unit timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described using FIG. 32. Note that this figure is a flowchart showing the flow of main control section timer interrupt processing.

The main control unit 300 includes a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined period (approximately once every 2 ms in this embodiment). Start processing at a predetermined cycle.

In step S201, timer interrupt start processing is performed. In this timer interrupt start processing, C
Processing such as temporarily saving the values of each register of the PU 304 to the stack area is performed.

In step S202, the count value of the WDT 314 is set to the initial setting value (32 in this embodiment).
．． To prevent WDT interrupts from occurring for longer than 8ms (to prevent processing abnormalities from being detected),
The WDT 314 is restarted periodically (in this embodiment, once every approximately 2 ms, which is the cycle of the main control unit timer interrupt).

In step S203, input port status update processing is performed. In this input port status update process, the detection signals of the sensor circuits 320 of the various sensors 318 are input through the input ports of the I/O 310, the presence or absence of the detection signals is monitored, and the RAM 308 is partitioned for each type of sensor 318. The signal state is stored in the provided signal state storage area.

In step S204, various game processes are executed, and processes according to the interrupt status are executed. In step S2005, timer update processing is performed. More specifically, various timers are updated in respective time units.

In step S206, a command setting transmission process is performed, and various commands that have been prepared for transmission are transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. In the first sub-control unit 400, depending on the command type included in the received output schedule information, it becomes possible to determine performance control according to changes in game control in the main control unit 300, and also to determine the performance control according to the change in game control in the main control unit 300. Based on the information of the command data, it becomes possible to determine the content of production control.

In step S207, external output signal setting processing is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is outputted to the information input circuit 652 separate from the slot machine 100 via the information output circuit 334.

In step S208, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, first, in step S203, the signal states of the various sensors 318 stored in the signal state storage area are read out, and the presence or absence of errors related to medal insertion abnormalities, medal payout abnormalities, etc. is monitored, and if an error is detected, (Illustration omitted) Executes error handling. Furthermore, settings are made for the medal selector 170 (a medal blocker operated by a solenoid provided in the medal selector 170), various lamps 339, and various 7-segment (SEG) indicators according to the current gaming state.

In step S209, it is monitored whether the low voltage signal is on. Then, if the low voltage signal is on (when power cutoff is detected), the process proceeds to step S211, and if the low voltage signal is off (when power cutoff is not detected), the process proceeds to step S210.

In step S210, various processes for terminating the timer interrupt termination process are performed. In this timer interrupt termination process, the values of each register temporarily saved in step S2001 are set in each original register. Thereafter, the process returns to the main control section main processing shown in FIG.

On the other hand, in step S211, specific variables and stack pointers for returning to the state at power outage upon power restoration are saved to a predetermined area of the RAM 308 as recovery data, and power outage processing such as initialization of input/output ports is performed. After that, the process returns to the main control section main processing shown in FIG.

<Processing of the first sub-control unit>
Next, the processing of the first sub-control unit 400 will be explained using FIG. 33. In addition, Fig. 33 (
a) is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400; FIG. 33(b) is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing by the first sub-control unit 400. FIG. 33(c) is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing by the first sub-control unit 400.

First, the main processing of the first sub-control unit 400 will be explained using FIG. 33(a).

When the power is turned on, initialization processing is first executed in step S301. In this initialization process, initialization of input/output ports, initialization of the storage area in the RAM 408, etc. are performed. Through this process, an area for storing internal winning information, which is information representing the results of internal winnings, and an area for storing RT update information, which is information representing the gaming status, are each stored in the RAM 4.
It will be established in 08.

In step S302, it is determined whether the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, step S302
Proceed to step 3. In step S303, 0 is assigned to the timer variable. Step S3
At step 04, command processing, which is processing corresponding to each command received from the main control unit 300, is executed.

In step S305, production control processing is performed. Here, preparations for the performance are made in accordance with the performance reservation information in the performance reservation area provided in the RAM 408. For example, this preparation includes
It includes performing processes such as reading out the effect data from the ROM 406, and performing update processing of the effect data when it is necessary to update the effect data.

In step S306, sound control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S305. For example, if there is a command to the sound source IC 418 in the performance data read in step S305, this command is output to the sound source IC 418. In step S307, step S30
Lamp control processing is performed based on the processing result of step 5. For example, if the performance data read in step S305 includes instructions for various lamps 420, this instruction is sent to the drive circuit 420.
Output to.

In step S308, shutter control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S3005. For example, if the effect data read in step S305 includes a command for the shutter 163, this command is output to the drive circuit 424. In step S309, information output processing is performed to perform settings for transmitting a command to the second sub-control unit 500 based on the processing result of step S305. For example, if there is a command to be sent to the second sub-control unit 500 in the effect data read in step S305, settings are made to output this control command,
Return to step S302.

Next, the command reception interrupt processing of the first sub-control unit 400 will be explained using FIG. 33(b). This command reception interrupt process is a process that is executed when the first sub-control unit 400 detects a strobe signal output by the main control unit 300. In step S401 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output by the main control unit 300 is stored in the RAM 40 as an unprocessed command.
It is stored in the command storage area provided in 8.

Next, the first sub-control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described using FIG. 33(c). The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined period (once every 2 ms in this embodiment), and uses this timer interrupt as a trigger to perform timer interrupt processing in a predetermined manner. Execute at the cycle of

In step S501, 1 is added to the value in the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S302 in the first sub-control unit main processing shown in FIG. 33(a), and the value is stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S302, it is determined that the value of the timer variable is 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms×10). In step S502,
Sending the command to the second sub-control unit 500 set in step S309, updating the random value for effect, etc. are performed.

<Processing of second sub-control unit>
Next, the processing of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described using FIG. 34. In addition, Fig. 34 (
a) is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500; FIG. 34(b) is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing by the second sub-control unit 500. FIG. 34(c) is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing by the second sub-control unit 500. FIG. 34(d) is a flowchart of image control processing by the second sub-control unit 500.

First, in step S601 of FIG. 34(a), various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, initialization processing is first performed in step S601. In this initialization process, initialization of input/output ports, initialization of the storage area in the RAM 508, initialization of the storage area in the VRAM 536, etc. are performed.

In step S602, it is determined whether the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, step S603
Shift to processing. In step S4003, 0 is assigned to the timer variable. Step S6
In step 04, command processing is performed. In the command processing, the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500 determines whether a command has been received from the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 .

In step S605, production control processing is performed. Specifically, if there is a new command in step S604, processing corresponding to this command is performed. For example, a process of reading out effect data for controlling an image related to a background image from the ROM 506 is executed. It also includes performing processes such as reading out performance data other than this from the ROM 506, and performing update processing of the performance data when it is necessary to update the performance data.

In step S606, image control processing (described in detail later) is performed based on the processing result of step S605. For example, if there is an image control command in the effect data read in step S605, image control corresponding to this command is performed. For example, display images (notification images,
image control regarding the background image) is performed. When this image control process is completed, step S
Return to 602.

Next, the command reception interrupt processing of the second sub-control unit 500 will be explained using FIG. 34(b). This command reception interrupt process is a process that is executed when the second sub-control unit 500 detects a strobe signal output by the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S701 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output by the first sub-control unit 400 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 508.

Next, the second sub-control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described using FIG. 34(c). The second sub-control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined period (once every 2 ms in this embodiment), and uses this timer interrupt as a trigger to perform timer interrupt processing in a predetermined manner. Execute at the cycle of

In step S801, 1 is added to the value in the timer variable storage area of the RAM 508 described in step S602 in the second sub-control unit main processing shown in FIG. 34(a), and the value is stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S602, it is determined that the value of the timer variable is 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms×10). In step S802,
Performs updating of random numbers for presentation, etc.

Next, using FIG. 34(d), step S6 in the main process of the second sub-control unit 500
The image control processing of No. 06 will be explained. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of image control processing.

In step S901, an image data transfer instruction is issued. Here, the CPU 504 first swaps the drawing area designations of the display area A and the display area B of the VRAM 536. As a result, one frame of the image stored in the display area that is not designated as the drawing area is displayed on the effect image display device 157. Next, the CPU 504 writes the ROM coordinates (transfer source address of the ROM 506) into the attribute register of the VDP 534 based on the position information table, etc.
After setting the VRAM coordinates (transfer destination address of VRAM 536), etc., a command to start transferring image data from ROM 506 to VRAM 536 is set. VDP534 is
Image data is transferred from the ROM 506 to VR based on the command set in the attribute register.
Transfer to AM536. Thereafter, the VDP 534 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 504.

In step S902, it is determined whether or not a transfer end interrupt signal is input from the VDP 534. If the transfer end interrupt signal is input, the process advances to step S903; otherwise, the transfer end interrupt signal is input. wait until

In step S903, parameters are set based on the production scenario configuration table, attribute data, and the like. Here, the CPU 504 controls the VR in step S901.
In order to form a display image in the display area A or B of the VRAM 536 based on the image data transferred to the AM 536, information on the image data that constitutes the display image (coordinate axes of the VRAM 536, image size, VRAM coordinates (arrangement coordinates), transparency) is required. degree, etc.) to the VDP 534. V
The DP 534 performs parameter settings according to attributes based on instructions stored in the attribute register.

In step S904, a drawing instruction is given. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 504 uses the VDP
534 to start drawing the image. The VDP 534 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer according to instructions from the CPU 504.

In step S905, it is determined whether or not a generation end interrupt signal from the VDP 534 based on the end of image drawing has been input, and if the generation end interrupt signal has been input, step S90
If not, it waits for the generation end interrupt signal to be input.

In step S906, a scene display counter that is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 508 and counts how many scenes of images have been generated is incremented (+1), and the process ends.

<Example 1 of setting suggestion performance A>
Next, an example 1 of the setting suggestion effect A will be described using FIG. 35. Note that FIG. 35 is a diagram illustrating example 1 of the setting suggestion effect A in chronological order.

Production example 1 is a production example where, in a game in which the low probability mode of setting suggestion production A is set, a small winning combination 5 (one-card winning combination) is internally won in an internal lottery when the start lever 135 is pressed (lever on). It shows.

The state shown in FIG. 35(a) is the state before the start lever 135 is pressed down (lever on).

In this example, a normal effect is displayed in the main display area of the liquid crystal display device 157, normal BGM is output from the speakers 272 and 277, and a low probability setting suggestion effect A is displayed in the sub display area of the liquid crystal display device 157. A character C1 (in this example, a sabohani character) indicating that a mode is set is displayed.

The state shown in FIG. 35(b) is the state immediately after the start lever 135 is pressed down (lever on). In this example, the small winning combination 5 (one-card winning combination) is internally won in an internal lottery when the start lever 135 is pressed down (lever on).

<Production example 1 of setting suggestion production A/Press in order>
The state shown in FIG. 35(c) is a state in which the stop buttons 137 to 139 are stopped by sequential pressing (LCR).

In this example, the order of operations (pressing in order) in which setting suggestion effect A can be performed is from stop button 137 to
Since the stop operation No. 139 has been performed, it is decided to execute a setting suggestion effect A lottery using the setting suggestion effect A selection table, and to execute the setting suggestion effect A based on the lottery.

In addition, since it has been decided that setting suggestion effect A will be executed in the next game, a treasure box imitation is displayed in the main display area of the liquid crystal display device 157 as a suggestion effect suggesting that setting suggestion effect A will be executed. Character C2 is displayed.

The state shown in FIG. 35(d) is a state in which setting suggestion effect A is executed in the next game.
In this example, as setting suggestion effect A, a video PD1 (4 or more confirmed images) of rice popping out of an opened treasure chest is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157, and from the speakers 272 and 277, a video exclusively for setting suggestion effect A is displayed. BGM (4 or more confirmed sounds) is being output.

Since players cannot distinguish the advantages and disadvantages of AT by looking at it, it is necessary to encourage players to play low base games where AT is advantageous, but according to this example, in low base games By executing setting suggestion performance A, it is possible to encourage (encourage) the player to play a low base game where AT is advantageous, and since it is possible to suggest the setting value, it is possible to increase the player's interest. can be increased.

<Example 1 of setting suggestion effect A/Irregular press>
The state shown in FIG. 35(e) is an irregular press (CLR, CRL, RLC, RCL)
This is the state in which the stop buttons 137 to 139 have been operated, and the state shown in FIG. 35(f) is the state showing the effect in the next game.

In this example, the stop button 13 is pressed in an operation order (irregular press) that makes setting suggestion effect A impossible to execute.
Since the stop operation from 7 to 139 was performed, setting suggestion effect A (in this example, video PD1),
The suggestion effect (in this example, character C2) that suggests that setting suggestion effect A is to be executed is
Neither is executed.

If the setting suggestion performance A is executed with an irregular press that will result in a high base game, the player will be able to see through the setting while suppressing the number of medals inserted, but according to this example, the irregular press that will result in a high base game Since the setting suggestion effect A is not executed by pressing, it is possible to prevent the setting from being overlooked due to a high base game, and it is possible to encourage (prompt) the player to play a low base game.

<Example 2 of setting suggestion performance A>
Next, with reference to FIG. 36, a second example of the setting suggestion effect A will be described. Note that FIG. 36 is a diagram illustrating example 2 of the setting suggestion effect A in chronological order.

Production example 2 is a production example where, in a game in which the high probability mode of setting suggestion production A is set, a small winning combination 5 (one-card winning combination) is internally won in an internal lottery when the start lever 135 is pressed (lever on). It shows.

The state shown in FIG. 36(a) is the state immediately after the start lever 135 is pressed down (lever on).

In this example, a normal effect is displayed in the main display area of the liquid crystal display device 157, normal BGM is output from the speakers 272 and 277, and a high probability setting suggestion effect A is displayed in the sub display area of the liquid crystal display device 157. A character C3 (in this example, a sabohani character covered with an aura image) indicating that a mode is set is displayed.
In this example, the small winning combination 5 (one-card winning combination) is internally won in an internal lottery when the start lever 135 is pressed down (lever on).

<Production example 2 of setting suggestion production A/Press in order>
The state shown in FIG. 36(b) is a state in which the stop buttons 137 to 139 are stopped by sequential pressing (LCR).

In this example, the order of operations (pressing in order) in which setting suggestion effect A can be performed is from stop button 137 to
Since the stop operation No. 139 has been performed, it is decided to execute a setting suggestion effect A lottery using the setting suggestion effect A selection table, and to execute the setting suggestion effect A based on the lottery.

In addition, since it has been decided that setting suggestion effect A will be executed in the next game, a treasure box imitation is displayed in the main display area of the liquid crystal display device 157 as a suggestion effect suggesting that setting suggestion effect A will be executed. Character C2 is displayed.

The state shown in FIG. 36(c) is a state in which setting suggestion effect A is executed in the next game.

In this example, as setting suggestion effect A, a video PD2 (5 or more confirmed images) in which a panda character jumps out of an opened treasure chest is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157, and setting suggestion effect A is displayed from the speakers 272 and 277. Dedicated BGM (5 or more confirmed sounds) is output.

Since players cannot distinguish the advantages and disadvantages of AT by looking at it, it is necessary to encourage players to play low base games where AT is advantageous, but according to this example, in low base games By executing setting suggestion performance A, it is possible to encourage (encourage) the player to play a low base game where AT is advantageous, and since it is possible to suggest the setting value, it is possible to increase the player's interest. can be increased.

FIG. 36(d) shows a state in which the setting suggestion performance A has been completed and the high probability mode of the setting suggestion performance A has been shifted to the low probability mode.

In this example, when a predetermined period of time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed after the display of the setting suggestion effect A started, the setting suggestion effect A is ended and the normal effect is displayed in the main display area of the liquid crystal display device 157. , the speakers 272 and 277 output normal BGM, and the liquid crystal display device 1
In the sub-display area 57, a character C1 (in this example, a sabohani character) is displayed which suggests that the low probability mode of setting suggestion effect A is set.

<Example 2 of setting suggestion effect A/Irregular press>
The state shown in FIG. 36(e) is an irregular press (CLR, CRL, RLC, RCL)
This is the state in which the stop buttons 137 to 139 have been operated, and the state shown in FIG. 36(f) is the state showing the effect in the next game.

In this example, the stop button 13 is pressed in an operation order (irregular press) that makes setting suggestion effect A impossible to execute.
Since the stop operation from 7 to 139 was performed, setting suggestion effect A (in this example, video PD2),
The suggestion effect (in this example, character C2) that suggests that setting suggestion effect A is to be executed is
Neither is executed.

If the setting suggestion performance A is executed with an irregular press that will result in a high base game, the player will be able to see through the setting while suppressing the number of medals inserted, but according to this example, the irregular press that will result in a high base game Since the setting suggestion effect A is not executed by pressing, it is possible to prevent the setting from being overlooked due to a high base game, and it is possible to encourage (prompt) the player to play a low base game.

In addition, in this example, when the stop button 137 to 139 is stopped by an irregular press (CLR, CRL, RLC, RCL), the high probability mode of setting suggestion performance A is continued, and the high probability mode The character C3 (in this example, the Sabohani character covered with an aura image) continues to be displayed, which suggests that the setting is set, but the high probability mode of the setting suggestion effect A is triggered by the irregular press stop operation. The configuration may be such that the transition is made to the low probability mode.

In addition, in the setting suggestion performance A of this example, the BGM dedicated to setting suggestion performance A is also different depending on the setting suggestion image, but the BGM dedicated to setting suggestion performance A is common regardless of which setting suggestion image is displayed.
You may also output . That is, in this case, the BGM dedicated to setting suggestion performance A is BGM that notifies that setting suggestion performance A is being executed.

Further, although the setting suggestion effect A in this example is not executed in the AT state or the ED state, it may be possible to execute it also in the AT state or the ED state.

<Example of setting suggestion performance B>
Next, an example of the setting suggestion effect B will be described using FIG. 37. Note that FIG. 37 shows
It is a diagram showing a presentation example of setting suggestion presentation B in chronological order.

This production example is a production example where, in a game in which the high probability mode of setting suggestion production B is set, the small winning combination 5 (one-card winning combination) is internally won in the internal lottery when the start lever 135 is pressed (lever on). It shows.

The states shown in FIGS. 37(a) to 37(c) are AT states in advantageous sections. In the state shown in FIG. 37(a), the number of remaining games in the advantageous section is 20 in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157.
1 game is being played, and BGM is output from the speakers 272 and 277 during AT.

In the subsequent state shown in FIG. 2B, the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157 notifies that there are 200 games remaining in the advantageous section, and the speakers 272 and 277 output BGM during AT. There is.

In the subsequent state shown in FIG. 6(c), the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157 notifies you that the next game will transition to the ED state, and the speakers 272 and 277 announce the B during AT.
GM is output.

On the other hand, the states shown in FIGS. 37(d) to 37(f) are ED states in advantageous sections. Figure 37 (
In the state shown in d), the ED effect is executed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157, and BGM during the ED is output from the speakers 272 and 277.

In the subsequent state shown in FIG. 6(e), since the rare role (in this example, small role 1 (watermelon)) was internally won in the internal lottery when the start lever 135 was pressed (lever on), the setting suggestion performance B was selected. A setting suggestion performance B lottery is executed using a selection table, and it is decided to execute setting suggestion performance B based on the lottery. In this case, 4 or more confirmed voices) are output.

In the subsequent state shown in FIG. 6(f), since the rare winning combination (in this example, the small winning combination 2 (cherry)) was internally won in the internal lottery when the start lever 135 was pressed (lever on), the setting suggestion performance B was selected. A setting suggestion performance B lottery is executed using a selection table, and it is decided to execute setting suggestion performance B based on the lottery. In this case, a high setting suggestion sound) is output.

According to this example, by executing setting suggestion performance B, it is possible to suggest setting values, thereby increasing the player's interest. In addition, since it is possible to execute setting suggestion performance B (second setting suggestion performance) that suggests the currently set setting value, which is different from setting suggestion performance A (first setting suggestion performance), setting suggestion performance B (second setting suggestion performance) can be executed. Variations can be increased, and expectations and interest in the setting suggestion performance can be increased.

In addition, according to this example, there is a high possibility that setting suggestion presentations will be executed more often than in the low probability mode of setting suggestion presentations, so performing setting suggestion presentations with fewer presentation elements will prevent setting suggestion presentations from feeling bothersome. can be prevented. Further, in the ED state, it is possible to prevent interference with other performances, to perform various performances, and to improve the interest of the game. In addition, in the ED state, even if a rare combination is won, the additional lottery is not executed, so the player feels like a loss even if he wins a rare combination, but as in this example, setting suggestion performance B By doing so, it is possible to alleviate the player's feelings of loss.

In addition, in this example, in addition to the BGM during ED, the BGM dedicated to setting suggestion performance B is output from the speakers 272 and 277, but instead of the BGM during ED, only the BGM dedicated to setting suggestion performance B is output. It may be configured as follows.

Further, although the setting suggestion effect B in this example is executed in the AT state or the ED state, it may be possible to execute it in states other than the AT state or the ED state, or it may be executed only in the ED state. Also good.

As explained above, the game machine according to the present example (for example, the slot machine shown in FIG. 1) has a plurality of reels (for example, the reel 110 shown in FIG.
- 112), and a plurality of stop buttons (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139 shown in FIG.
), a setting means (for example, a setting key, a setting switch) capable of setting one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting 1 to setting 6), and a Internal lottery means (for example,
After the plurality of reels are rotated, the reel corresponding to the stop button on which the stop operation was performed is selected based on the lottery result derived by the internal lottery means. A stop control means that performs stop control (for example, reel stop control processing shown in FIG. 31), and provision of gaming value (for example, medals) according to the stopping manner of the plurality of reels stopped by the stop control means. a game value imparting means (for example, the medal payout process shown in FIG. 31), and a game control means (for example, the game state control shown in FIG. 31) that controls the progress of the game and can change the ease of acquiring the game value. processing) and a performance control means (for example, a first sub-control unit 400 and a second sub-control unit 500 shown in FIG. 25) for executing a performance according to the progress of the game, the game machine comprising: The game control means selects one game state from a plurality of game states including at least a first game state (for example, normal game state) and a second game state different from the first game state (for example, AT state). can be set, and the first gaming state is terminated based on the fact that the first condition is satisfied (for example, winning the AT lottery) while the first gaming state is set, The second gaming state can be set, and the second gaming state is set after the first condition is satisfied based on the operation result of the stop button by the player in the first gaming state. The stop control means is a means that can change the ease of acquiring the gaming value in the gaming state of
Press order bell RLC), small role 3c (press order bell CRL), small role 3e (press order bell CLR), small role 3
f (any one of the pressing order bells RCL) is derived, when the stop button is operated in the first operation (for example, sequential pressing (LCR), scissors hitting (LRC)), the plurality of In a game in which the reels are stopped in a first stopping manner (for example, a symbol combination other than "bell symbol - bell symbol - bell symbol") and the first lottery result is derived, the stop button is pressed in the second When operated by an operation (for example, an irregular press (CLR, CRL, RLC, RCL)), the plurality of reels are moved to the second stop state (for example, "Bell symbol - Bell symbol - Bell symbol") the plurality of reels stop in the first stop mode (for example, when one medal is paid out); (For example, when 12 medals are paid out), the game control means gives more of the game value, and the game control means determines the result of the first lottery in the first game state. is derived and the plurality of reels stop in the second stop mode, the first lottery result is derived in the first gaming state, and the plurality of reels stop in the first stop mode. In the case where the ease of acquiring the game value in the second game state set after the first condition is satisfied is made more disadvantageous to the player than if the game stops at In games where the stop operation is performed by pressing, the AT lottery is not executed, or the number of games in one set of AT games is reduced, or the AT is determined by the number of irregular presses.
The initial number of games and the probability of winning are disadvantageous, and points are drawn every game, and the performance of the AT is determined according to the points. In normal games, in games where the stop operation is performed with an irregular press, the probability of winning the AT lottery is lowered, the frequency of execution of the operation navigation in AT games is lowered, the set continuation lottery is not executed in AT games, the set continuation lottery is not executed in AT games (or always change it unfavorably), and the effect control means controls the game in which the second condition is met (for example, the game in which the small winning combination 5 (one-card winning) is won internally). ), when the stop button is operated in the first operation, a first setting suggestion effect that suggests the currently set setting value (for example, a setting suggestion effect A shown in FIG. 35(e)) This game machine is characterized in that it is a means capable of executing the video PD1) and the setting suggestion performance A (video PD2)) shown in FIG. 36(c).

Players cannot tell the advantages and disadvantages of AT by looking at it, so it is necessary to encourage players to play low base games where AT is advantageous, but it is possible to perform setting suggestion effects in low base games. By doing so, it is possible to encourage (encourage) players to play low base games where AT is advantageous, and it is also possible to suggest setting values, so it is possible to increase the interest of players. .

Note that the "condition for the second condition to be satisfied" according to the present invention is not limited to internal winning of a winning combination, but also includes winning a certain winning combination, a certain gaming state (for example, ED state of an advantageous section) , winning a certain lottery, or that a certain performance (for example, a continuous performance) is being executed.

Further, the performance control means does not perform the first setting suggestion performance if the stop button is operated in the second operation even if the second condition is satisfied (or
may not be carried out).

With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the setting from being overlooked due to high base games, and it is also possible to encourage (prompt) players to play low base games.

Further, the second condition is that the internal lottery means selects a second lottery result (for example, a small winning number 5).
(1 card role)) may be derived. Since the winning combination that adjusts the base is only for adjusting the base, it may be used to adjust the frequency of execution of the setting suggestion effect. However, the second condition is
If it involves deriving a second lottery result by an internal lottery means, the setting suggestion presentation can be performed by using the winning of a winning combination different from the winning combination for which the base is adjusted as the execution condition of the setting suggestion presentation. It becomes possible to easily adjust the execution frequency.

Further, the first setting suggestion performance may be a performance that can be executed in the first gaming state.

Even if the first setting suggestion effect is executed during AT, the advantage or disadvantage of AT has already been determined during AT, and the timing is too late to encourage low base play, so it is not necessary to execute it during normal play. However, if the first setting suggestion performance is a performance that can be executed in the first gaming state, the first setting suggestion performance is a performance that also includes the effect of encouraging low base play where AT is advantageous. Therefore, by executing it in a normal game before AT, it becomes possible to more effectively encourage a low base game in which AT is advantageous.

Further, the effect control means may generate a second setting suggestion effect different from the first setting suggestion effect, which suggests the currently set setting value (for example, setting suggestion effect B shown in FIG. 37(e)).
(4 or more confirmed voices)) may be used.

With such a configuration, it is possible to increase the variations of the setting suggestion performance, and it is possible to increase expectations and interest in the setting suggestion performance.

Furthermore, the game machine according to the present example (for example, the slot machine shown in FIG. 1) includes a plurality of reels (for example, reels 110 to 112 shown in FIG. 1) that are decorated with a plurality of types of symbols and are driven to rotate.
A plurality of stop buttons (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139 shown in FIG. 1) provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels and for individually stopping the rotation of the reels, and a plurality of setting values (for example, Based on a setting means (for example, a setting key, a setting switch) that can set one of the setting values of setting 1 to setting 6) and lottery information corresponding to the plurality of setting values set by the setting means. Based on the internal lottery means (for example, the winning combination internal lottery process shown in FIG. 31) that derives the internal winning result, and the lottery result derived by the internal lottery means after the plurality of reels are rotationally driven, A stop control means (for example, reel stop control processing shown in FIG. 31) that performs stop control to stop the reel corresponding to the stop button on which the stop operation has been performed;
Production control means (for example, the first sub-control unit 4 shown in FIG. 25) that executes production according to the progress of the game.
00, a second sub-control unit 500), the effect control means is configured to control a setting suggestion effect (for example, a setting suggestion effect A (video PD1) shown in FIG. 35(e)) in a predetermined period. ,
Setting suggestion effect A (video PD2) shown in FIG. 36(c), setting suggestion effect B shown in FIG. 37(e)
(4 or more confirmed sounds)), and the setting suggestion performance is a means that can execute a display by a performance element (for example, a display means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 157 shown in FIG. 23), a sound output means (for example, The sound output from the speakers 272, 277 shown in FIG. 25) and the light output means (for example, the backlight of the reels 110 to 112 shown in FIG.
The current setting is performed using the light output from a 4-grade lamp) or the movement (e.g., vibration, rotation, expansion/contraction, vertical movement) of a movable body (e.g., the shutter (shielding device) 163 shown in FIG. 23). The game machine is characterized in that the game machine is an effect that suggests the setting value.

According to the game machine according to this example, it is possible to suggest the currently set setting value by the setting suggestion effect using the effect element, so it is possible to increase the interest of the players and improve the operating rate. can.

Further, the predetermined period includes a first period (for example, the period of the low probability mode of setting suggestion effect A shown in FIG. 29(a)) and a second period different from the first period (for example, the non- 10 games after transition from advantageous section to advantageous section (period of high probability mode of setting suggestion effect A shown in FIG. 29(a))
), and the setting suggestion effect may be executed more easily in the second period than in the first period. Note that the "first period" according to the present invention may be any period in which it is more difficult to perform the setting suggestion effect than the "second period", and may be a period in which the setting suggestion is not executed.

With such a configuration, by providing a second period that is different from the first period and has a high probability of executing the setting suggestion effect, it is difficult to immediately end the game (immediately quit) after the first period ends. It is possible to improve the operating rate.

Further, the game control means is provided with a game control means (for example, a game state control process shown in FIG. 31) that can control the progress of the game and change the ease of acquiring game value, and the game control means situation(
For example, a normal gaming state) and a second gaming state different from the first gaming state (for example, A
It is possible to set one gaming state from a plurality of gaming states including at least T state), and the first condition is satisfied while the first gaming state is set (for example, if you win an AT lottery) means) that can end the first gaming state and set the second gaming state based on the above, and after the second gaming state ends, The second period may be set beforehand.

With such a configuration, by setting a second period in which the execution probability of the setting suggestion effect is high after the second gaming state advantageous to the player ends, the game can be played after the second gaming state ends. It is possible to make it difficult to terminate immediately (immediately quit), and it is possible to improve the operating rate.

Further, the predetermined period may be a third period (
For example, the setting suggestion effect includes the period of 20 games (high probability mode of setting suggestion effect B) in the ED state shown in FIG. The third period is easier to execute than the period of the low probability mode of setting suggestion effect A shown in FIG. 10 games (Figure 2
The period is longer than the high probability mode period of setting suggestion presentation A shown in FIG. 36(a)), and the period is longer than the setting suggestion presentation A (movie PD2 )
) is used in the third period (for example, the display on the liquid crystal display device 157 and the sound output from the speakers 272 and 277 shown in FIG. The number of the production elements used in setting suggestion production B (4 or more confirmed sounds) shown in (e) is smaller (for example, the number of production elements output from the speakers 272 and 277 shown in FIGS. 37(e) and 37(f)) is It may be audio only).

With such a configuration, the third period is longer than the second period, and there is a high possibility that more setting suggestion effects will be executed than during the second period, so it is possible to set the setting with fewer effect elements. By performing the suggestion effect, it is possible to prevent the setting suggestion effect from feeling bothersome. In addition, it is possible to prevent interference with other performances during the third period, to perform various performances, and to improve the interest of the game.

Further, the game machine according to the present invention can also be applied to an enclosed game machine. Here, the "enclosed game machine" is one in which game balls enclosed within the game machine are reused. Further, the main control section, the first sub-control section, and the second sub-control section may be configured in one chip, or the main control section and the first sub-control section may be configured as a single chip.
The sub-control unit may be configured to allow bidirectional communication. Moreover, while bidirectional communication is possible between the main control section and the first sub-control section, communication from the first sub-control section to the second sub-control section may be unidirectional communication.

Further, the functions and effects described in the embodiments of the present invention are merely a list of the most preferable functions and effects resulting from the present invention, and the functions and effects according to the present invention are described in the embodiments of the present invention. It is not limited to what has been done. Furthermore, by applying the content described in one of the plurality of configurations described in the embodiment to another configuration, the range of games may be further expanded.

<<Embodiment 3>>
The slot machine of Embodiment 3 will be described in detail below using FIGS. 38 to 60. Note that the symbols shown in FIGS. 38 to 60 are basically used only for explaining this embodiment, and even if the same symbols are shown in other drawings, they will not be used in the explanation of this embodiment. Priority is given to the codes shown in 38 to 60. Moreover, each example of this embodiment and each example of other embodiments can be applied in combination with each other.

<Overall configuration>
In the slot machine of this embodiment, a predetermined number of game media are inserted, and a plurality of reels each having a plurality of types of symbols start rotating when a predetermined rotation start instruction operation is received. Based on the reception of the rotation start instruction operation, the propriety of internal winning of the plurality of types of winning combinations is determined by lottery, and each of the plurality of reels individually stops rotation by receiving a predetermined rotation stop instruction operation, If the winning combination based on the result of the lottery and the combination of symbols when the multiple reels stop match the predetermined payout conditions, the game media will be paid out and the game will end; if not, the game media will be paid out. This is a game machine that plays a series of games that end without paying out.

First, the overall configuration of the slot machine 100 will be described using FIG. 38. FIG. 38 is an external perspective view of the slot machine 100 viewed from the front side (player side).

A slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 38 corresponds to an example of a gaming machine of the present invention, and includes a main body 101 and a front door 102 that is attached to the front of the main body 101 and can be opened and closed with respect to the main body 101. . Three reels (left reel 110, middle reel 111, and right reel 112) each having a plurality of types of symbols (not shown) arranged on the outer peripheral surface are housed in the center of the main body 101, and are rotated inside the slot machine 100. It is configured so that it can be done. These reels 110 to 112 are rotationally driven by a driving device such as a stepping motor.

In this embodiment, a suitable number of each pattern is printed on a band-like member at equal intervals, and this band-like member is attached to a predetermined circular cylindrical frame member to constitute each reel 110 to 112. When viewed from the player, approximately three symbols on the reels 110 to 112 are displayed vertically from the symbol display window 113, making a total of nine symbols visible. By rotating each reel 110 to 112, the combination of symbols visible to the player changes. In other words, each reel 110 to 112 functions as a display device that variably displays combinations of a plurality of types of symbols. In addition to the reel, an electronic image display device such as a liquid crystal display device can also be used as such a display device. Further, in this embodiment, three reels are provided inside the center of the slot machine 100, but the number of reels and the installation positions of the reels are not limited to this.

A backlight (not shown) is arranged on the back of each reel 110 to 112 to illuminate each symbol displayed in the symbol display window 113. It is desirable that the backlight be shielded for each pattern so that each pattern can be illuminated evenly. In addition, inside the slot machine 100, an optical sensor (index sensor, not shown) consisting of a light emitting part and a light receiving part is provided near each reel 110 to 112, and the light emitting part of this optical sensor A light-shielding piece of a certain length provided on the reel is configured to pass between the light-receiving section and the light-receiving section. The position of the symbol on the reel in the rotational direction is determined based on the detection result of this sensor, and the reels 110 to 112 are stopped so that the desired symbol is displayed on the winning line. The winning line display lamp 120 is a lamp that indicates the winning line 114 that becomes valid.

For example, the notification lamp 123 informs the player that he or she has internally won a specific winning combination (specifically, a special winning combination (bonus)) in an internal lottery for winning combinations, which will be described later, or that he or she is playing a bonus game. This is a warning lamp. The notification lamp 123 of this embodiment lights up until the bonus game ends after the bonus is announced to notify the player that the bonus has been confirmed. Note that the notification lamp 123 may be turned on before the bonus notification (at the time of the bonus or immediately before the bonus notification). The game medal insertion possible lamp 124 is a lamp for informing the player that game medals can be inserted. The replay lamp 122 informs the player that the current game can be replayed (no need to insert medals) when the player wins a replay combination that is one of the winning combinations in the previous game. This is a warning lamp. The reel panel lamp 128 is a lamp for performance.

The bet buttons 130 to 132 are buttons for inserting a predetermined number of medals (referred to as credits) stored electronically in the slot machine 100. In this embodiment, each time the bet button 130 is pressed, one coin is inserted up to a maximum of three coins, and when the bet button 132 is pressed, three coins are inserted (upper limit of three coins). Hereinafter, the bet button 132 will also be referred to as the MAX bet button. In addition, the game medal insertion lamp 129 lights up a number of lamps according to the number of inserted medals, and when a specified number of medals are inserted, a game start signal indicating that the game start operation is possible. Lamp 121 lights up.

The chance button 196 is a button for presentation.

The medal slot 141 is an slot for the player to insert medals at the time of starting a game. That is, medals can be inserted electronically using the bet buttons 130 to 132, or actual medals can be inserted (insertion operation) from the medal slot 141, and "insertion" includes both. be.

The stored medal number display 125 is a display device for displaying the number of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100. The game information display 126 is a display for numerically displaying various internal information (for example, the number of medals paid out during a bonus game). The payout number display 127 is a display for displaying the number of medals paid out to the player as a result of winning some winning combination. In the present embodiment, the stored token number display 125, the game information display 126, and the payout token number display 127 are composed of seven segment (SEG) displays. Note that the payout number display 127 of this embodiment also functions as an operation navigation execution device that notifies information regarding the stop operation (for example, the operation order and operation timing of the stop buttons 137 to 139).

The start lever 135 is a lever-type switch for starting the rotation of the reels 110 to 112. That is, when a desired number of medals is inserted into the medal slot 141 or the bet buttons 130 to 132 are operated and the start lever 135 is operated, the reels 110 to 112 start rotating. The operation on the start lever 135 is called a game start operation.

The stop button unit 136 is provided with stop buttons 137 to 139. The stop buttons 137 to 139 are button-shaped push switches for individually stopping the reels 110 to 112 that have started rotating by operating the start lever 135, and are provided in association with each reel 110 to 112. .

More specifically, by operating the left stop button 137, the left reel 110 can be stopped, by operating the middle stop button 138, the middle reel 111 can be stopped, and by operating the right stop button 139, the middle reel 111 can be stopped. By operating the right reel 112, it is possible to stop the right reel 112.

Furthermore, light emitters 137a, 138a, and 139a are provided inside each of the stop buttons 137 to 139, and when the stop buttons 137 to 139 can be operated, the light emitters 137a, 138a, and 139a are turned on. In addition to notifying the player, the light may also be turned on when making various notifications to be described later.

Hereinafter, the operations on the stop buttons 137 to 139 will be referred to as stop operations, the first stop operation will be referred to as the first stop operation, the next stop operation will be referred to as the second stop operation, the last stop operation will be referred to as the third stop operation, and the first stop operation will be referred to as the third stop operation. The reel that is the target of the operation may be referred to as a first stop reel, the reel that is the target of the second stop operation is sometimes referred to as the second stop reel, and the reel that is the target of the third stop operation is sometimes referred to as the third stop reel.

Further, the order in which the stop buttons 137 to 139 are operated to stop all of the rotating reels 110 to 112 is referred to as an operation order or a pressing order. The order of operations in which the first stop reel is the left reel 110 and the stop operation is called "sequential push operation order" or simply "sequence push", and the operation order in which the first stop reel is the right reel 112 and the stop operation is called "sequential push operation order" or simply "sequence push". This is called "reverse push operation order" or simply "reverse push."

The medal return button 133 is a button that is pressed to remove the inserted medals when the medals are jammed. The settlement button 134 is a button for settling medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100 and bet medals, and discharging them from the medal payout port 155. The door key hole 140 is a hole into which a key for unlocking the front door 102 of the slot machine 100 is inserted. The medal payout port 155 is a payout port for paying out medals.

A title panel 162 is provided at the bottom of the stop button unit 136 for displaying the model name and pasting various certificate stamps. A medal payout opening 155 and a medal receiving tray 161 are provided at the bottom of the title panel 162.

The sound hole 145 is a hole for outputting sound from a speaker 277 provided inside the slot machine 100 to the outside. The upper lamp 142 provided at the top of the front door 102 and the side lamps 144 provided on the left and right sides of the front door 102 are decorative lamps to enliven the game, and are also lit when making various notifications. There may be cases where

A presentation device 160 is disposed at the top of the front door 102, and a sound hole 143 is provided at the top of the presentation device 160 for outputting sound from a speaker 272 provided above inside the slot machine 100 to the outside. It is provided. This effect device 160 includes a shutter (shielding device) 163 consisting of two right shutters 163a and a left shutter 163b that can be opened and closed in the horizontal direction, and an effect image display device 157 (not shown) disposed behind the shutter 163. When the right shutter 163a and the left shutter 163b are opened horizontally outward in front of the effect image display device 157, the display screen of the effect image display device 157 (not shown) is displayed in front of the slot machine 100. (on the player's side).

The effect image display device 157 of the present embodiment also functions as an operation navigation execution device that notifies information regarding stop operations (for example, the order and timing of operations of the stop buttons 137 to 139), and also functions as a display for various notifications. may be done.

Note that the display device does not have to be a liquid crystal display device, but may be any display device that can display various performance images and various game information, such as a multi-segment display (7 segment display), a dot matrix display, an organic EL display, a plasma display, etc. , a reel (drum), or a display device consisting of a projector and a screen. Further, the display screen has a rectangular shape, and is configured so that the entirety can be visually recognized by the player. In the case of this embodiment, the display screen is rectangular, but may be square. Furthermore, a decoration (not shown) may be provided around the periphery of the display screen so that a part of the periphery of the display screen is hidden by the decoration, making the display screen appear oddly shaped. Although the display screen is a flat surface in this embodiment, it may be a curved surface.

Note that although the notification lamp 123 is configured to notify predetermined information by causing the lamp to emit light, the manner of notification is not limited to the lamp emitting light. For example, predetermined information may be displayed using a part of the liquid crystal display device (in the case of a full-screen liquid crystal slot machine, the area near the reels 110 to 112 may be used). Hereinafter, when the lighting of the notification lamp 123 is referred to as lighting, it is meant to include notification by other presentation devices (for example, a display device, etc.) having the same function.

<Inside the housing>
FIG. 39 is a front view of the slot machine 100 with the front door 102 open. The main body 101 is a box that is surrounded by a top plate 261, a left side plate 260, a right side plate 260, a bottom plate 264, and a back plate 242, and has an opening at the front. Inside the main body 101, a main control board storage case 210 that stores a main control board inside is arranged at a position that does not overlap with the ventilation hole 249 provided at the top of the back plate 242. Three reels 110 to 112 are arranged below. On the side of the main control board storage case 210 and the reels 110 to 112, that is, on the side plate 260 on the left side, a sub control board storage case 220 that stores a sub control board therein is disposed. Furthermore, an external centralized terminal board 248 is attached to the side plate 260 on the right side as viewed from the outside, which is connected to the main control board and outputs information about the slot machine 100 to an external device.

Further, inside the main body 101, there is provided a setting key switch (hereinafter also referred to as "setting key SW"; not shown) that can be turned on and off by a rotational operation. This setting key SW is an operation means for starting to change or confirm setting values (in this example, settings 1 to 6), which will be described later. Further, inside the main body 101, a reset switch (hereinafter also referred to as a "reset SW") is provided that can be pressed to perform an operation for changing settings (setting value changing operation). This reset SW is an operating means that also functions as an error release switch that can perform operations to eliminate various errors (error elimination operations), which will be described later.

These setting key SW and reset SW are operation means provided at a position that can be operated only when the front door 102 is in an open state, and are difficult or impossible to operate when the front door 102 is in a closed state. . In other words, it is an operating means that can only be operated by the manager (clerk, etc.) of the game parlor, and cannot be operated by the player.

Further, inside the main body 101, a setting value display device 101a (see FIG. 50, etc.) capable of displaying setting values is provided. In this example, the set value display device 101a is configured with a 7-segment display. Details will be described later, but when a setting change operation is performed, the setting value (any of settings 1 to 6) is displayed on the setting value display device 101a, and the setting value is set by operating the start lever 135. Once the value is confirmed, the set value will be hidden. On the other hand, when the setting value confirmation operation is performed, a numerical value indicating the current setting value is displayed on the setting value display device 101a. This setting value display device 101a is provided at a position where it can be seen only when the front door 102 is in an open state, and is difficult or impossible to see when the front door 102 is in a closed state.

A medal payout device 180 (a device that pays out medals accumulated in a bucket) is disposed on the bottom plate 264, and a power supply board is provided above the medal payout device 180, that is, below the reels 110 to 112. A power supply device 252 is provided, and a power switch 244 is provided in front of the power supply device 252. The power switch 244 can be operated by opening the front door 102, and is difficult or impossible to operate when the front door 102 is closed.

The power supply device 252 converts AC power supplied from the outside to the slot machine 100, converts it to a predetermined voltage, and powers each of the main control section 300, first sub-control section 400, second sub-control section 500, etc., which will be described later. Supplies to the control unit and each device. Furthermore, it is equipped with a power storage circuit (e.g., a capacitor) for supplying power to predetermined components (e.g., RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, etc.) for a predetermined period (e.g., 10 days) even after external power is cut off. There is.

A medal auxiliary storage 240 is provided on the right side of the medal payout device 180, and an overflow terminal is provided behind this storage (not shown). The power supply device 252 is provided with a power cord connection part to which a power cord 265 is connected, and the power cord 265 connected here extends to the outside through a power cord hole 262 formed in the back plate 242 of the main body 101. There is.

The front door 102 is hinged to the left side plate 260 of the main body 101 via a hinge device 276, and is a door body that can be opened and closed with respect to the main body 101.

In this example, the front door 102, which has been locked in the closed state, can be opened by inserting a key owned by the manager of the game parlor into the door key hole 140 (see FIG. 38). Therefore, the administrator can unlock the front door 102 (change it from the closed state to the open state), but anyone other than the administrator (for example, a player) cannot unlock the front door 102. .

An optical opening/closing sensor (not shown) consisting of a light emitting part and a light receiving part is provided on the right side plate 260 of the main body 101. A light shielding piece of a certain length provided at 102 is configured to pass through.

The main control unit 300 monitors the states of various sensors 318 including this opening/closing sensor in main control timer interrupt processing to be described later. When the front door 102 is in the closed state and the light shielding piece of the front door 102 moves to a position where it blocks light from the light emitting part of the opening/closing sensor of the main body 101, the opening/closing sensor outputs a signal ( For example, a low level signal) is output to the main control unit 300.

On the other hand, when the front door 102 is in the open state and the light shielding piece of the front door 102 moves to a position where it does not block the light from the light emitting part of the opening/closing sensor of the main body 101, the opening/closing sensor indicates that it is in the open detection state. A signal (for example, a high level signal) is output to the main control section 300.

That is, the opening/closing sensor is a detection means capable of detecting the opening/closing state of the front door (door body) 102, and when the front door 102 is in the closed state, the detection state becomes the closed detection state and the front door 102 is in the open state. In this case, the detection state becomes the open detection state. Note that the configuration of this detection means is not limited to an optical sensor, and may be, for example, a magnetic sensor, a proximity switch, a micro switch, a Hall element, or the like. Furthermore, the detection state is not limited to one in which the open detection state and the closed detection state always switch as the door body opens and closes, and the detection state can change to the closed detection state even if the door body is in the open state. Alternatively, even if the door body is in the closed state, the detection state may be in the open detection state.

A presentation device 160, a presentation control board (not shown) for controlling the presentation device 160, and an upper speaker 272 are provided above the display window 113. At the bottom of the display window 113, there are provided a medal selector 170 for sorting the inserted medals, a passage 266 through which the medals pass when the medal selector 170 drops fraudulent medals, etc. into the medal tray 161. . Furthermore, a bass speaker 277 is provided at a position corresponding to the sound hole 145.

<Circuit configuration of control section>
Next, the circuit configuration of the control section of the slot machine 100 will be described using FIG. 40. Note that this figure is a circuit block diagram of the control section.

The control unit of the slot machine 100 can be roughly divided into a main control unit 300 that controls the progress of the game, and a main control unit 300 that controls the main performance according to command signals (hereinafter simply referred to as “commands”) transmitted by the main control unit 300. The second sub-control unit 500 controls various devices based on commands sent from the first sub-control unit 400.

<Main control section>
First, the main control section 300 of the slot machine 100 will be explained. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300, and this basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, control program data, lottery data used in internal lottery for winning combinations, and reel symbols. A ROM 306 that stores arrays, stop positions, etc., a RAM 308 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 310 for controlling input/output of various devices, and a counter timer 312 for measuring time, number of times, etc. , WDT (watch dog timer) 314 is installed. Note that other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and RAM 308, and the same applies to the first sub-control unit 400 and second sub-control unit 500, which will be described later. The CPU 304 of this basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 315b as a system clock. Furthermore, when the power is turned on, the CPU 304 transmits the frequency division data stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 306 to the counter timer 312, and the counter timer 312 sets the interrupt time based on the received frequency division data. An interrupt request is sent to the CPU 304 at each interrupt time. The CPU 304 uses this interrupt request as a trigger to monitor each sensor and transmit drive pulses. For example, if the clock signal output by the crystal oscillator 315b is set to 8 MHz, the frequency division value of the counter timer 312 is set to 1/256, and the frequency division data of the ROM 306 is set to 47, the reference time of the interrupt is 256 x 47 ÷ 8 MHz. =1.504ms.

The main control unit 300 includes a random number generation circuit 316 that is used as a hardware random number counter that fluctuates a number in the range of 0 to 65535 based on a clock signal input from a crystal oscillator 315a, and a random number generation circuit 316 that is activated when the power is turned on. It is equipped with a start signal output circuit 338 that outputs a signal (reset signal), and when the start signal is input from this start signal output circuit 338, the CPU 304 starts game control (starts main control unit main processing). do).

In addition, the main control unit 300 includes a sensor circuit 320, and the CPU 304 detects various sensors 318 (bet button 130 sensor, bet button 131 sensor, bet button 132 sensor, medal input from the medal slot 141) at each interrupt time. A medal reception sensor for medals, a start lever 135 sensor, a stop button 137 sensor, a stop button 138 sensor, a stop button 139 sensor, a payment button 134 sensor, a medal payout sensor for medals paid out from the medal payout device 180, an index sensor for the reel 110, The status of the reel 111 index sensor, reel 112 index sensor, open/close sensor, etc.) is monitored.

Note that when the sensor circuit 320 detects the H level of the start lever sensor, it outputs a signal indicating this detection to the random value generation circuit 316. The random number generation circuit 316 that receives this signal latches the value at that timing and stores it in a register that stores the random number used for the lottery.

Two medal reception sensors are installed in the internal passage of the medal slot 141, and detect whether or not a medal has passed. Two start lever 135 sensors are installed inside the start lever 135 and detect a start operation by a player. A stop button 137 sensor, a stop button 138 sensor, and a stop button 139 sensor are installed on the corresponding stop buttons 137 to 139, respectively, and detect the operation of the stop button by the player.

The bet button 130 sensor and the bet button 132 sensor are installed on the corresponding bet buttons 130 and 132, respectively, and are used for insertion operations when inserting medals electronically stored in the RAM 308 as medals to be inserted into a game. Detect. The payment button 134 sensor is provided on the payment button 134. When the settlement button 134 is pressed once, the electronically stored medals are settled. The medal payout sensor is a sensor for detecting medals paid out by the medal payout device 180. Note that each of the above sensors may be a non-contact type sensor or a contact type sensor.

The index sensor of reel 110, the index sensor of reel 111, and the index sensor of reel 112 are installed at predetermined positions on the mounting base of each reel 110 to 112, and each time the light shielding piece provided on the reel frame passes, become the level. When the CPU 304 detects this signal, it determines that the reel has rotated once, and resets the rotational position information of the reel to zero.

The main control unit 300 includes a drive circuit 322 that drives the stepping motors provided on the reels 110 to 112, a drive circuit 324 that drives a solenoid provided on the medal selector 170 that sorts the inserted medals, and a drive circuit 324 that drives the solenoids provided on the medal payout device 180. A drive circuit 326 that drives the motor, and various lamps 336 (winning line display lamp 120, notification lamp 123, game medal insertion possible lamp 124, replay lamp 122, game medal insertion lamp 129, game start lamp 121, storage number display) 125, game information display 126, and payout number display 127).

Further, an information output circuit 334 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 connects a slot to an information input circuit 652 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like via this information output circuit 334. Outputs gaming information (for example, gaming status) of the machine 100.

The main control unit 300 also includes a voltage monitoring circuit 330 that monitors the voltage value of the power supply that is supplied to the main control unit 1300. In this embodiment, if the voltage is less than 9 V), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has decreased is output to the basic circuit 302.

Further, the main control section 300 is provided with an output interface for transmitting commands to the first sub-control section 400, and enables communication with the first sub-control section 400. Note that information communication between the main control section 300 and the first sub-control section 400 is one-way communication, and the main control section 300 can send signals such as commands to the first sub-control section 400; Signals such as commands cannot be sent from the unit 400 to the main control unit 300.

<Sub-control unit>
Next, the first sub-control unit 400 of the slot machine 100 will be explained. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that receives control commands transmitted by the main control unit 300 via an input interface and controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 based on the control commands. There is. This basic circuit 402 is equipped with a CPU 404, a RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 410 for controlling input/output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time, number of times, etc. are doing. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. The first sub-control unit 400 also has a ROM 406 that stores control programs and data for controlling the entire first sub-control unit 400, backlight lighting patterns, data for controlling various indicators, etc. It is set up.

The CPU 404 transmits frequency division data stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 406 to the counter timer 412 via the data bus at a predetermined timing. The counter timer 412 determines the interrupt time based on the received frequency division data, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 404 at each interrupt time. The CPU 404 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

Further, the first sub-control unit 400 is provided with a sound source IC 418, and speakers 272 and 277 are connected to the sound source IC 418 via an output interface. The sound source IC 418 controls the audio output from the amplifier and speakers 272 and 277 in accordance with commands from the CPU 404. The sound source IC 418 is connected to an S-ROM (sound ROM) in which audio data is stored, and the audio data acquired from this ROM is amplified by an amplifier and output from the speakers 272 and 277.

The first sub-control unit 400 is also provided with a drive circuit 422, and the drive circuit 422 is connected to various lamps 420 (upper lamp, lower lamp, side lamp 144, title panel 162 lamp, bet button) via an input/output interface. lamp, chance button lamp, reel backlight, etc.) are connected.

Further, the first sub-control unit 400 is provided with a drive circuit 424 that drives the shutter 163, and the shutter 163 is connected to the drive circuit 424 via an output interface. This drive circuit 424 outputs a drive signal to a stepping motor (not shown) provided in the shutter 163 in response to a command from the CPU 404.

Further, the first sub-control unit 400 is provided with a sensor circuit 426, and a shutter sensor 428 is connected to the sensor circuit 426 via an input interface. The CPU 404 monitors the state of the shutter sensor 428 at every interrupt time.

Further, the CPU 404 transmits and receives signals to and from the second sub-control unit 500 via the output interface. The second sub-control unit 500 of the slot machine 100 controls the effect image display device 157 and the like.

Next, the second sub-control unit 500 of the slot machine 100 will be explained. The second sub-control unit 500 receives the control command transmitted by the first sub-control unit 400 via the input interface, and operates a basic circuit 502 that controls the entire second sub-control unit 500 based on this control command. This basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 510 for controlling input/output of various devices, and a counter for measuring time, number of times, etc. It is equipped with a timer 512. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock. Further, the second sub-control unit 500 is provided with a ROM 506 in which control programs and data for controlling the entire second sub-control unit 500, data for image display, etc. are stored.

The CPU 504 transmits frequency division data stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 506 to the counter timer 512 via the data bus at a predetermined timing. The counter timer 512 determines the interrupt time based on the received frequency division data, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 504 at each interrupt time. The CPU 504 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

The second sub-control unit 500 is provided with a VDP 516 (video display processor), and a ROM 506 and a VRAM 518 are connected to the VDP 516 via a bus. The VDP 516 reads image data etc. stored in the ROM 506 based on a signal from the CPU 504, generates a display image using the work area of the VRAM 518, and displays the image on the effect image display device 157.

<Main control unit main processing>
The main control section main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control section 300 will be described below with reference to FIG. Note that this figure is a flowchart showing the flow of main processing by the main control section.

As described above, the main control unit 300 is provided with a startup signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 338 that outputs a startup signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 to which this activation signal has been input is reset-started by a reset interrupt and executes main control section main processing according to a control program stored in advance in the ROM 306.

When the power is turned on, first, various initial setting processes are performed in step S101. Although details will be described later, in this initial setting process, processes related to initial settings, setting changes, return processing, etc. are performed.

In step S102, a medal insertion/start operation reception process is executed. Here, it is checked whether or not medals have been inserted, and preparations are made to send an insert command indicating that medals have been inserted to the first sub-control unit 400. In addition, if a player wins a replay winning combination in the previous game, a process will be performed to insert the same number of medals as the number of medals inserted in the previous game, and the player will be in a replay state. No input is required. Further, it is checked whether the start lever 135 has been operated or not, and if the start lever 135 has been operated, the process advances to step S103.

In step S103, a winning line determination process is performed to determine the number of inserted medals and to determine a valid winning line.

In step S104, a random number acquisition process is performed to acquire the random number generated by the random number generation circuit 316, and in the next step S105, a winning combination internal lottery process is performed. In this winning combination internal lottery process, the winning combination lottery table stored in the ROM 306 is read out according to the current gaming state, and an internal lottery is performed using this and the acquired random numbers, and the results of this internal lottery are Preparations are made for transmitting the internal lottery command shown to the first sub-control unit 400. As a result of the internal lottery, if any winning combination (including the activation combination) is internally won, the flag for that winning combination is turned on.

In step S106, a reel stop data selection process is performed to select reel stop data based on the internal lottery result of the winning combination internal lottery process. Note that this reel stop data is stored in the ROM 306 of the main control section 300. Further, in step S106, preparations are made to transmit a reel stop data command including information regarding the selected reel stop data to the first sub-control unit 400. In step S107, reel rotation start processing is executed, and rotation of all reels 110 to 112 is started.

In step S108, reel stop control processing is performed. In the reel stop control process, stop buttons 137 to 139 can be accepted, and when any stop button is pressed, a stop table of reel stop data is created in order to stop the reel corresponding to the pressed stop button. Referring to this, one of the reels 110 to 112 is stopped according to the number of drawn frames set in the stop table. When all the reels 110 to 112 have stopped, the process advances to step S109.

In addition, in this step S108, for each stop operation, preparations are made to send a stop button acceptance command regarding the stopped button 137 to 139 to the first sub-control unit 400, and for each reel stop, Preparations are made to send a reel stop command regarding the reel stop position to the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S109, winning determination processing is performed to determine winning. In this winning determination process, when a symbol combination corresponding to some winning combination is displayed on the activated winning line 114, it is determined that the winning combination has been won. Further, in this step S109, preparations are made for transmitting a winning determination command indicating the winning determination result to the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S110, medal payout processing is performed. In the medal payout process, if a winning combination has been won, the number of medals corresponding to the winning combination will be paid out according to the number of winning lines.

In step S111, a game state control process is performed. In this game state control process, processing related to transition of each game state is performed, and the game state is transitioned when the start condition or end condition is satisfied. Also, preparations are made for transmitting a gaming state command including information indicating the current gaming state.

With the above, one game ends. Thereafter, the game progresses by returning to step S102 and repeating the above-described process. The various commands prepared in each of the above steps are transmitted in the command setting transmission process (step S206) of the main control unit timer interrupt process, which will be described later.

<Initial setting process>
Next, using FIG. 42, the initial setting process (step S101) in the main control section main process described using FIG. 41 will be described. Note that this figure is a flowchart showing the flow of initial setting processing.

In step S201, initial settings at startup are performed. This initial setting at startup includes setting the stack initial value to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304 (temporary setting), setting interrupt prohibition, initial setting of the I/O 310, initial setting of various variables stored in the RAM 308, and setting of the WDT 314. Permit operation and set initial values.

In step S202, it is determined whether or not there is an abnormality in the RAM 308. If there is an abnormality, the process advances to step S207 to execute initialization processing, and if there is no abnormality, the process advances to step S203.

In step S203, it is determined whether or not the front door 102 is in an open state (door open) based on the output from the opening/closing sensor. If the door is open, the process proceeds to step S204; if the door is not open, The process proceeds to step S205 and executes a return process. Further, in step S204, it is determined whether the setting key SW is ON or OFF, and if it is ON, the process proceeds to step S206 to execute a setting change process, and if it is OFF, the process proceeds to step S205 to execute a return process. .

The return process in step S205 is a process for returning the slot machine 100 to the state before the power outage (for example, a process for restoring the return data saved in the RAM 308 in the power outage process in step S411 of the main control unit timer interrupt process). etc.), then the initial setting process ends.

In step S206, after performing a setting change process, the process advances to step S207. Although details will be described later, in this setting change process, processing related to setting changes, etc. are performed.

In step S207, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization processing, the initialization processing is ended after processing to initialize the data in the RAM 308 (RAM clear), processing related to initial operation, and the like.

<Settings change process>
Next, the setting change process (step S206) in the initial setting process described using FIG. 42 will be described using FIG. 43. Note that this figure is a flowchart showing the flow of setting change processing.

In step S301, processing to initialize the data in the RAM 308 (RAM clear) is performed, and in the next step S302, a setting change start command indicating to start changing settings is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. When the first sub-control unit 400 receives this setting change start command from the main control unit 300, it executes processing to start displaying the management screen.

In step S303, the current setting value is displayed using the setting value display device 101a. For example, if the current setting value is setting 6, the number 6 indicating setting 6 is displayed.

In step S304, it is determined whether or not there is an unreported error in a state in which some kind of error is detected (hereinafter referred to as each error detection state), and if there is such an error, step S304 is performed. The process advances to S305, and if there is no such information, the process advances to step S306.

Errors handled in this embodiment include hopper empty error, medal insertion error 1 (medal selector error), medal insertion errors 2 to 4, medal payout errors 1 to 3, overflow error, RAM failure, prize winning error, and the like. These errors will be explained below. Although door opening (door open error) is not treated as an error, it may be treated as an error.

A hopper empty error (hopper error) is a payout error related to the payout of medals, and occurs when the number of medals stored in the hopper housed inside the main body 101 falls below a specified number (error detection state). . The error notification for this error can be canceled by operating an error cancellation switch (reset SW in this example) after replenishing the hopper with more than a specified number of medals (after the error is not detected).

Medal insertion abnormality 1 (selector error) occurs when the inserted medals remain in the medal selector or the like (error detection state). The error notification for this error can be canceled by operating an error cancellation switch (reset SW in this example) after the cause of the error is removed (after the error is not detected). Medal insertion abnormality 2 occurs when the number of inserted medals is equal to or greater than the specified number (an error detection state occurs), and is resolved by changing the set value or clearing the RAM.

The medal insertion abnormality 3 occurs when either the insertion sensor 1 or the insertion sensor 2 is turned on other than during the medal insertion process (error detection state). The medal insertion abnormality 4 occurs when the inserted medals do not pass through the insertion sensor 1 and the insertion sensor 2 normally (error detection state). Error notification for these errors can be canceled by operating an error cancellation switch (reset SW in this example) after the cause of the error has been removed (after the error has become non-detected).

Medal payout abnormality 1 occurs when no medals are paid out for a certain period of time when the medal payout device is driven (error detection state). Medal payout abnormality 2 occurs when medals remain when the medal payout device is driven (error detection state). The medal payout abnormality 3 occurs when either the payout sensor 1 or the payout sensor 2 is turned on other than during the medal payout process (error detection state). Error notification for these errors can be canceled by operating an error cancellation switch (reset SW in this example) after the cause of the error has been removed (after the error has become non-detected).

An overflow abnormality occurs when the overflow terminal of the medal auxiliary storage is turned on (error detection state). The error notification for this error can be canceled by operating an error cancellation switch (reset SW in this example) after the cause of the error is removed (after the error is not detected). A RAM failure occurs when an abnormality is detected by checking the RAM (error detection state). The error notification for this error can be canceled by operating an error cancellation switch (reset SW in this example). A winning abnormality occurs when, after the reels 110 to 112 are stopped, a winning symbol different from the winning symbol determined by the internal lottery is won (error detection state). The error notification for this error can be canceled by operating an error cancellation switch (reset SW in this example).

Note that the gaming machine according to the present invention is not limited to slot machines, but can also be applied to pachinko machines. Errors that can occur in pachinko machines include, for example, lower tray full error, dispensing device error, overdispensing error, incorrect dispensing error, main control communication error, magnetic abnormality error, magnetic field abnormality error, frame opening error, and RAM clear error. , shock sensor error, etc. Error notifications for these errors can also be canceled by operating an error cancellation switch after removing the cause of the error.

In step S305, error notification start processing is executed. In this error notification start process, the main control unit 300 displays an error code on the payout number display 127 and transmits an error notification start command corresponding to the detected error to the first sub-control unit 400. Note that when a plurality of errors are detected when displaying an error code on the payout number display 127, the error code for one of the error notifications is displayed on the payout number display 127 according to the priority order. Further, when a code corresponding to door opening is displayed on the payout number display 127, priority is given to displaying an error code.

In step S306, it is determined whether or not the reset SW has been operated. If the reset SW has been operated, the process proceeds to step S307; if not, the process proceeds to step S311.

In step S307, the current setting value is changed. Specifically, the currently set setting values 1 to 6 are updated by adding 1 (in the case of 6, it returns to 1).

In step S308, it is determined whether or not some kind of error notification is being executed (each error notification is in progress). If each error notification is in progress, the process advances to step S309; if each error notification is not in progress, the process advances to step S311. move on.

In step S309, it is determined whether or not the error notification termination condition is satisfied. If the condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S310, and if the condition is not satisfied, the process proceeds to step S311. In this embodiment, when the cause of the error currently being notified has been resolved (error non-detection state) and the execution period of the error notification exceeds the period of one cycle of the error sound, the error notification termination condition is set. is determined to have been established. In this embodiment, an error sound is output when notifying an error, but this error sound includes an announcement sound that notifies the content of the error, and the above condition is such that this announcement sound is output at least once when notifying an error. This is to ensure that the With this configuration, the details of the error can be notified to the outside more reliably.

In step S310, error notification termination processing is executed. In this error notification termination process, the error notification currently being executed is ended. Specifically, it erases the error code displayed on the payout number display 127, transmits an error notification end command, and ends error display on the 7-segment (SEG) display. Note that if multiple errors are detected, the above process is executed for the error with the highest priority, and the other errors remain unprocessed (only one error is reported). subject to termination). If there is an error that has not been processed, the error code corresponding to the error with the highest priority among them is displayed on the payout number display 127.

In step S311, it is determined whether or not the start lever 135 has been operated. If the start lever 135 has been operated, the process proceeds to step S312, and if not, the process proceeds to step S304.

In step S312, the setting value displayed on the setting value display device 101a is stored in the RAM 308 as a new setting value (setting value is determined), and in the next step S313, the display on the setting value display device 101a is erased. and hide the setting value.

Note that in this example, the set value is determined when the operation of the start lever 135 is accepted, but a process for determining whether or not the front door 102 is in the open state is added, The configuration may be such that the set value is determined only in the case of the state. In this case, if the front door 102 is in the closed state, the set value cannot be determined, but the management screen may continue to be displayed.

In step S314, it is determined whether or not there is an unreported error in each error detection state, and if there is such an error, the process proceeds to step S315, and if there is no such error, the process proceeds to step S316. .

In step S315, processing similar to step S305 is executed.

In step S316, it is determined whether or not the reset SW has been operated. If the reset SW has been operated, the process advances to step S317, and if there has been no operation, the process advances to step S320.

In step S317, it is determined whether each error is being reported. If each error is being reported, the process advances to step S318; if not, the process advances to step S320.

In step S318, it is determined whether the error notification termination condition is satisfied, and if the condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S319, and if the condition is not satisfied, the process proceeds to step S320.

In step S319, processing similar to step S310 is executed.

In step S320, it is determined whether the setting key SW is OFF or ON. If it is ON, the process proceeds to step S314, and if it is OFF, the process proceeds to step S321. In step S321, a settings change end command indicating to end the settings change is sent to the first sub-control unit 400. When the first sub-control unit 400 receives this setting change termination command from the main control unit 300, it executes a process of terminating the display of the management screen.

<Main control unit timer interrupt processing>
Next, the main control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described using FIG. Note that this figure is a flowchart showing the flow of main control section timer interrupt processing.

The main control unit 300 includes a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined period (approximately once every 2 ms in this embodiment). Start processing at a predetermined cycle.

In step S401, timer interrupt start processing is performed. In this timer interrupt start processing, processing for temporarily saving the values of each register of the CPU 304 in the stack area is performed.

In step S402, the WDT 314 is periodically (maintained) so that the count value of the WDT 314 does not exceed the initial setting value (32.8 ms in this embodiment) and a WDT interrupt occurs (so that an abnormality in processing is not detected). In the embodiment, the restart is performed (once every 2 ms, which is the cycle of the main control unit timer interrupt).

In step S403, input port status update processing is performed. In this input port status update process, the detection signals of the sensor circuits 320 of the various sensors 318 are input through the input ports of the I/O 310, the presence or absence of the detection signals is monitored, and the RAM 308 is partitioned for each type of sensor 318. The signal state is stored in the provided signal state storage area.

In step S404, various game processes are executed, and processes according to the interrupt status are executed.

In step S405, timer update processing is performed. More specifically, various timers are updated in respective time units.

In step S406, command setting transmission processing is performed, and various commands that have been prepared for transmission are transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. In the first sub-control unit 400, depending on the command type included in the received output schedule information, it becomes possible to determine performance control according to changes in game control in the main control unit 300, and also to determine the performance control according to the change in game control in the main control unit 300. Based on the information of the command data, it becomes possible to determine the content of production control.

In step S407, external output signal setting processing is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is outputted to the information input circuit 652 separate from the slot machine 100 via the information output circuit 334.

In step S408, device monitoring processing is performed. Although details will be described later, this device monitoring process includes a setting value confirmation process, a door opening monitoring process, a payment process, and the like.

In step S409, it is monitored whether the low voltage signal is on. If the low voltage signal is on (when power cutoff is detected), the process advances to step S411, and if the low voltage signal is off (when power cutoff is not detected), the process advances to step S410.

In step S410, various processes are performed to terminate the timer interrupt termination process. In this timer interrupt termination process, a process is performed in which the values of each register temporarily saved in step S401 are set in each original register, and the process returns to the main control unit main process.

On the other hand, in step S411, information that needs to be saved, such as specific variables and stack pointers for returning to the state at power outage upon power restoration, is saved as recovery data to a predetermined area of the RAM 308, thereby freeing up the used area of the RAM 308. A checksum value for at least a predetermined area included is derived and stored in the RAM 308, and a power flag indicating that the power cutoff process has been performed is set on.

<Device monitoring process>
Next, the device monitoring process (step S408) in the main control unit timer interrupt process described using FIG. 44 will be described using FIG. 45. Note that this figure is a flowchart showing the flow of device monitoring processing.

In step S501, after performing a setting value confirmation process, the process advances to step S502. Although details will be described later, in this setting value confirmation process, processing related to setting value confirmation is performed. In step S502, door opening monitoring processing is performed.

In the door open monitoring process, the main control unit 300 monitors the state of the open/close sensor, and when detecting a signal indicating the open detection state, stores open detection information indicating that the front door 102 has been opened to the RAM 308. At the same time, a code indicating door open is displayed on the payout number display 127, and preparations are made for transmitting a door open detection command indicating that opening of the front door 102 has been detected to the first sub-control unit 400. It should be noted that if an error is detected, the error code is given priority for display on the payout number display 127.

In the door opening monitoring process, the main control unit 300 monitors the state of the opening/closing sensor, and when detecting a signal indicating the closure detection state, stores closure detection information indicating that the closure of the front door 102 has been detected in the RAM 308. At the same time as storing, erasing the code indicating door open displayed on the payout number display 127, and transmitting a door closing detection command indicating that closing of the front door 102 has been detected to the first sub-control unit 400. Make preparations.

In step S503, after performing a payment process, the process proceeds to step S504. In this payment processing, the main control unit 300 monitors the state of the payment button 134 sensor during the validity period of the payment button 134 (for example, the period from when the game becomes possible to start until the operation of the start lever 135 is accepted). , upon detecting a signal indicating that the settlement button 134 has been operated, performs processing to settle the electronically stored medals, and sends a settlement command indicating that the processing to settle the medals has been executed to the first sub-control. 400.

In step S504, after performing other device monitoring processing, the device monitoring processing ends. Although details will be described later, other device monitoring processes include error notification start processing, error notification end processing, and the like.

<Setting value confirmation process>
Next, using FIG. 46, the setting value confirmation process (step S501) in the device monitoring process described using FIG. 45 will be described. Note that this figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the setting value confirmation process.

In step S601, it is determined whether or not the setting value is being confirmed. If the setting value is being confirmed, the process advances to step S606, and if the setting value is not being confirmed, the process advances to step S602. In step S602, it is determined whether or not it is the set value confirmation valid period. If it is the set value confirmation valid period, the process proceeds to step S603, and if it is not the set value confirmation valid period, the setting value confirmation process is ended.

Here, the set value confirmation valid period is not the MAX bet state (the state where the number of medals that can start one game (3 in this example) is bet, or the replay state due to replay), but the open/close state. This is a period in which the sensor is not in a closure detection state, any of the reels 110 to 112 are not rotating, and no error notification is being issued.

Note that the conditions regarding the set value confirmation valid period are not all of the above conditions, and may be any one of the above conditions or any plurality of the above conditions. Further, in the above condition, the condition is "not in a MAX bet state", but it may be set as "not in a bet state".

In step S603, it is determined whether the setting key SW is ON or OFF, and if it is OFF, the setting value confirmation process is ended, and if it is ON, the process advances to step S604. In step S604, the current setting value is displayed using the setting value display device 101a. For example, if the current setting value is setting 6, the number 6 indicating setting 6 is displayed. In the next step S605, preparations are made for transmitting a setting value confirmation start command indicating to start setting value confirmation to the first sub-control unit 400. When the first sub-control unit 400 receives this setting value confirmation start command from the main control unit 300, it executes processing to start displaying the management screen.

In step S606 during setting value confirmation, it is determined whether the door is in a closed state (the opening/closing sensor is in a closed detection state), and if the door is closed, the process proceeds to step S608, and if the door is not closed, the process proceeds to step S607. .

In step S607 during setting value confirmation, it is determined whether the setting key SW is OFF or ON, and if it is ON, the setting value confirmation process is ended to continue setting value confirmation, and if it is OFF, step Proceed to S608. In step S608, the display on the setting value display device 101a is erased to hide the setting value, and in the next step S609, a setting value confirmation end command indicating to end the setting value confirmation is sent to the first sub-control unit 400. Prepare for sending. When the first sub-control unit 400 receives this setting value confirmation end command from the main control unit 300, it executes a process of terminating the display of the management screen.

<Other device monitoring processing>
Next, other device monitoring processing (step S504) in the device monitoring processing described using FIG. 45 will be described using FIG. 47. Note that this figure is a flowchart showing the flow of other device monitoring processing.

In step S701, it is determined whether the device is in each error detection state (see explanation of step S304), and if it is not in each error detection state, other device monitoring processing is ended, and in each error detection state, The process advances to step S702.

In step S702, it is determined whether or not it is an error notification period. If it is not an error notification period, other device monitoring processing is ended, and if it is an error notification period, the process advances to step S703.

Here, the error notification period is a period during which settings are not being changed and any of the reels 110 to 112 is not rotating.

In step S703, it is determined whether each error is being reported. If not, the process advances to step S704; if each error is being reported, the process advances to step S705.

In step S704, error notification start processing (same as step S305) is executed.

In step S705, it is determined whether or not the front door 102 is in an open state (door open). If the door is not open, other device monitoring processing is terminated, and if the door is open, step S706 is performed. Proceed to.

In step S706, it is determined whether or not the reset SW has been operated. If the reset SW has been operated, the process advances to step S707, and if there has been no operation, other device monitoring processing is ended.

In step S707, it is determined whether the error notification termination condition is satisfied, and if the error notification termination condition is not satisfied, other device monitoring processing is terminated, and the error notification termination condition (same as step S309) is determined. If satisfied, the process advances to step S708.

In step S708, error notification termination processing is executed (same as step S310).

<Processing of first sub-control unit 400>
Next, the processing of the first sub-control unit 400 will be explained using FIG. 48. Note that FIG. 48(a) is a flowchart of the main processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. FIG. 48(b) is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing by the first sub-control unit 400. FIG. 48(c) is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing by the first sub-control unit 400.

First, in step S801, various initial settings are performed. This initial setting is executed when the power is turned on. In this process, initial settings of the input/output ports, initialization of the storage area in the RAM 408, etc. are performed. Through this process, an area for storing internal winning information, which is information representing the result of internal winning, and an area for storing information representing the gaming state are provided in the RAM 408, respectively.

In step S803, it is determined whether the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process moves to step S805.

In step S805, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

In step S807, command processing, which is processing corresponding to each command received from the main control unit 300, is executed. Here, among the processes corresponding to this command process, an overview of the process when changing the settings, the process when confirming the set value, the process corresponding to the state of the opening/closing sensor, and the process related to error detection will be explained.

The main control unit 300 sends a setting change start command to the first sub-control unit 400 when starting the setting change (step S302 in FIG. 43), and sends a setting change end command to the first sub-control unit 400 when the setting change ends. (Step S321 in FIG. 43). When receiving the setting change start command, the first sub-control unit 400 causes the light emitting bodies (various lamps 420, etc.) to emit light in an open light emission mode, and outputs a setting change sound from the sound output means (speakers 272, 277). . Further, a management screen is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157. Note that the management screen is a screen used by an administrator such as a clerk at a game parlor to make various settings regarding the slot machine 100, and in this embodiment, various settings can be made using a cross button (not shown). It becomes. Further, when a setting change end command is received, the various outputs described above are ended.

The main control unit 300 sends a setting value confirmation start command to the first sub-control unit 400 when starting setting value confirmation (step S605 in FIG. 46), and transmits a setting value confirmation end command to the first sub-control unit 400 when finishing setting value confirmation. It is transmitted to the sub-control unit 400 (step S609 in FIG. 46). When the first sub-control unit 400 receives the setting value confirmation start command, it displays a management screen in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157. Furthermore, when the setting value confirmation end command is received, the display of the management screen on the liquid crystal display device 157 is ended.

The main control unit 300 monitors the state of the open/close sensor, and when it detects a signal indicating that the door is in the open detection state, it sends a door open detection command to the first sub-control unit 400, and sends a signal indicating that the door is in the closed detection state. When detected, a door closing detection command is sent to the first sub-control unit 400 (step S502 in FIG. 45). When the first sub-control unit 400 receives the door open detection command, it stores the open detection information (in this example, information indicating "open" and the date and time of opening) in the RAM 408 in chronological order as history information, and Execute processing to start notification. On the other hand, when the door closure detection command is received, the closure detection information (in this example, information indicating "closed" and the date and time of closure) is stored in the RAM 408 as history information in chronological order, and the door open notification is terminated. Execute the process.

In this embodiment, as a door open notification, a light emitting body (various lamps 420, etc.) emits light in an open light emission mode, and an open sound (for example, a voice saying "The door is open") is emitted from the sound output means (speakers 272, 277). Output. Note that the mode of the door open notification is not particularly limited, and for example, a character string "The door is open" may be displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157.

When the main control unit 300 detects an error, it sends an error notification start command corresponding to the detected error to the first sub-control unit 400 (steps S305 and S315 in FIG. 43, and step S704 in FIG. 47), and cancels the error. When the operation is performed, an error notification end command is sent to the first sub-control unit 400 (steps S310 and S319 in FIG. 43, and step S708 in FIG. 47).

The first sub-control unit 400 executes processing to start error notification when receiving the error notification start command. In this example, when a selector error occurs, a character string such as "Selector error has occurred!!" is displayed in the display area of the display means (liquid crystal display device 157), and characters such as "Please call a game store clerk." row, the light emitters (various lamps 420, etc.) emit light in an error mode, and the sound output means (speakers 272, 277) emit an error sound (a voice such as "An error has occurred. Please call a game clerk.") ) is output. Note that the manner of error notification is not particularly limited, and for example, error notification may be performed by movement of the movable means (reels 110 to 112). Note that when error notification is performed by the sound output means and the light emitting body, if a plurality of errors are detected, error notification for one of the errors is performed in accordance with the priority order.

Furthermore, when the first sub-control unit 400 receives the error notification end command, it executes processing to end the error notification. In addition, when executing error notification in the sound output means and the light emitting body, if multiple errors are detected, processing is executed to end the error notification for the error with a high priority, and the process for ending the error notification is executed for the error with a high priority, and Errors remain unprocessed (only one error is subject to notification termination). If there are errors that have not been processed, error notification corresponding to the error with the highest priority among them is executed.

Note that the above error notification is executed with priority over the notification accompanying the door opening, but the error notification may change when the door is opened, for example by lowering the volume of the error sound (or not outputting it) when the door is opened. It may be configured to do so. Furthermore, execution of error notification is restricted while the setting change process is being executed or setting values are being confirmed.

In step S809, effect control processing is performed. Here, the processing includes processing to expand the effect data and setting device data in the effect execution area provided in the RAM 408, processing to set the effect data in the effect reservation area provided in the RAM 408, and furthermore, the received command Based on the information included in the command, processing such as setting performance data and executing control processing is performed. Note that the performance data set in the performance reservation area and the device data set in the performance execution area may be updated (overwritten) with other data. In this case, the presentation content is changed based on the overwritten data.

In step S811, sound control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S809. For example, control data is acquired from device data set in the performance execution area corresponding to the speakers 272 and 277, and the acquired control data is output to the sound source IC 418, thereby causing a sound performance to be executed.

In step S813, lamp control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S809. For example, by acquiring control data from device data set in the performance execution area corresponding to each type of lamp 420 and outputting the acquired control data to the drive circuit 422, the performance using the lamps is executed.

In step S815, shutter control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S809. For example, by acquiring control data from device data set in the performance execution area corresponding to the shutter 163 and outputting the acquired control data to the drive circuit 424, the performance by the shutter 163 is executed.

In step S817, information output processing is performed to perform settings for transmitting a control command to the second sub-control unit 500 based on the processing result of step S809. For example, if there is device data set in the performance execution area corresponding to the performance image display device 157, preparations are made to transmit this device data to the second sub-control unit 500, and the process returns to step S803.

Next, the command reception interrupt processing of the first sub-control unit 400 will be explained using FIG. 48(b). This command reception interrupt process is a process that is executed when the first sub-control unit 400 detects a strobe signal output from the main control unit 300. In step S821 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output by the main control unit 300 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 408.

Next, the first sub-control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described using FIG. 48(c). The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined period (once every 2 ms in this embodiment), and uses this timer interrupt as a trigger to perform timer interrupt processing in a predetermined manner. Execute at the cycle of

In step S831, 1 is added to the value in the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S803 in the first sub-control unit main processing shown in FIG. 48(a), and the value is stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S803, it is determined that the value of the timer variable is 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms×10).

In step S833, the device data set in step S815 is transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500, and the random value for effect is updated.

<Processing of second sub-control unit 500>
Next, the processing of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described using FIG. 49. Note that FIG. 49(a) is a flowchart of the main processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500. FIG. 49(b) is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing by the second sub-control unit 500. FIG. 49(c) is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing by the second sub-control unit 500. FIG. 49(d) is a flowchart of image control processing by the second sub-control unit 500.

First, in step S901 of FIG. 49(a), various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, initialization processing is first executed in step S901. In this initialization process, initialization of input/output ports, initialization of the storage area in the RAM 508, etc. are performed.

In step S903, it is determined whether the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process moves to step S905.

In step S905, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

In step S907, command processing is performed. In the command processing, the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500 determines whether a command has been received from the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 .

In step S909, effect control processing is performed. Specifically, if there is a new command in step S907, processing corresponding to this command is performed. For example, a process of reading out effect data for controlling an image related to a background image from the ROM 506 is executed. It also includes performing processes such as reading out performance data other than this from the ROM 506, and performing update processing of the performance data when it is necessary to update the performance data.

In step S911, image control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S909. For example, if there is an image control command in the effect data read in step S909, image control corresponding to this command is performed. For example, image control regarding display images (notification images, background images) is performed. This image control processing will be described later using FIG. 49(d). When this image control process ends, the process returns to step S903.

Next, the command reception interrupt processing of the second sub-control unit 500 will be explained using FIG. 49(b). This command reception interrupt process is a process that is executed when the second sub-control unit 500 detects a strobe signal output by the first sub-control unit 400. In step S915 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output by the first sub-control unit 400 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 508.

Next, the second sub-control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described using FIG. 49(c). The second sub-control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined period (once every 2 ms in this embodiment), and uses this timer interrupt as a trigger to perform timer interrupt processing in a predetermined manner. Execute at the cycle of

In step S917, 1 is added to the value in the timer variable storage area of the RAM 508 described in step S903 in the second sub-control unit main processing shown in FIG. 49(a), and the value is stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S903, it is determined that the value of the timer variable is 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms×10).

In step S919, processing for updating the random number value for effect, etc. is performed.

Next, the image control process of step S911 in the main process of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described using FIG. 49(d). This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of image control processing.

In step S921, an image data transfer instruction is issued. Here, the CPU 504 first swaps the drawing area designations of the display area A and the display area B of the VRAM 518. As a result, one frame of the image stored in the display area that is not designated as the drawing area is displayed on the effect image display device 157. Next, the CPU 504 sets ROM coordinates (transfer source address of ROM 506), VRAM coordinates (transfer destination address of VRAM 518), etc. in the attribute register of VDP 516 based on the position information table, and then transfers the image from ROM 506 to VRAM 518. Set the command to start data transfer. The VDP 516 transfers image data from the ROM 506 to the VRAM 518 based on instructions set in the attribute register. Thereafter, the VDP 516 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 504.

In step S923, it is determined whether or not the transfer end interrupt signal from the VDP 516 has been input. If the transfer end interrupt signal has been input, the process advances to step S925; otherwise, the transfer end interrupt signal is input. wait until

In step S925, parameters are set based on the performance scenario configuration table, attribute data, and the like. Here, in order to form a display image in the display area A or B of the VRAM 518 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 518 in step S921, the CPU 504 displays information on image data constituting the display image (coordinate axes of the VRAM 518, image size , VRAM coordinates (arrangement coordinates), image overlay and transparency, etc.) to the VDP 516. The VDP 516 performs parameter settings according to attributes based on instructions stored in the attribute register.

In step S927, a drawing instruction is given. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 504 instructs the VDP 516 to start drawing an image. The VDP 516 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer according to instructions from the CPU 504.

In step S929, it is determined whether or not a generation end interrupt signal from the VDP 516 based on the end of image drawing has been input. If the generation end interrupt signal has been input, the process advances to step S931; otherwise, the generation end interrupt signal is input. Wait for input.

In step S931, a scene display counter that is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 508 and counts how many scenes of images have been generated is incremented (+1), and the process ends.

≪Operation example explanation≫
An example of the operation of the slot machine 100 described above will be described below.

[Example of operation when changing settings]
An example of a case where the setting change is executed will be described below using FIG. 50(A).

First, FIG. 50(A)(1) shows a state in which the front door 102 of the slot machine 100 is opened while the power is off, and the setting key SW is turned on by the manager of the game parlor. . Note that when the power is OFF, the light emitters (various lamps 420, etc.) are off, the sound output means (speakers 272, 277) are not outputting audio, and the display means (effect image display device) 157) is in a hidden state.

Next, FIG. 50(A)(2) shows the state when the power is turned on from the state shown in FIG. 50(A)(1) and the power is turned on. When the slot machine 100 is powered on with the setting key SW turned ON, a setting change process (step S206 in FIG. 42) is executed, and the slot machine 100 enters a state in which setting values can be changed (setting change mode). It is composed of

In this setting change process, a setting change start command is transmitted (step S302 in FIG. 43), and the first sub-control unit 400 that receives this command outputs a setting change sound from the sound output means (speakers 272, 277). Then, a process is executed in which the light emitters (various lamps 420, etc.) emit light in an open light emission mode, and the management screen is displayed on the effect image display device 157 (step S807 in FIG. 48). Further, a process (step S303 in FIG. 43) of displaying the current setting value using the setting value display device 101a is executed. In FIG. 50(A)(2), the number 6 indicating setting 6 is displayed on the setting value display device 101a.

While the setting change process is being executed (setting change mode), each time an operation of the reset SW is detected, the currently set setting value is incremented by 1 in the range of 1 to 6, and the setting value is updated. By repeating the process of returning to 1 when the value exceeds 6, the set value can be changed (step S307 in FIG. 43). FIG. 50(A)(3) shows that the reset SW has been operated and the number 1 indicating setting 1 changed by this operation is displayed on the setting value display device 101a. ing.

Further, by operating the start lever 135, the set value is determined, and the display on the set value display device 101a becomes a non-display state (steps S311 to S313 in FIG. 43). FIG. 50(A)(4) shows a state when the start lever 135 is operated from the state of FIG. 50(A)(3). Note that if the setting key is in the OFF state after the start lever 135 is operated, this setting change process is ended (step S320 in FIG. 43). At this time, a settings change end command indicating to end the settings change is sent (step S321 in FIG. 43), and the first sub-control unit 400 that receives this command ends various outputs during the settings change (see FIG. 48 step S807).

Immediately after the setting change is completed, since the opening/closing sensor is in the open detection state, a door open detection command is sent to the first sub-control unit 400 (step S502 in FIG. 45). Upon receiving this command, the first sub-control unit 400 emits light from a light emitting body (various lamps 420, etc.) in an open light emission mode as a door open notification, and outputs an open sound from the sound output means (speakers 272, 277). "The door is opening" is output. FIG. 50(A)(5) shows a state in which this door open notification is executed. The state when the setting key is turned off is shown. In this state, the player is waiting to start playing, and the effect image display device 157 executes a process of displaying a customer waiting effect (step S807 in FIG. 48).

[Example of operation when setting value confirmation is executed]
An example of executing setting value confirmation will be described below using FIG. 50(B).

First, in FIG. 50(B)(1), in the slot machine 100 with the power turned on, the reels 110 to 112 are stopped (waiting for the player to start playing), and the light emitting bodies (various lamps 420 etc.) emits light in a customer-waiting light emission mode, customer-waiting BGM is output from the sound output means (speakers 272, 277), and the customer-waiting effect is displayed on the effect image display device 157.

Next, FIG. 50(B)(2) shows the state when the front door 102 changes from the state shown in FIG. 50(B)(1) to the open state and the open/close sensor enters the open detection state. ing. In this case, a door open detection command is transmitted (step S502 in FIG. 45), and the first sub-control unit 400 that receives this command outputs an opening sound from the sound output means (speakers 272, 277) and A process of emitting light from various lamps 420, etc.) in an open light emission mode is executed (step S807 in FIG. 48). Note that the display on the effect image display device 157 maintains a state in which the customer waiting effect is displayed.

Further, it is assumed that the setting key SW is subsequently turned on from the state shown in FIG. 50(B)(2). FIG. 50(B)(3) shows the state at this time. The slot machine 100 is configured so that by turning on the setting key SW, the current setting value can be confirmed (setting value confirmation mode) (Yes in step S603 in FIG. 46). judgment). In this state, the process of displaying the current setting value using the setting value display device 101a (step S604 in FIG. 46) is executed. FIG. 50B (3) shows how the number 1 indicating setting 1 is displayed on the setting value display device 101a. Further, a setting value confirmation start command is transmitted (step S605 in FIG. 46), and the first sub-control unit 400 that has received this command executes processing to display the management screen on the effect image display device 157. (Steps S807 to S817 in FIG. 48). Note that the output from the sound output means (speakers 272, 277) is maintained as an open sound, and the light emission mode of the light emitters (various lamps 420, etc.) is maintained in the open light emission mode. Note that the content displayed on the effect image display device 157 is configured to display the same screen as in the setting change mode, but even if it is configured to display a screen different from that in the setting change mode. good.

Further, it is assumed that the setting key SW is subsequently turned OFF from the state shown in FIG. 50(B)(3). FIG. 50(B)(4) shows the state at this time. The slot machine 100 is configured such that the state in which the current setting value can be confirmed (setting value confirmation mode) is terminated by turning the setting key SW into the OFF state (step S607 in FIG. 46). (Determination of Yes). In this case, the setting value display device 101a is not displayed (step S608 in FIG. 46). In addition, a control command to end setting value confirmation is transmitted (step S609 in FIG. 46), and the first sub-control unit 400 that has received this command ends the display of the management screen on the effect image display device 157 and waits for the customer. Processing to display the effect is executed (step S807 in FIG. 48). Note that in the state of FIG. 50(B)(4), the open/close sensor remains in the open detection state, so the output of the open sound from the sound output means (speakers 272, 277) is maintained, and the light emitting body (various lamps 420) etc.) is maintained as the open light emission mode.

[Example of operation when front door 102 is closed while changing settings]
In the above [Example of operation when changing settings], the operation in a state where the front door 102 of the slot machine 100 is opened has been described. An example of a case where the front door 102 is closed while the setting change is being executed will be described below with reference to FIG. 51(A).

First, the states of FIG. 51(A)(1) and FIG. 51(A)(2) are the same as FIG. 50(A)(1) and FIG. 50(A)(2), respectively. Further, FIG. 51(A)(3) shows a state when the front door 102 changes from the state shown in FIG. 51(A)(2) to the closed state and the opening/closing sensor enters the closing detection state. Further, FIG. 51(A)(4) shows the state when the front door 102 changes from the state shown in FIG. 51(A)(3) to the open state and the opening/closing sensor enters the open detection state. .

While the setting change process is being executed (setting change mode), the state is not changed by the signal from the opening/closing sensor, which is before the start of the main control section timer interrupt process. In other words, the execution state of the setting change process is maintained, and even if the front door 102 is closed while the setting change process is being executed, as shown in FIG. 51(A)(3), the setting change process cannot be executed. The condition will be maintained. Moreover, by opening the front door 102 again, the state shown in FIG. 51(A)(4) (same state as FIG. 51(A)(2)) is achieved, and the settings can be changed. In addition, not only the execution state of the setting change process but also the states of the light emitting bodies (various lamps 420, etc.), the sound output means (speakers 272, 277), and the effect image display device 157 are maintained. 51(A)(3) and FIG. 51(A)(4) show that the state of the device is maintained unchanged. Note that when the opening/closing sensor enters the closed detection state, the display on the set value display device 101a may be set to a non-display state.

[Operation example when the front door 102 is closed while setting value confirmation is being executed]
In the above [Example of operation when setting value confirmation is executed], the operation when the front door 102 of the slot machine 100 is opened has been described. An example of a case where the front door 102 is closed during setting value confirmation will be described below with reference to FIG. 51(B).

First, the states of FIG. 51(B)(1) and FIG. 51(B)(2) are the same as FIG. 50(B)(1) and FIG. 50(B)(3), respectively. Further, FIG. 51(B)(3) shows a state when the front door 102 changes from the state shown in FIG. 51(B)(2) to the closed state and the opening/closing sensor enters the closing detection state. Further, FIG. 51(B)(4) shows the state when the front door 102 changes from the state shown in FIG. 51(B)(3) to the open state and the opening/closing sensor enters the open detection state. .

While the set value confirmation process is being executed (set value confirmation mode), the setting value confirmation mode is configured to end when the signal from the opening/closing sensor enters the closed detection state in the same way as when the setting key is turned OFF. (Yes determination in step S606 in FIG. 46). FIG. 51(B)(3) shows that the display on the setting value display device 101a is in a hidden state because the setting value confirmation mode has ended with the setting key still in the ON state. . It is also shown that the state is the same as in FIG. 51(B)(1) except for the state of the setting key.

When the front door 102 is opened again from the state shown in FIG. 51(B)(3), the setting value confirmation mode is started again since the setting key is already in the ON state (see FIG. 46). (Yes determination in step S603). FIG. 51(B)(4) shows the same state as the state shown in FIG. 51(B)(2).

[Example of operation when the setting key SW is ON (1)]
In the above [Example of operation when front door 102 is closed during set value confirmation], it has been explained that if the front door 102 is closed while the setting key is in the ON state, the set value confirmation mode ends. In this state, it is possible to play the game with the setting key in the ON state.

On the other hand, when the setting key is ON, if the setting value confirmation is valid, it is possible to start the setting value confirmation mode again by opening the front door 102, but if the setting value confirmation is not valid. The setting value confirmation mode is configured not to start during the period. A detailed explanation will be given below using the example of FIG. 52(A).

First, in FIG. 52(A)(1), in the slot machine 100 with the power turned on, the reels 110 to 112 are rotating (during the game), and the light emitting bodies (various lamps 420, etc.) emit light during the game. A state is shown in which the BGM during the game is outputted from the sound output means (speakers 272, 277), and the effect during the game is displayed on the effect image display device 157. Note that the front door 102 is in a closed state, the opening/closing sensor is in a closed detection state, and the setting key SW is in an ON state. This state is a state in which a game is played after the front door 102 is closed while the set value confirmation mode is being executed.

FIG. 52(A)(2) shows the state when the front door 102 changes from the state shown in FIG. 52(A)(1) to the open state and the opening/closing sensor enters the open detection state. Here, since the reels 110 to 112 are rotating (playing) and the set value confirmation is not valid period, the set value confirmation mode is not executed (No determination in step S602 in FIG. 46). In this case, a door open detection command is transmitted (step S502 in FIG. 45), and the first sub-control unit 400 that receives this command outputs an opening sound from the sound output means (speakers 272, 277) and A process of emitting light from various lamps 420, etc.) in an open light emission mode is executed (step S807 in FIG. 48). Note that the display on the effect image display device 157 maintains the state in which the effect is displayed during the game.

Since the setting value confirmation mode cannot be executed in the state shown in FIG. 52(A)(2), it is necessary to end the game at least once in order to execute the setting value confirmation mode. In FIG. 52(A)(3), after the front door 102 is closed from the state shown in FIG. 52(A)(2) and returned to the state shown in FIG. 52(A)(1), the stop button 137 is - 139 is operated to bring the reels 110 to 112 into a stopped state. In this example, a bell has been won, and a state is shown in which the fact that the bell has been won is displayed in the performance during the game on the performance image display device 157. At this time, the light emitting bodies (various lamps 420, etc.) and the sound output means (speakers 272, 277) perform effects corresponding to the winning of the bell.

Subsequently, FIG. 52(A)(4) shows the state when the front door 102 is opened from the state shown in FIG. 52(A)(3) and the opening/closing sensor is in the open detection state. In this state, it is the set value confirmation valid period, so the set value confirmation mode is started again (Yes in step S603 in FIG. 46). FIG. 52(A)(4) shows the same state as that shown in FIG. 51(B)(2) and FIG. 51(B)(4). In addition, in the case of replay winning in FIG. 52(A)(3), even if the reels 110 to 112 are in a stopped state, it is not the set value confirmation valid period, so even if the front door 102 is opened, the set value is not valid. Verification mode is not started.

[Example of operation when setting key SW is ON (2)]
In the above [Example of operation when the setting key SW is ON (1)], an example is explained in which the setting value confirmation mode does not start during a period other than the setting value confirmation valid period even if the setting key SW is in the ON state. did. Furthermore, below, an example different from FIG. 52(A) will be specifically described using FIG. 52(B).

First, FIG. 52(B)(1) shows a state in which three medals are bet (injected state, before the start of the game) in the slot machine 100 with the power turned on, and a light emitting body (various lamps 420) etc.) emits light in a light-emitting manner during the game, BGM during the game is output from the sound output means (speakers 272, 277), and a customer waiting performance is displayed on the performance image display device 157. Note that the front door 102 is in a closed state, the opening/closing sensor is in a closed detection state, and the setting key SW is in an ON state. This state is a state in which a bet operation is made to start a game after the front door 102 is closed while the set value confirmation mode is being executed.

FIG. 52(B)(2) shows the state when the front door 102 changes from the state shown in FIG. 52(B)(1) to the open state and the opening/closing sensor enters the open detection state. Here, three medals are bet (inserted state) and the set value confirmation valid period is not in effect, so the set value confirmation mode is not executed (No determination in step S602 in FIG. 46). In this case, a door open detection command is transmitted (step S502 in FIG. 45), and the first sub-control unit 400 that receives this command outputs an opening sound from the sound output means (speakers 272, 277) and A process of emitting light from various lamps 420, etc.) in an open light emission mode is executed (step S807 in FIG. 48). Note that the display on the effect image display device 157 maintains a state in which the customer waiting effect is displayed.

Since the set value confirmation mode cannot be executed in the state shown in FIG. It is necessary to do so (put it in a non-energized state). In FIG. 52(B)(3), after the front door 102 is closed from the state shown in FIG. 52(B)(2) and returned to the state shown in FIG. 52(B)(1), the payment button 13 The situation is shown when the power is turned off by operating the button.

Subsequently, FIG. 52(B)(4) shows the state when the front door 102 is opened from the state shown in FIG. 52(B)(3) and the opening/closing sensor is in the open detection state. In this state, it is the set value confirmation valid period, so the set value confirmation mode is started again (Yes in step S603 in FIG. 46). FIG. 52(B)(4) shows the same state as that shown in FIG. 51(B)(2) and FIG. 51(B)(4).

[Example of error notification and error release operation (1)]
An example of error cancellation will be described below with reference to FIG. 53(A).

First, FIG. 53(A)(1) shows a state in which a selector error is detected in the slot machine 100 with the power turned on. In this case, an error code (in this example, "CE" corresponding to the selector error) is displayed on the payout number display 127, and an error notification start command corresponding to the selector error is transmitted (step S704 in FIG. 47). Upon receiving the error notification start command, the first sub-control unit 400 outputs an error sound to notify the selector error from the sound output means (speakers 272, 277), and causes the light emitting bodies (various lamps 420, etc.) to respond to the selector error. A process is executed in which the light is emitted in an error light emission mode and a screen notifying a selector error is displayed on the effect image display device 157 (step S807 in FIG. 48).

Subsequently, FIG. 53(A)(2) shows a state in which a hopper error is further detected in addition to the state in which the selector error in FIG. 53(A)(1) is detected. That is, at this point, two types of errors have been detected. If a plurality of such errors are detected, the payout number display 127 displays an error code for one of the errors in priority order. In this embodiment, a selector error is set to have a higher priority than a hopper error, and the payout number display 127 displays a selector error. Furthermore, an error notification start command corresponding to the hopper error is transmitted (step S704 in FIG. 47), and the first sub-control unit 400 that has received this error notification start command executes error notification. When error notification is performed using the sound output means or the light emitting body, if a plurality of errors are detected, error notification for one of the errors is performed according to the priority order. In this embodiment, the selector error is set to have a higher priority than the hopper error, and the error sound from the sound output means (speakers 272, 277) and the error light emission mode from the light emitting body (various lamps 420, etc.) are set. Both correspond to selector errors. On the other hand, in the effect image display device 157, a process is executed to display a screen notifying the hopper error in addition to the selector error currently being notified (step S807 in FIG. 48).

In the state where the two types of errors explained in FIGS. 53(A) and (2) are detected, open the front door 102 to eliminate these errors (error non-detection state), and then press the reset switch to cancel the error notification. Suppose you press once. FIG. 53(A)(3) shows the state at this time. If the cause of the error notification has been removed and the error detection state has been resolved, the error notification can be canceled by operating the reset SW (Yes in step S706 in FIG. 47, step S708). However, if multiple errors are detected, one of them will be canceled in accordance with the priority order, and new error notifications will be executed for the other errors (only one error will cause notification to end). subject). FIG. 53A (3) shows that the error notification for the selector error has been canceled and the error notification for the remaining hopper error is being executed. Specifically, an error code (in this example, "HO" corresponding to a hopper error) is displayed on the payout number display 127, and an error sound is output from the sound output means (speakers 272, 277) to notify the hopper error. , the light emitters (various lamps 420, etc.) emit light in an error light emission mode corresponding to the hopper error, and a screen notifying the hopper error is displayed on the effect image display device 157.

Furthermore, assume that the reset SW is pressed once in the state shown in FIG. 53(A)(3) in order to cancel the remaining error notification. FIG. 53(A)(4) shows the state at this time. If the cause of the error notification has been removed and the error detection state has been resolved, the error notification can be canceled by operating the reset SW (Yes in step S706 in FIG. 47, step S708). FIG. 53(A)(4) shows that the error notification regarding the hopper error has been canceled. Further, in this case, since the open sensor is in the open detecting state, a code indicating door open ("dr" in this example) is displayed on the payout number display 127. Furthermore, when the door open detection command is sent to the first sub-control unit 400, an open sound is output from the sound output means (speakers 272, 277), and the light emitting bodies (various lamps 420, etc.) emit light in an open light emission mode. The state will be as follows. Note that the effect image display device 157 shows a state in which a customer waiting effect is displayed.

[Example of error notification and error release operation (2)]
In the above [Example of error notification and error cancellation operation (1)], we explained the case where a hopper error occurs after a selector error occurs, but even if the order of occurrence is reversed, the error cancellation operation will be the same. Become. An example of this case will be described below using FIG. 53(B).

First, FIG. 53(B)(1) shows a state in which a hopper error is detected in the slot machine 100 with the power turned on. In this case, an error code (in this example, "HO" corresponding to a hopper error) is displayed on the payout number display 127, and an error notification start command corresponding to the hopper error is transmitted (step S704 in FIG. 47). Upon receiving the error notification start command, the first sub-control unit 400 outputs an error sound to notify the hopper error from the sound output means (speakers 272, 277), and causes the light emitting bodies (various lamps 420, etc.) to respond to the hopper error. A process of emitting light in an error light emission mode and displaying a screen notifying a hopper error on the effect image display device 157 is executed (steps S807 to S817 in FIG. 48).

Subsequently, FIG. 53(B)(2) shows a state in which a selector error is further detected in addition to the state in which the hopper error of FIG. 53(B)(1) is detected. That is, at this point, two types of errors have been detected. If a plurality of such errors are detected, the payout number display 127 displays an error code for one of the errors in priority order. In this embodiment, a selector error is set to have a higher priority than a hopper error, and the payout number display 127 displays a selector error. Further, an error notification start command corresponding to the selector error is transmitted (step S704 in FIG. 47), and error notification is executed by the first sub-control unit 400 that has received this error notification start command. When performing error notification using the sound output means or the light emitting body, if a plurality of errors are detected, error notification for one of the errors is performed according to the priority order. In this embodiment, the selector error is set to have a higher priority than the hopper error, and the error sound from the sound output means (speakers 272, 277) and the error light emission mode from the light emitting body (various lamps 420, etc.) are set. Both correspond to selector errors. On the other hand, in the effect image display device 157, a process is executed to display a screen notifying a hopper error in addition to the currently notifying selector error (steps S807 to S817 in FIG. 48).

53(A)(3), FIG. 53(A)(4) ). FIG. 53(B)(3) shows a state in which the error notification of the selector error is canceled by the first reset SW operation, similar to FIG. 53(A)(3), and FIG. )(4) shows a state in which the error notification of the hopper error is canceled by the second reset SW operation, similar to FIG. 53(A)(4).

[Example of error notification and error cancellation while changing settings]
An example of the operation when an error is detected during setting change will be described below with reference to FIG. 54(A). Note that this operation example assumes that the settings are in a state where the settings can be changed (before the operation of the start lever 135 is determined in step S311 in FIG. 43 and the set value is determined).

First, FIG. 54A (1) shows a state in which the power is turned on with the setting key SW in the ON state, and the setting value can be changed (setting change mode). In this setting change process, a setting change start command is transmitted (step S302 in FIG. 43), and the first sub-control unit 400 that receives this command outputs a setting change sound from the sound output means (speakers 272, 277). Then, a process is executed in which the light emitters (various lamps 420, etc.) emit light in an open light emission mode, and the management screen is displayed on the effect image display device 157 (step S807 in FIG. 48). Further, a process (step S303 in FIG. 43) of displaying the current setting value using the setting value display device 101a is executed. FIG. 54A (1) shows how the number 1 indicating setting 1 is displayed on the setting value display device 101a. Further, in this example, a code indicating door open ("dr" in this example) is displayed on the payout number display 127.

FIG. 54(A)(2) shows a state when a selector error is detected from the state shown in FIG. 54(A)(1). In this case, an error code (in this example, "CE" corresponding to the selector error) is displayed on the payout number display 127, and an error notification start command corresponding to the selector error is transmitted (step S305 in FIG. 43). Here, in this embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which execution of error notification by the first sub-control unit 400 is restricted while the setting change process is being executed or setting values are being confirmed (step S807 in FIG. 48). Therefore, in FIG. 54(A)(2), all of the light emitting bodies (various lamps 420, etc.), sound output means (speakers 272, 277), and display means (effect image display device 157) are shown in FIG. It is shown that there has been no change from state (1). In other words, error notification during execution of the setting change process is executed only on the payout number display 127. Note that while the setting change process is being executed (setting change mode), the state is not changed by the signal from the opening/closing sensor, which is before the start of the main control section timer interrupt process. FIG. 54(A)(3) shows that even if the front door 102 is closed from the state of FIG. 54(A)(2), the state of FIG. 54(A)(2) is maintained. ing.

The error notification during execution of the setting change process can be canceled by operating the reset SW after the cause of the error notification is removed (error non-detection state) (Yes determination in step S306 of FIG. 43, Step S310). However, since the reset SW is used to add and update the set value, the set value is added when the error notification is canceled. In FIG. 54(A)(4), the error notification by the payout number display 127 is canceled by operating the reset SW in the state of FIG. 54(A)(2) (the code indicating door open is not displayed). The number 2 indicating setting 2, which has been added and updated from setting 1, is displayed on the setting value display device 101a. Note that in a configuration in which the reset SW plays the role of both adding and updating the set value and canceling error notification, convenience may be improved because the error can be canceled while changing the set value.

Note that in FIG. 54(A), the operation in a state where the settings can be changed (before the operation of the start lever 135 is determined in step S311 in FIG. 43 and the set value is finalized) has been described. Even after 135 is operated (after the set value is determined), the error notification by the payout number display 127 will be executed until the setting change process is completed.

[Example of error notification and error release operation while checking setting values]
An example of the operation when an error is detected during setting value confirmation will be described below with reference to FIG. 54(B).

First, FIG. 54B (1) shows a state when a selector error is detected after opening the front door 102 and turning on the setting key SW to enter the setting value confirmation mode. When the front door 102 is in the open state, the first sub-control unit 400 that has received the door open detection command executes door open notification (step S502 in FIG. 45, step S807 in FIG. 48). Specifically, the light emitters (various lamps 420, etc.) emit light in an open light emission mode, and the sound output means (speakers 272, 277) output an open sound (for example, a voice saying "The door is opening"). Then, by turning on the setting key SW, the process of displaying the current setting value using the setting value display device 101a (step S604 in FIG. 46) is executed, and furthermore, the setting value confirmation start command is transmitted ( Step S605 in FIG. 46). The first sub-control unit 400 that has received this set value confirmation start command executes processing to display a management screen on the effect image display device 157 (step S807 in FIG. 48).

Through the above processing, the current setting value is displayed on the setting value display device 101a, the light emitters (various lamps 420, etc.) emit light in an open light emission mode, and an open sound is output from the sound output means (speakers 272, 277). , the management screen is displayed on the effect image display device 157. If an error is detected in this state, an error code (in this example, "CE" corresponding to the selector error) is displayed on the payout number display 127, and an error notification start command corresponding to the selector error is transmitted ( Step S305 in FIG. 43). However, in this embodiment, execution of error notification by the first sub-control unit 400 is restricted while the setting change process is being executed or setting values are being confirmed (step S807 in FIG. 48). That is, as shown in FIG. 54(B)(1), the light emitters (various lamps 420, etc.) emit light in an open light emission mode, the open sound is output from the sound output means (speakers 272, 277), and the effect image is displayed. The management screen will remain displayed on the device 157. That is, the error notification during setting value confirmation is executed only on the payout number display 127.

FIG. 54(B)(2) shows the state when the front door 102 is closed from the state of FIG. 54(B)(1). In this case, by closing the front door 102, the setting value display device 101a becomes hidden, and the setting value confirmation mode ends (Yes in step S606 in FIG. 46). Further, when the setting value confirmation mode ends, error notification can be executed. In FIG. 54(B)(2), an error sound for notifying a selector error is output from the sound output means (speakers 272, 277), and the light emitters (various lamps 420, etc.) are set in an error light emission mode corresponding to the selector error. It is shown that light is emitted and a screen notifying a selector error is displayed on the effect image display device 157.

FIG. 54(B)(3) shows the state when the front door 102 is opened from the state of FIG. 54(B)(2). In FIG. 51(B), an example was explained in which the setting value confirmation mode is restarted when the front door 102 is opened with the setting key SW in the ON state. It is determined that the confirmation validity period is not valid (determination of No in step S602 of FIG. 46). Therefore, the setting value confirmation mode is not restarted, and the error notification shown in FIG. 54(B)(2) continues to be executed. Note that depending on the error at this time, the game may be allowed to proceed.

FIG. 54(B)(4) shows the state when the reset SW is operated after the cause of the error notification has been removed from the state of FIG. 54(B)(3) (error non-detection state). There is. By operating this reset SW, the error notification can be canceled (Yes in step S706 in FIG. 47, step S708). By canceling this error notification, it is determined that the set value confirmation valid period has come (Yes determination in step S602 of FIG. 46), and the set value is displayed on the set value display device 101a as shown in FIG. 54 (B) (4). It can be set to the displayed state (setting value confirmation mode).

For example, in the state shown in FIG. 54 (B) (3), if the door is opened but the detection state of the open/close sensor is forcibly changed to the closed detection state, if the reset SW is operated, the management screen will be displayed. The player is not in a state in which a customer waiting effect is displayed (a game-enabled state), rather than in a state in which a customer waiting effect is displayed (a setting confirmation mode).

[About error notification termination conditions]
In the above example, we explained the operation of canceling the error notification by operating the reset SW after the cause of the error notification has been removed (error non-detection state), but strictly speaking, the error notification ends when the reset SW is operated. Error notification occurs when the conditions (the cause of the error currently being notified has been removed (error non-detection state), and the execution period of error notification exceeds the period of one cycle of the error sound) are met. can be canceled. Hereinafter, this error notification termination condition will be explained using FIG. 55.

FIG. 55 is a diagram showing a timing chart regarding error detection.

First, the operation from timing t1 to t6 will be explained.

At timing t1, the first selector error is detected. In response to this selector error, display of the selector error, output of the selector error sound, and ON state of the security signal are shown to start from timing t1. Note that this security signal is a signal for notifying the outside of the slot machine 100 of the occurrence of an error, and is output from the information output circuit 334.

At timing t2, the reset SW is operated. At this point, the selector error is not detected and the selector error sound has not been output for one cycle, so the error notification termination condition is not satisfied and the error notification continues.

At timing t3, the first selector error is not detected.

At timing t4, the reset SW is operated. Although the selector error is not detected at this point, since the selector error sound has not been output for one cycle, the error notification termination condition is not satisfied and the error notification continues.

At timing t5, the output of the first cycle of the selector error sound is completed and the output of the selector error sound is in the second cycle.

At timing t6, the reset SW is operated. At this point, the selector error is not detected and the selector error sound has been output for one cycle, so the error notification termination condition is met and the error notification is canceled. Further, all error notifications are completed and the security signal is turned off.

Next, the operation from timing t7 to t12 will be explained.

At timing t7, the first hopper error is detected. In response to this hopper error, it is shown that the display of the hopper error, the output of the hopper error sound, and the ON state of the security signal (a signal indicating the occurrence of an error) start from timing t7.

At timing t8, the first hopper error is not detected, and the second selector error is detected. In response to this selector error, display of the selector error and output of the selector error sound are shown to start from timing t8. Note that since the selector error has a higher priority than the hopper error, the output of the hopper error sound is temporarily terminated along with the output of the selector error sound. Furthermore, the state of the security signal (signal indicating the occurrence of an error) continues as is.

At timing t9, the second selector error is not detected.

At timing t10, the reset SW is operated. At this point, the selector error is not detected and the selector error sound has been output for one cycle, so the error notification termination condition is met and the error notification corresponding to the selector error is canceled. On the other hand, the error notification corresponding to the first hopper error is not canceled, and the output of the hopper error sound, which had once ended, is restarted. In this example, the hopper error sound is output again from the beginning, but the volume may be changed without outputting the error sound again. Note that the state of the security signal (signal indicating the occurrence of an error) continues as is.

At timing t11, the reset SW is operated. Although the hopper error is not detected at this point, since the hopper error sound has not been output for one cycle, the error notification termination condition is not satisfied and the error notification continues.

At timing t12, the reset SW is operated. At this point, the hopper error is not detected and the hopper error sound has been output for one cycle, so the error notification termination condition is met and the error notification is canceled. Further, all error notifications are completed and the security signal is turned off.

Next, the operation from timing t13 to t15 will be explained.

At timing t13, the third selector error is detected. In response to this selector error, it is shown that the display of the selector error, the output of the selector error sound, and the ON state of the security signal (signal indicating the occurrence of an error) start from timing t13.

At timing t14, the third selector error is not detected, and the front door 102 is in the open detection state. In this example, the selector error sound is turned off in accordance with the period when the front door 102 is in the open detection state.

At timing t15, the front door 102 is in the closed detection state. In this example, when the front door 102 enters the closed detection state, the selector error sound is returned to the output state. In this example, the selector error sound is re-outputted from the beginning, but the volume may be changed without re-outputting the error sound.

Note that in the above example, the security signal is turned on according to the period in which the error notification is being made, but for example, when an error is detected, the security signal is turned on for a certain period of time and then turned off for a certain period of time. You can also use it as In this configuration, for example, even if multiple errors occur, the security signal for the first error is turned on, then turned off for a certain period of time, and then the security signal for the second error is turned on. This makes it easier to understand the number of times an error has occurred.

Note that in this embodiment, when multiple errors occur, error displays corresponding to each of the multiple errors are displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157, but the number of paid sheets display Similarly to the error code displayed at 127 or the error sound output from the sound output means, only the error display of the priority error may be displayed. In this case, when the second selector error is detected at timing t8 in FIG. Since the priority is higher than that of the hopper error, the display of the hopper error and the output of the hopper error sound will be temporarily terminated. Then, when the selector error is canceled, the display of the hopper error, the output of the hopper error sound, etc. are started in the same manner as at timing t10.

[Modified example of error notification and error cancellation]
In the above [Operation example (1) of error notification and error cancellation] and [Operation example (2) of error notification and error cancellation], multiple error notifications are executed, and all causes of error notification are removed. The operation has been described in which the reset SW is operated in a state where the error notification is canceled in accordance with the priority order. Here, if only part of the cause of the error notification has been removed, the error notification may be canceled for the error whose cause has been removed. Alternatively, one of the error notifications may be targeted according to the priority order, and the error notification may be canceled when the cause of the error notification has been removed. An example of operation when this configuration is adopted will be described below with reference to FIG. 56.

First, the states of FIG. 56(A)(1) and FIG. 56(A)(2) are the same as FIG. 53(A)(1) and FIG. 53(A)(2), respectively.

In the state where the two types of errors shown in FIGS. 56(A) and (2) are detected, open the front door 102 to eliminate only the hopper error (error non-detection state), and then turn the reset switch to cancel the error notification. Suppose you press the button twice. FIG. 56(A)(3) shows the state at this time. Here, of the selector error and the hopper error, the selector error with a higher priority is the target of cancellation, but since the cause of this selector error has not been resolved, the error notification is not canceled. FIG. 56(A)(3) shows that the reset SW has been pressed once, but the error notification has not been canceled. If the error notification for a hopper error whose cause of error has been resolved is canceled by operating the reset SW, the error notification will be canceled without the administrator recognizing the hopper error. In the example of FIG. 56(A), such a situation does not occur, so that the administrator can cancel the error notification after recognizing the error.

Furthermore, suppose that the selector error is resolved (error non-detected state) from the state where the two types of errors shown in FIGS. 56(A) and (3) are detected, and the reset SW is pressed once to cancel the error notification. . FIG. 56(A)(4) shows the state at this time. Here, of the selector error and the hopper error, the selector error with a higher priority is the target of cancellation, and since the cause of this selector error has been resolved, the error notification for the selector error is canceled. FIG. 56A (4) shows that as a result of pressing the reset SW once, the error notification of the selector error is canceled and the error notification of the remaining hopper error is executed.

Next, the states of FIG. 56(B)(1) and FIG. 56(B)(2) are the same as FIG. 53(B)(1) and FIG. 53(B)(2), respectively. The state in FIG. 56(B)(2) is the same as FIG. 56(A)(2), and the following states in FIG. 56(B)(3) and FIG. 56(B)(4) are as follows. This is the same as FIG. 56(A)(3) and FIG. 56(A)(4), respectively. That is, the example of FIG. 56(B) differs from that of FIG. 56(A) in the order of error notification until two types of errors are detected. However, this difference in the order of error notification has no effect on error cancellation.

[Modified example when the front door 102 is closed during setting value confirmation]
The slot machine 100 of the present embodiment is provided with a front door 102, and in the above [operation example when the front door 102 is closed during set value confirmation], the slot machine An example in which 100 states change has been described.

Here, for example, in the case of a configuration in which a plurality of doors are provided, such as the front door 102 consisting of two doors, an upper door and a lower door, how to apply the above operation is difficult. It becomes a problem. An example of operation when this configuration is adopted will be described below with reference to FIG. 57.

In FIG. 57, the opening/closing sensor for the upper door is designated as "opening/closing detection SW1", and the opening/closing sensor for the lower door is designated as "opening/closing detection SW2". Further, it is assumed that a door key is provided for locking these doors together, and the state of this door key is detected by a "door key SW". Note that the door key SW has two states: a "closed detection state" in which it detects that all doors are in the lock position, and an "open detection state" in which it detects that all doors are in the unlocked position. Furthermore, a state in which the door key is not inserted is defined as a "non-detection state."

First, in FIG. 57(A)(1), in the slot machine 100 with the power turned on, the reels 110 to 112 are stopped (waiting for the player to start playing), and the open/close detection SW1 and the open/close detection Both SW2 are in the closed detection state, the light emitting bodies (various lamps 420, etc.) emit light in a customer waiting light emission mode, the customer waiting BGM is output from the sound output means (speakers 272, 277), and the effect image display device 157 A state in which a customer waiting effect is displayed is shown.

Next, in FIG. 57(A)(2), both the upper door and the lower door are opened using the door key from the state shown in FIG. 57(A)(1) (opening/closing detection SW1 and opening/closing detection SW2). , and the door key SW are both in the open detection state), and the setting key SW is in the ON state. In this case, a door open detection command is transmitted (step S502 in FIG. 45), and the first sub-control unit 400 that receives this command outputs an opening sound from the sound output means (speakers 272, 277) and A process of emitting light from various lamps 420, etc.) in an open light emission mode is executed (step S807 in FIG. 48). Furthermore, since the setting key SW is in the ON state, the current setting value can be confirmed (setting value confirmation mode) (Yes determination in step S603 in FIG. 46). In this state, the process of displaying the current setting value using the setting value display device 101a (step S604 in FIG. 46) is executed. FIG. 57(A)(2) shows how the number 1 indicating setting 1 is displayed on the setting value display device 101a. Further, a setting value confirmation start command is transmitted (step S605 in FIG. 46), and the first sub-control unit 400 that has received this command executes processing to display the management screen on the effect image display device 157. (Steps S807 to S817 in FIG. 48). Note that the output from the sound output means (speakers 272, 277) is maintained as an open sound, and the light emission mode of the light emitters (various lamps 420, etc.) is maintained in the open light emission mode.

In FIG. 57(A)(3), both the upper door and the lower door are closed from the state shown in FIG. 57(A)(2), and the open/close detection SW1, open/close detection SW2, and door key SW are all closed. The state when the detection state is reached is shown. While the set value confirmation process is being executed (set value confirmation mode), when the open/close detection SW1, open/close detection SW2, and door key SW are all in the closed detection state, the set value confirmation mode is activated in the same way as when the setting key is turned OFF. (Yes determination in step S606 in FIG. 46). FIG. 57(A)(3) shows that the display on the setting value display device 101a is in a hidden state because the setting value confirmation mode has ended with the setting key still in the ON state. .

When the upper and lower doors are opened again from the state shown in Figure 57 (A) (3), the setting value confirmation mode will start again since the setting key is already in the ON state (Fig. 46 (Yes in step S603). FIG. 57(A)(4) shows the same state as that shown in FIG. 57(A)(2).

The above modification is similar to the case where the front door 102 is in the open state as explained in FIG. It is configured to operate. In addition, since the open/close detection SW1, the open/close detection SW2, and the door key SW are all in the closed detection state, the same operation as when the front door 102 is in the closed state described in FIG. 51(B) is performed. It is composed of Here, the operation when the opening/closing detection SW1, the opening/closing detection SW2, and the door key SW do not all match will be further explained using FIG. 57(B).

First, the states of FIG. 57(B)(1) and FIG. 57(B)(2) are the same as FIG. 57(A)(1) and FIG. 57(A)(2), respectively. Further, in FIG. 57(B)(3), only the upper door is changed from the state shown in FIG. 57(B)(2) to the closed state (opening/closing detection SW1 is in the closed detection state), and the door key is removed (door key SW1 is in the closed detection state). (non-detected state) is shown. Further, FIG. 57(B)(4) shows the state when the lower door changes from the state shown in FIG. 57(B)(3) to the closed state (open/close detection SW2 is in the closed detection state). . Fig. 57(B)(5) shows the state when the door key is inserted from the state shown in Fig. 57(B)(4) to the position where all doors are locked (the door key SW is in the closed detection state). (the same state as in FIG. 57(A)(3)).

FIG. 57(B)(3) shows that after the open/close detection SW1, open/close detection SW2, and door key SW are all in the open detection state, these states become inconsistent and the set value confirmation state is not established. It is shown that the state is neither a playable state nor a playable state (playable state). In this state, the setting values displayed on the setting value display device 101a are hidden, and the message “The door is open” is displayed on the screen of the effect image display device 157. Note that the game cannot be started in this state.

Furthermore, in FIG. 57(B)(4), although the open/close detection SW1 and the open/close detection SW2 are in the closed detection state, the door key SW is in the non-detection state (open/close detection SW1, open/close detection SW2, door key SW). (SW mismatch), it is shown that the game is not possible in this case as well. After that, when the door key is inserted and all the doors are in the lock position (door key SW is in the closed detection state), the game becomes possible as shown in FIG. 57(B)(5) (FIG. 57(A)( 3)).

As in the example in FIG. 57(A), if multiple doors are provided, check the set value in the same way as when the front door 102 is open when all of the multiple doors are open. If all of the plurality of doors are in the closed state, the setting value confirmation state may be ended in the same way as in the case where the front door 102 is in the closed state. Furthermore, in the example of FIG. 57(A), not only the states of the plurality of doors but also the state of the door key are determined, but the state of the door key may not be determined. Furthermore, FIG. 57(B) shows an example in which the game becomes impossible if the states of multiple doors or door keys become inconsistent between the transition to the setting value confirmation state and the end of this state. , a configuration may be adopted in which such a state is not provided. Further, unlike the example in FIG. 57, for example, the transition to the setting value confirmation state may be performed based on the state of one of a plurality of doors, or the setting value confirmation state may be made based on the state of the door key. It is also possible to perform a transition to .

[About the check operation of the production means]
In this embodiment, various presentation means such as a presentation image display device 157, a shutter 163, speakers 272, 277, and various lamps 420 are provided. Hereinafter, an example of the confirmation operation of such a presentation means will be explained using the examples of FIGS. 58 to 60. Note that in this embodiment, when the front door 102 (opening/closing sensor) is closed during setting value confirmation (setting confirmation mode), setting value confirmation (setting confirmation mode) ends; however, in the following example, The following description assumes that the configuration continues without ending the setting value confirmation (setting confirmation mode) even if the front door 102 (opening/closing sensor) is closed during setting value confirmation (setting confirmation mode).

[Checking operation of production means (1)]
The example in FIG. 58 is an example of the confirmation operation of the shutter 163. In this example, it is assumed that the shutter 163 is provided with an effect lamp 163L.

FIGS. 58(a) to 58(f) are diagrams showing an example of the flow of operations when the power is turned on. In this example, it is assumed that a confirmation operation is performed in which the shutter 163, which is in the initial position when the power is turned on, is closed, and then returned to the initial position.

FIG. 58(a) shows the state before power is turned on. In this state, nothing is displayed on the effect image display device 157, and it is shown that nothing is output from the speakers 272 and 277. Furthermore, the shutters 163 are located on the left and right sides of the effect image display device 157, and in this position, the shutters 163 are completely open, and this position is the initial position.

FIG. 58(b) shows the state when the power is turned on from the state of FIG. 58(a). In this state, the effect image display device 157 displays the message "Starting up", indicating that the speakers 272 and 277 are outputting the sound "Power has been turned on". Note that the shutter 163 remains at the initial position.

In FIG. 58(c), the demonstration effect is started by the effect image display device 157 from the state shown in FIG. 58(b), and the sound "The power has been turned on" from the speakers 272 and 277 has stopped. It has been shown that It is also shown that the confirmation operation of the shutter 163 has started, and the shutter 163, which was at the initial position, is moving in the closing direction. At this time, the performance lamp 163L provided on the shutter 163 is in a lighting mode for demonstration performance.

FIG. 58(d) shows that the shutter 163 has further moved from the state shown in FIG. 58(c) and is now in a completely closed state.

FIG. 58(e) shows that the shutter 163 is moving toward the initial position from the state of FIG. 58(d).

FIG. 58(f) shows that the shutter 163 has returned to its initial position from the state of FIG. 58(e).

As shown in FIGS. 58(a) to 58(f), it is possible to confirm whether the shutter 163 operates normally or not by the confirmation operation when the power is turned on.

Further, during the confirmation operation, the lighting mode of the production lamp 163L provided on the shutter 163 changes as the open/closed state of the front door 102 changes. Based on this change, the state of the front door 102 can also be confirmed. Note that this change in lighting mode may include turning off the light as one of the lighting modes. 58(g) and (h) show the state when the open/closed state of the front door 102 changes from the state shown in FIG. 58(b) (for example, from the closed state to the open state). 58(g) and (h) show that the lighting mode of the production lamp 163L changes due to the change in the open/closed state of the front door 102 in the states shown in FIGS. 58(c) and 58(d), respectively. has been done. In addition, in this example, since the front door 102 is in an open state, it is shown that the speakers 272 and 277 are outputting a voice saying "The door is open." In addition, as shown in the flowcharts from FIG. 58(h) to FIG. 58(e), the lighting mode of the production preparation lamp 163L that changes due to the change in the open/close state of the front door 102 changes when the open/close state of the front door 102 changes. Return to the original state by returning to the previous state. Further, in this example, since the front door 102 is in a closed state, output from the speakers 272 and 277 is stopped.

[Checking operation of production means (2)]
The example in FIG. 59 is an example of the confirmation operation of the speakers 272 and 277. In this example, it is assumed that the confirmation operation is executed by an operation from the management screen. Note that the management screen here is not limited to the one displayed while changing the settings or checking the setting values described above, but may be displayed by a specific operation by the administrator, for example.

FIG. 59(a) shows a state in which the management screen is displayed on the effect image display device 157. Here, select "Operation check" from the menu displayed on this management screen, switch to the screen shown in Figure 59(b), and select "Speaker check" from the menu displayed on this switched screen. Suppose you select

The confirmation operation that starts when you select "Speaker Check" above outputs confirmation audio from the right speaker, left speaker, and bottom speaker in that order, and select "End Speaker Check". Up to this point, the above audio output is repeated in order. Note that the number of repetitions may be set in advance, or the execution time of the confirmation operation may be set in advance.

FIGS. 59(c) to 59(e) show how output is performed in the order of the right speaker, left speaker, and lower speaker as the first output in the confirmation operation. Further, FIG. 59(f) shows the state in which the output from the right speaker is being executed in the second output in the confirmation operation.

If "speaker check" is selected again during execution of the confirmation operation described above, the confirmation operation being executed ends and a new confirmation operation is executed.

59(g) to (i) show that when "Speaker check" is selected from the menu displayed on the screen of FIG. 59(b), the right speaker and left speaker are output as the first output in the confirmation operation. The output up to , is shown being executed. Here, FIG. 59(j) shows that by selecting "speaker check" again in the state of FIG. 59(i), the currently running confirmation operation is finished, and the second output in the new confirmation operation is displayed. This shows the output from the right speaker being executed. After that, FIG. 59(k) shows that the currently executing confirmation operation has been completed by selecting "End speaker check" in the state of FIG. 59(j).

Here, in the above example, the configuration was explained in which the confirmation operation ends when "Speaker check end" is selected, but for example, when the front door 102 becomes open, this confirmation operation ends. You may also do so. In FIG. 59(l), when the front door 102 is opened from the state shown in FIG. 59(i), the confirmation operation of the speakers 272 and 277 is completed, and a voice saying "The door is open" is output. It is shown that In this case, the confirmation operation of the speakers 272 and 277 may be restarted when the front door 102 is closed, or may not be restarted. When the confirmation operation of the speakers 272 and 277 is restarted, the confirmation operation may be restarted from the state when the front door 102 is opened, or when the front door 102 is opened. A new confirmation operation may be started regardless of the state.

[Checking operation of production means (3)]
The example in FIG. 60 is an example of the confirmation operation of the shutter 163. In this example, it is assumed that the shutter 163 is provided with an effect lamp 163L. In this example, it is assumed that the confirmation operation is executed by operation from the management screen (see FIG. 59(b)). Note that the management screen here is not limited to the one displayed while changing the settings or checking the setting values described above, but may be displayed by a specific operation by the administrator, for example.

FIG. 60(a) shows a menu that is displayed when "operation check" is selected from the management screen. Here, it is assumed that "Movable body check" is selected from this menu.

60(b) to (f) show that a confirmation operation is being performed in which the shutter 163 is changed from an initial position where it is completely open to a closed state and then returned to the initial position. ing.

Note that while the front door 102 is in the open state during execution of this confirmation operation, the lighting mode of the production lamp 163L provided on the shutter 163 changes. FIG. 60(c) shows that the lighting mode of the production lamp 163L changes as the front door 102 is opened. It is also shown that while the front door 102 is in the open state, the speakers 272 and 277 are outputting a voice saying "The door is open." Further, FIG. 60(d) shows that by closing the front door 102, the lighting mode of the production lamp 163L is returned to its original state, and the output from the speakers 272 and 277 is stopped. .

Furthermore, if "movable object check" is selected again during execution of this confirmation operation, no new confirmation operation is started, and nothing is executed in response to this operation. In Figure 60(d), "Movable object check" is selected again while the confirmation operation is being executed, but in Figure 60(e), the confirmation operation being executed continues regardless of this operation. It is shown that there is.

FIG. 60(g) shows a menu displayed when "operation check" is selected from the management screen. Here, it is assumed that "Movable body check" is selected from this menu.

60(h) to (l) show that a confirmation operation is being performed in which the shutter 163 is changed from an initial position where it is completely open to a closed state and then returned to the initial position. ing.

Note that if "speaker check" is selected during execution of this confirmation operation, the confirmation operation of the speakers 272 and 277 explained with reference to FIG. 59 is started, and is executed in parallel with the confirmation operation of the shutter 163. FIG. 60(k) shows that the confirmation operation of the shutter 163 and the confirmation operation of the speakers 272 and 277 are executed in parallel. Further, FIG. 60(l) shows that when the confirmation operation of the shutter 163 ends, the confirmation operations of the speakers 272 and 277 are continued.

≪Correspondence between the structure of the invention and the embodiments≫
Hereinafter, the configuration of the invention based on the above embodiment will be described with reference to the corresponding configuration.

In the above explanation (especially [operation example when setting value confirmation is executed] and [operation example when front door 102 is closed during setting value confirmation]),
Main control means (for example, main control unit 300) that controls the game based on any one of the plurality of setting values;
A door body (for example, front door 102) that is provided on the front side of the game machine and can be opened and closed;
Opening/closing determination means (for example, main control unit 300) for determining the open/closed state of the door body;
A predetermined operating means (e.g., setting key SW) having a first operating state (e.g., setting key SW is OFF) and a second operating state (e.g., setting key SW is ON); A game machine comprising:
The main control means includes:
A playable state in which the game can proceed, and a setting confirmation state in which it is possible to check the currently set setting values (for example, the setting values are displayed on the setting value display device 101a in step S604 in FIG. 46). It is possible to set any one of a plurality of states including at least
When the opening/closing determining means determines that the door body is in the open state, when the predetermined operating means is operated from the first operating state to the second operating state, the setting confirmation state is changed. (e.g., a change from the state in FIG. 50(B)(2) to the state in FIG. 50(B)(3)),
If the opening/closing determination means determines that the door body is in the closed state in the setting confirmation state, even if the predetermined operating means is operated to the second operation state, the setting confirmation state is not changed. It is a means capable of ending and starting the game ready state (for example, a change from the state in FIG. 51(B)(2) to the state in FIG. 51(B)(3)),
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

In the above game machine, the game machine can be brought into a playable state by simply closing the door from the setting confirmation state. Further, even if the administrator forgets to end the setting confirmation state, the setting confirmation state can be prevented from being visible to the players, and security can be improved.

In addition, the gaming machine described above is
The main control means includes:
In the state in which the game is possible and the predetermined operation means is operated to the second operation state, if the opening/closing determination means determines that the door body is in the open state, the game means capable of ending the possible state and starting the setting confirmation state (for example, a change from the state in FIG. 51(B)(3) to the state in FIG. 51(B)(4));
It may also be a game machine characterized by the following.

In the game machine described above, for example, when the administrator plays a trial game, he or she can immediately check the set values by simply opening the door before or after playing the game. In addition, even if the administrator forgets to exit the settings confirmation state, simply opening the door will immediately return to the settings confirmation state, allowing the administrator to immediately notice that the settings confirmation state was not exited using the normal procedure. .

In addition, the gaming machine described above is
A plurality of reels (for example, reels 110 to 112) decorated with a plurality of types of symbols and driven to rotate;
Further comprising a plurality of stop buttons (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139) provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels and for individually stopping rotation of the reels,
The main control means includes:
When the reels are rotating in the game ready state and the predetermined operating means is operated to the second operating state, the door body is determined to be in the open state by the opening/closing determining means. Even if it is determined that the setting confirmation state is present, the setting confirmation state is not started (for example, [Operation example (1) when the setting key SW is ON]), from the state of FIG. 52A (1) to the state of FIG. (A) Change to state (2)),
It may also be a game machine characterized by the following.

With the above gaming machine, if the door is opened during play, there is a possibility that fraudulent activity is being carried out, so security can be improved by not controlling the setting confirmation state. .

In addition, the gaming machine described above is
Error detection means (for example, main control unit 300) capable of detecting a predetermined error;
Further comprising an error notification means (for example, payout number display 127) capable of executing predetermined error notification,
The error notification means includes:
If the predetermined error is detected by the error detection means in the setting confirmation state, the predetermined error notification can be executed in the setting confirmation state (for example, FIG. 54(B)(1));
If the predetermined error is detected by the error detection means, the setting confirmation state is not started anew (for example, [Operation example of error notification and error cancellation during setting value confirmation], FIG. 46 No determination in step S602, change from the state of FIG. 54(B)(2) to the state of FIG. 54(B)(3)),
It may also be a game machine characterized by the following.

In the above game machine, if the door is opened during error notification, there is a possibility that fraudulent activity is being carried out, so it is possible to improve security by not controlling the setting confirmation state. can.

In addition, the above explanation (in particular, [Example of operation when changing settings] [Example of operation when checking setting values] [Example of operation when front door 102 is closed while changing settings]) [Settings] Operation example when the front door 102 is closed during value confirmation]),
Main control means (for example, main control unit 300) that controls the game based on any one of the plurality of setting values;
A door body (for example, front door 102) that is provided on the front side of the game machine and can be opened and closed;
Opening/closing determination means (for example, main control unit 300) for determining the open/closed state of the door body;
A predetermined operating means (e.g., setting key SW) having a first operating state (e.g., setting key SW is OFF) and a second operating state (e.g., setting key SW is ON); A game machine comprising:
The main control means includes:
A playable state in which the game can proceed, and a setting confirmation state in which it is possible to check the currently set setting values (for example, a state in which the setting values are displayed on the setting value display device 101a in step S604 in FIG. 46). , and a plurality of settings including at least a setting change state in which any one of the plurality of setting values can be set (for example, a state in which the setting value can be changed in steps S306 and S307 in FIG. 43). It is possible to set any of the states,
When the opening/closing determining means determines that the door body is in the open state, when the predetermined operating means is operated from the first operating state to the second operating state, the setting confirmation state is changed. (e.g., a change from the state in FIG. 50(B)(2) to the state in FIG. 50(B)(3)),
It is possible to start the setting change state based on the power being turned on while the predetermined operation means is operated in the second operation state (for example, as shown in FIG. 50(A) (1) ) to the state shown in FIG. 50(A)(2)),
If the opening/closing determination means determines that the door body is in the closed state in the setting confirmation state, even if the predetermined operating means is operated to the second operation state, the setting confirmation state is not changed. It is possible to end the game and start the game ready state (for example, change from the state in FIG. 51(B)(2) to the state in FIG. 51(B)(3)),
In the setting change state, even if the door body is determined to be in the closed state by the opening/closing determination means, the game ready state is not started (for example, from the state shown in FIG. 51(A)(2)) Change to the state in FIG. 51(A)(3)),
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

In the above game machine, the game machine can be brought into a playable state by simply closing the door from the setting confirmation state. Further, even if the administrator forgets to end the setting confirmation state, the setting confirmation state can be prevented from being visible to the players, and security can be improved.

On the other hand, regarding the setting change status, if the game is started immediately by simply closing the door if the setting has not been completed in the normal procedure, there may be inconveniences such as the setting value not being set as expected by the administrator. may occur. Therefore, security and convenience can be improved by not starting the game when the door is closed, unlike in the setting confirmation state.

In addition, the gaming machine described above is
The main control means includes:
In the state in which the game is possible and the predetermined operation means is operated to the second operation state, if the opening/closing determination means determines that the door body is in the open state, the game means capable of ending the possible state and starting the setting confirmation state (for example, a change from the state in FIG. 51(B)(3) to the state in FIG. 51(B)(4));
It may also be a game machine characterized by the following.

In the game machine described above, for example, when the administrator plays a trial game, he or she can immediately check the set values by simply opening the door before or after playing the game. In addition, even if the administrator forgets to exit the settings confirmation state, simply opening the door will immediately return to the settings confirmation state, allowing the administrator to immediately notice that the settings confirmation state was not exited using the normal procedure. .

In addition, the gaming machine described above is
A plurality of reels (for example, reels 110 to 112) decorated with a plurality of types of symbols and driven to rotate;
Further comprising a plurality of stop buttons (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139) provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels and for individually stopping rotation of the reels,
The main control means includes:
When the reels are rotating in the game ready state and the predetermined operating means is operated to the second operating state, the opening/closing determination means determines that the door body is in the open state. Even if it is determined that the setting confirmation state is present, the setting confirmation state is not started (for example, [Example of operation when the setting key SW is ON (1)]), from the state of FIG. (A) change to state (2)),
It may also be a game machine characterized by the following.

With the above gaming machine, if the door is opened during play, there is a possibility that fraudulent activity is being carried out, so security can be improved by not controlling the setting confirmation state. .

In addition, the gaming machine described above is
Error detection means (for example, main control unit 300) capable of detecting a predetermined error;
Further comprising an error notification means (for example, payout number display 127) capable of executing predetermined error notification,
The error notification means includes:
If the predetermined error is detected by the error detection means in the setting confirmation state, the predetermined error notification can be executed in the setting confirmation state (for example, FIG. 54(B)(1));
If the predetermined error is detected by the error detection means, the setting confirmation state is not started anew (for example, [Operation example of error notification and error cancellation during setting value confirmation], FIG. 46 No determination in step S602, change from the state of FIG. 54(B)(2) to the state of FIG. 54(B)(3)),
It may also be a game machine characterized by the following.

In the above game machine, if the door is opened during error notification, there is a possibility that fraudulent activity is being carried out, so it is possible to improve security by not controlling the setting confirmation state. can.

In addition, in the above explanation (especially [Checking operation of the production means (1)], [Checking operation of the production means (2)], and [Checking operation of the production means (3)]),
A main control means (for example, main control unit 300) that performs control regarding the game,
A presentation means including a first presentation means (for example, speakers 272, 277) and a second presentation means (for example, shutter 163) different from the first presentation means;
A predetermined operation means (for example, a cross button),
Confirmation operation means (for example, first sub-control unit 400) that causes the production means to execute a predetermined confirmation operation (for example, FIGS. 58(b) to 58(f), FIGS. 59(c) to (e)) ),
The main control means includes:
A means by which a predetermined state (for example, a state in which a management screen is displayed) can be set,
The confirmation operation means is
When a first operation (for example, selection of "speaker check" in FIG. 59(b)) on the predetermined operation means is performed in the predetermined state, the confirmation operation on the first presentation means is executed. It is possible and
When a second operation (for example, selection of "movable object check" in FIG. 60(a)) is performed on the predetermined operation means in the predetermined state, the confirmation operation is executed on the second performance means. is possible,
If the first operation is performed while the first presentation means is executing the confirmation operation, the confirmation operation being executed is terminated and a new confirmation operation is performed for the first presentation means. While starting (e.g., change from the state of FIG. 59(i) to the state of FIG. 59(j)),
Even if the second operation is performed while the second performance means is executing the confirmation operation, the confirmation operation being executed does not end (for example, from FIG. 60(d) to FIG. 60( e) a change to the state of
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

The presentation means of the game machine is not limited to the speakers 272, 277, various lamps 420, presentation image display device 157, and shutter 163 of this embodiment, but also includes vibration means, for example, and there are various effects unique to each presentation means. can perform various actions. In the above-mentioned game machine, when performing the confirmation operation of the performance means, it is possible to improve the convenience of checking the operation by dividing the performance means into the first performance means and the second performance means according to their characteristics. may be possible. Note that the first presentation means and the second presentation means are not limited to the configuration of the presentation means of this embodiment.

In addition, the gaming machine described above is
The first presentation means includes a plurality of presentation means (for example, a left speaker, a right speaker, and a lower speaker),
The confirmation operation for the first presentation means is an operation for sequentially performing a predetermined operation for each of the plurality of presentation means included in the first presentation means (for example, FIG. 59(c) ～(e) operation),
It may also be a game machine characterized by the following.

In the above-mentioned game machine, even if multiple performance means are being checked, by performing the first operation, the operation can be immediately checked again from the first performance means, which is convenient when checking the operation. can improve sex. Note that the first presentation means is not limited to the configuration of the presentation means of this embodiment, and various presentation means may be employed.

In addition, the gaming machine described above is
The confirmation operation means is
When the power is turned on, even if the second operation is not performed on the operation means, the confirmation operation on the second presentation means may be executed (for example, in FIGS. 58(a) to 58). (f) operation),
It may also be a game machine characterized by the following.

In the game machine described above, a new confirmation action can be performed for the first performance means even during the confirmation action, but a new confirmation action cannot be performed for the second performance means during the confirmation action. Can not. However, by providing an opportunity to perform a confirmation operation on the second presentation means when the power is turned on, it is possible to obtain an opportunity to confirm the operation of the second presentation means. Additionally, a check operation performed when the power is turned on allows for early detection of malfunctions. Note that the confirmation operation for the second presentation means when the power is turned on is not limited to a configuration in which it is always executed, but may be executed depending on some condition.

In addition, the gaming machine described above is
The confirmation operation means is
When the second operation is performed while the first performance means is performing the confirmation operation, while continuing the confirmation operation on the first performance means, the second operation is performed on the second performance means. It is possible to perform a confirmation operation (for example, the operation in FIG. 60(k)),
It may also be a game machine characterized by the following.

In the game machine described above, the time required for operation confirmation can be shortened by executing the confirmation operation of the first performance means and the confirmation operation of the second performance means in parallel.

In addition, the gaming machine described above is
Further comprising a setting means (for example, main control unit 300) capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values that have different advantages for the player,
The predetermined state is
a setting change state in which any one of the plurality of setting values can be set;
It may also be a game machine characterized by the following.

In addition, the gaming machine described above is
Further comprising a setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values that have different degrees of advantage for the player,
The predetermined state is
is in a setting confirmation state in which it is possible to confirm the currently set setting values;
It may also be a game machine characterized by the following.

In addition, the gaming machine described above is
The first production means is a means for outputting audio,
The second presentation means is a movable body,
It may also be a game machine characterized by the following.

In addition, in the above explanation (especially [Operation example (1) of error notification and error cancellation], [Operation example (2) of error notification and error cancellation], and [Regarding error notification termination conditions]),
a first error detection means (e.g., selector sensor) capable of detecting a first error (e.g., selector error);
Error notification means capable of executing error notification (for example, payout number display 127, speakers 272, 277);
A game machine comprising a predetermined operation means (for example, a reset SW) capable of canceling the error notification,
The error notification means includes:
When the first error is detected by the first error detection means, it is possible to execute a first error notification to notify that the first error has been detected (for example, as shown in FIG. 53(A) (1)),
During the first period after the first error notification is executed (for example, the period until "Selector error" is output once), even if the cancellation operation is performed, the first error notification is not performed. (for example, timings t2 and t4 in FIG. 55), and if the cancellation operation is performed after the first period has elapsed since the first error notification was executed, the first error notification is terminated. means (for example, the error notification end conditions of steps S309 and S318 in FIG. 43 and step S707 in FIG. 47, timing t6 in FIG. 55),
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

In the above gaming machines, since the error is not cleared for the first period after the error notification is executed, the administrator (and the player) can more reliably understand that an error has occurred, which improves security. can be achieved. In the above embodiment, the first period is a period corresponding to one cycle of the error sound, but if the period during which error notification is executed is guaranteed to some extent, this first period There is no limitation on the period. Further, the above configuration can be applied not only to the errors in the above embodiments but also to various types of errors.

In addition, the gaming machine described above is
Further comprising a security signal output means (for example, information output circuit 443) that outputs a security signal to the outside of the gaming machine based on the occurrence of an error,
The security signal output means includes:
means for continuing to output the security signal during the first period after the first error notification is executed (for example, FIG. 55);
It may also be a game machine characterized by the following.

In the game machine described above, by ensuring the output time of the security signal, the security signal can be normally output to the outside, and security can be improved.

In addition, the gaming machine described above is
The first error notification is
It is a notification that includes a sound in which a predetermined announcement sound (for example, the sound of "Selector error") is repeatedly output,
The first period is
The period is longer than the period required for outputting the predetermined announcement sound once.
It may also be a game machine characterized by the following.

In the above-mentioned gaming machine, the announcement sound is output at least once until the error is cleared, so the administrator (and the player) can more reliably understand that an error has occurred. Security can be improved.

In addition, the gaming machine described above is
A door body (for example, front door 102) that is provided on the front side of the game machine and can be opened and closed;
Further comprising an opening/closing detection means (for example, an opening/closing sensor) capable of detecting the opening/closing state of the door body,
The predetermined operating means is
means provided at a position that can be operated only when the door body is in an open state;
The first error notification is
The notification includes the display of a predetermined error image (for example, the image of the effect image display device 157 in FIG. 53(A)(1)),
The error notification means includes:
When the opening/closing detection means detects an open state when executing the first error notification, stopping the audio output of the first error notification and displaying the predetermined error image ( For example, timing t14 to t15 in FIG. 55),
It may also be a game machine characterized by the following.

In the above gaming machine, when the administrator opens the door during error notification to clear the error, the error sound output is stopped while the error image remains at a minimum. It is possible to eliminate the annoyance of sound.

In addition, the gaming machine described above is
further comprising a second error detection means (for example, a hopper sensor) capable of detecting a second error (for example, a hopper error),
The error notification means includes:
When the second error is detected by the second error detection means, it is possible to perform a second error notification to notify that the second error has been detected (for example, as shown in FIG. 53(B) (1)),
There is a case (hereinafter referred to as "first case") where the first error notification is ended and the second error notification is started (for example, timing t10 in FIG. 55),
In the second error notification in the first case, during the second period after the second error notification is executed (for example, the period until "Hopper error" is output once), the above-mentioned Continuing the second error notification even if the cancellation operation is performed (for example, from timing t10 to t12 in FIG. 55);
It may also be a game machine characterized by the following.

In the above-mentioned gaming machine, there is a period in which error notification is reliably executed for each error, so the administrator (and players) can more reliably understand that each error has occurred. Security can be improved. Note that in the above embodiment, the second period is a period corresponding to one cycle of the error sound, but if the period during which the error notification is executed to some extent is guaranteed, this second period may be set as the period corresponding to one cycle of the error sound. There is no limitation on the period.

In addition, in the above explanation (especially [Example of operation of error notification and error cancellation (1)] and [Example of operation of error notification and error cancellation during setting change]),
Main control means (for example, main control unit 300) that controls the game based on any one of the plurality of setting values;
error detection means (e.g., selector sensor) capable of detecting a predetermined error (e.g., selector error);
A gaming machine equipped with an error notification means (for example, a payout number display 127, speakers 272, 277) capable of performing error notification,
The main control means includes:
A playable state in which the game can proceed, and a setting change state in which it is possible to set any setting value from among a plurality of setting values (for example, the setting value is changed in steps S306 and S307 in FIG. 43). It is possible to set any one of a plurality of states including at least one possible state), and
The error notification means includes:
When the predetermined error is detected by the error detection means, it is possible to execute a predetermined error notification to notify that the predetermined error has been detected (for example, FIG. 53(A)(1), FIG. 54 (A)(2)),
In the playable state, the predetermined error notification is executed in a first manner (for example, FIG. 53(A)(1)),
means for executing the predetermined error notification in a second mode different from the first mode in the setting change state (for example, FIG. 54(A)(2));
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

The gaming machine described above has a configuration in which the manner of error notification is different between a game-enabled state in which a player plays a game and a setting change state in which a setting value is changed by an administrator. In this way, by varying the manner of error notification depending on the situation, it is possible to provide a highly convenient game machine that does not feel bothersome to the administrator while maintaining security. Note that the error notification means is not limited to the configuration in this embodiment, and various notification means can be adopted.

In addition, the gaming machine described above is
The first aspect is an aspect that is more noticeable than the second aspect, an aspect that is louder than the second aspect, or an aspect that is easier to recognize than the second aspect (for example, FIG. A) In (2), the error notification is executed only on the payout number display 127, but in FIG.
It may also be a game machine characterized by the following.

In the gaming machine described above, error notification is easier to grasp in a game enabled state in which a player plays a game than in a setting change state in which a setting value is changed by an administrator. With this configuration, it is possible to provide a highly convenient game machine in which the error notification is transmitted more reliably and the administrator does not feel bothered at the error handling stage.

In addition, the gaming machine described above is
The plurality of states include a setting confirmation state in which the currently set setting value can be confirmed (for example, a state in which the setting value is displayed on the setting value display device 101a in step S604 in FIG. 46). ,
The error notification means includes:
In the setting confirmation state, the predetermined error notification is executed in the second mode (for example, [Operation example of error notification and error cancellation during setting value confirmation], FIG. 54(B) (1) ),
It may also be a game machine characterized by the following.

In the gaming machine described above, the setting confirmation state in which the administrator checks the setting values is configured to provide error notification in the same manner as the setting change state. In this way, by varying the manner of error notification depending on the situation, it is possible to provide a highly convenient game machine that does not feel bothersome to the administrator while maintaining security.

In addition, the gaming machine described above is
A door body (for example, front door 102) that is provided on the front side of the game machine and can be opened and closed;
Opening/closing determination means (for example, main control unit 300) for determining the open/closed state of the door body;
A predetermined operating means (e.g., setting key SW) having a first operating state (e.g., setting key SW is OFF) and a second operating state (e.g., setting key SW is ON); , further comprising:
The main control means includes:
When the opening/closing determining means determines that the door body is in the open state, when the predetermined operating means is operated from the first operating state to the second operating state, the setting confirmation state is changed. means that can initiate (for example, a change from the state in FIG. 50(B)(2) to the state in FIG. 50(B)(3)),
The error notification means includes:
When the opening/closing determination means determines that the door body is in the closed state while the predetermined error notification is being executed in the second mode in the setting confirmation state, the predetermined error notification is executed. Changing the notification mode from the second mode to the first mode (for example, changing from the state of FIG. 54(B)(1) to the state of FIG. 54(B)(2)),
It may also be a game machine characterized by the following.

In the gaming machine described above, the mode of error notification changes the moment the door is closed, thereby making it easier for the administrator to notice that he or she has forgotten to clear the error.

In addition, in the above explanation (especially [Operation example (1) of error notification and error cancellation] and [Operation example (2) of error notification and error cancellation]),
Error detection means capable of detecting errors (e.g., selector sensor, hopper sensor);
A first notification means (for example, effect image display device 157) that can execute error notification;
A game machine comprising a predetermined operation means (for example, a reset SW) capable of canceling the error notification,
The error detection means includes:
A first error detection means (e.g. selector sensor) capable of detecting a first error (e.g. selector error) and a second error detection means (e.g. , hopper sensor);
The first notification means is
When the first error is detected by the first error detection means, a first error notification (for example, FIG. 53(A) (1)) is sent to notify that the first error has been detected. is feasible and
When the second error is detected by the second error detection means, a second error notification (for example, FIG. 53(B) (1)) is sent to notify that the second error has been detected. is feasible and
When the second error is detected by the second error detection means in a state where the first error is detected by the first error detection means (hereinafter referred to as the "first case"), The first error notification can be executed and the second error notification can be executed (for example, FIG. 53(A)(2)),
In the first case, in a state where the first error notification and the second error notification are being executed, removing the cause of the first error and the cause of the second error. If the canceling operation is performed once after removing , the first error notification is terminated while the second error notification is continued (for example, FIG. 53(A)(3));
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

In the gaming machine mentioned above, even if the two types of error causes have been removed, by removing the error in stages, it is possible to improve security by prompting the administrator to check each error location. .

In addition, the gaming machine described above is
a second notification means (for example, payout number display 127) capable of executing error notification;
The second notification means is a means that executes the first error notification but does not execute the second error notification in the first case (for example, FIG. 53(A)(2)). ,
It may also be a game machine characterized by the following.

In the gaming machine described above, security can sometimes be improved by notifying the first error at two locations.

In addition, the gaming machine described above is
The first notification means is
When the first error is detected by the first error detection means in a state where the second error is detected by the second error detection means (hereinafter referred to as "second case"), The first error notification can be executed and the second error notification can be executed (for example, FIG. 53(B)(2)),
In the second case, in a state where the first error notification and the second error notification are being executed, removing the cause of the first error and the cause of the second error. If the canceling operation is performed once after removing , the first error notification is terminated while the second error notification is continued (for example, FIG. 53(B)(3));
It may also be a game machine characterized by the following.

In the gaming machine mentioned above, even if the two types of error causes have been removed, by removing the error in stages, it is possible to improve security by prompting the administrator to check each error location. .

In addition, the gaming machine described above is
The second notification means is a means that executes the first error notification but does not execute the second error notification in the second case (for example, FIG. 53(B)(2)). ,
It may also be a game machine characterized by the following.

In the gaming machine described above, security can sometimes be improved by notifying the first error at two locations.

≪Others≫
In this embodiment, the slot machine 100 using medals (coins) as a game medium is shown as an example of a game machine, but the invention is not limited to this, and game balls (for example, pachinko balls) are used as game media. It can be applied to slot machines, pachinko machines, arranged ball game machines, Jankyu ball game machines, smart balls, etc. as media.

Note that a slot machine is a slot machine that operates on a mobile terminal (smartphone, game console) or computer by a program that simulates the operation based on the above configuration, and that only exchanges electronic data without using medals. In this case, the game medium includes electronic data equivalent to medals, and the game medium is input by inputting the computerized data from a predetermined external device (electronic storage device). Paying out game media includes outputting electronic data to a predetermined external device (electronic storage device).

Although the present embodiment has been described above, it is not limited to the embodiment described above, and various modifications and changes can be made to the embodiment of the present invention without departing from the gist of the present invention. , those involving such modifications and changes are also included within the technical scope of the present invention. Further, the functions and effects described in the embodiments of the invention are merely a list of the most preferable functions and effects resulting from the present invention, and the functions and effects according to the present invention are described in the embodiments of the present invention. It is not limited to what has been done.

The game machine according to the present invention can be applied to a game machine represented by a pinball game machine (pachinko machine), a reel game machine (slot machine), an enclosed game machine, or a medalless slot machine. can.

100 Slot machine 110-112 Reel 113 Symbol display window 130-132 Bet button 135 Start lever 137-139 Stop button 156 Production button 157 Production image display device (liquid crystal display device)
300 Main control section 400 First sub-control section 500 Second sub-control section

Claims (1)

an error detection means capable of detecting an error;
a first notification means capable of performing error notification;
a second notification means capable of executing error notification;
A game machine comprising a predetermined operation means capable of canceling the error notification,
The error detection means includes:
There is a first error detection means capable of detecting the first error, and a second error detection means capable of detecting the second error,
The first notification means is
When the second error is detected by the second error detection means in a state where the first error is detected by the first error detection means (hereinafter referred to as the "first case"), A first error notification to notify that the first error has been detected can be executed, and a second error notification can be executed to notify that the second error has been detected,
In the first case, in a state where the first error notification and the second error notification are being executed, removing the cause of the first error and the cause of the second error. When the canceling operation is performed once after removing the error notification, the first error notification is terminated while the second error notification is continued;
When the first error is detected by the first error detection means in a state where the second error is detected by the second error detection means (hereinafter referred to as "second case"), The first error notification can be executed and the second error notification can be executed,
In the second case, in a state where the first error notification and the second error notification are being executed, removing the cause of the first error and the cause of the second error. means for continuing the second error notification while terminating the first error notification when the cancellation operation is performed once after the removal of the error notification;
The second notification means is
In the first case, the first error notification is executed while the second error notification is not executed;
In the second case, means for executing the first error notification while not executing the second error notification,
The second notification means has a smaller display area than the first notification means,
A game machine characterized by:

Images